Download Print this page

Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Cli Command Reference

Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Cli Command Reference

Iscli industry standard cli for lenovo enterprise network operating system 8.4

Hide thumbs Also See for RackSwitch G8264CS:

Application manual (634 pages)

,

Installation manual (96 pages)

,

Product manual (27 pages)

Table Of Contents

page of 703

/ 703
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Installation Manual

Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS

ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI

Command Reference

for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RackSwitch G8264CS and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS

Page 1 Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI Command Reference for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4...
Page 2 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in the Safety information and Environmental Notices and User Guide documents on the Lenovo Documentation CD, and the Warranty Information document that comes with the product. Second Edition (July 2017) © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Portions © Copyright IBM Corporation 2014 LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration “GSA” contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS‐35F‐05925. Lenovo and the Lenovo logo are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both.
Page 3 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information . . . . . . . . . . .44 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 SNMPv3 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 General System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Show Specific System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Show Recent Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 User Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 LDAP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Layer 2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 802.1X Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 FDB Multicast Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Show All FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database . . . . . . . . . . .58 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Link Aggregation Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Layer 2 Failover Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Layer 2 Failover Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Hot Links Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 LLDP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 LLDP Remote Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 4 Unidirectional Link Detection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 UDLD Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 802.1x Discovery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 802.1x Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 OAM Discovery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 OAM Port Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 vLAG Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 vLAG Aggregation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 vLAG Peer Gateway Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 vLAG VRRP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Spanning Tree Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 RSTP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 PVRST Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Spanning Tree Bridge Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Spanning Tree Root Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Multiple Spanning Tree Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Layer 3 Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 5 Access Control List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Access Control List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Access Control IPv6 List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 RMON Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 RMON History Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 RMON Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 RMON Event Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Link Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Port Transceiver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 VM Ready Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 VMReady Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 VM OUI Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 VM Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 VM Portchannel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 VM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 VM Check Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 VM Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 VM Bandwidth Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 VM Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 VMware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 VMware Hello Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 VMware Host Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 VMware VM Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ESX Server ‐ Switchport Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Contents...
Page 6 Virtual NIC (vNIC) Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 vNIC Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 vNIC Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 EVB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 EVB VSIType Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 EVB VMs Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Converged Enhanced Ethernet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 DCBX Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 DCBX Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 DCBX Feature Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 DCBX ETS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 DCBX PFC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 DCBX Application Protocol Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ETS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 PFC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 FIP Snooping FCoE Forwarder Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 7 ACL Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 VMAP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 SNMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 NTP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Statistics Dump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Chapter 4. Configuration Commands ....297 Viewing and Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Saving the Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 System Error Disable and Recovery Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . 307 Link Flap Dampening Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Contents...
Page 8 System Host Log Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 SSH Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 RADIUS Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 TACACS+ Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 LDAP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 System SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 SNMPv3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 User Security Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 SNMPv3 View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 View‐based Access Control Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . 340 SNMPv3 Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . 343 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . 344 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 9 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Hash Configuration . . . . . . . . 437 Layer 2 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Hash . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Layer 3 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Hash . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Virtual Link Aggregation Group (vLAG) Configuration . . . . . . . . 441 vLAG Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 vLAG ISL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 445 LACP Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Layer 2 Failover Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Failover Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Failover Manual Monitor Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Failover Manual Monitor Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 450 Hot Links Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Hot Links Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Hot Links Master Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Hot Links Backup Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Protocol‐Based VLAN Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Private VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Flooding VLAN Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Layer 3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Contents...
Page 10 IP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Default Gateway Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 IPv4 Static Route Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 IP Multicast Route Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 ARP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 ARP Static Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 IP Forwarding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Network Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Routing Map Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 IP Access List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Autonomous System Filter Path Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 480 Routing Information Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 RIP Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 RIP Route Redistribution Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Open Shortest Path First Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 11 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 IP Loopback Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 Converged Enhanced Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 ETS Global Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 ETS Global Priority Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Priority Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Global Priority Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 802.1p PFC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 DCBX Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Fibre Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 FC Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 FC VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 FC Zone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 FC Zoneset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 585 FIPS Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Remote Monitoring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 RMON History Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 RMON Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 RMON Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 VMReady Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Contents...
Page 12 VM Policy Bandwidth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 VM Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 VM Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 VM Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 VMWare Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Miscellaneous VMReady Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Virtual NIC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 vNIC Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Virtual NIC Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Edge Virtual Bridge Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Edge Virtual Bridge VSI Type Database Configuration . . . . . . . . . 605 Edge Virtual Bridge VSI Type Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 607 Service Location Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Configuration Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Saving the Active Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 USB Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 13 IGMP Snooping Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 IPv6 Route Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 TFTP, SFTP, or FTP System Dump Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Clearing Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Unscheduled System Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Appendix A. Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages ..667 LOG_ALERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 LOG_CRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 LOG_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 LOG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 LOG_NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 LOG_WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Appendix B. Getting help and technical assistance ..681 Appendix C.
Page 14 Index ......695 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 15: Preface
Preface The Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI Command Reference for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4 describes how to configure and use the Lenovo N/OS 8.4 software with your RackSwitch G8264CS (referred to as G8264CS throughout this document). This guide lists each command, together with the complete syntax and a functional description, from the IS Command Line Interface (ISCLI). For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Lenovo Installation Guide for your RackSwitch G8264CS. For details about configuration and operation of your G8264CS, see the Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Application Guide for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4. © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 16: Who Should Use This Book
Who Should Use This Book This book is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts, IP addressing, Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration parameters. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 17: How This Book Is Organized
, shows how to configure switch system parameters, ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP Routing, Link Aggregation and more. Chapter 5, “Operations Commands“, shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). The commands describe how to activate or deactivate optional software features. Chapter 6, “Boot Options“ , describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images, how to load a new software image and how to reset the software to factory defaults. , shows how to generate and access a dump of Chapter 7, “Maintenance Commands“ critical switch state information, how to clear it and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. , shows a listing of syslog Appendix A, “Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages“ messages. , lists the resources available Appendix B, “Getting help and technical assistance“ from Lenovo to assist you. , displays Lenovo legal information. Appendix C, “Notices“ Index ” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the “ book. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Preface...
Page 18: Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. Table 1. Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol Meaning plain fixedwidth This type is used for names of commands, files, and text directories used within the text. For example: View the readme.txt file. It also depicts on‐screen computer output and prompts. bold fixedwidth This bold type appears in command examples. It shows text text that must be typed in exactly as shown. For example: show sysinfo bold body text This bold type indicates objects such as window names, dialog box names, and icons, as well as user interface objects such as buttons, and tabs. italicized body text This italicized type indicates book titles, special terms, or words to be emphasized. angle brackets < > Indicate a variable to enter based on the description inside the brackets. Do not type the brackets when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is ping <IP address> you enter ping 192.32.10.12 braces {} Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option. You must choose only one of the options. Do not type the braces when entering the ...
Page 19 Table 1. Typographic Conventions (continued) Typeface or Symbol Meaning brackets [] Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do not type the brackets when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is show interface ip [<1‐128>] you enter show interface ip show interface ip <1‐128> vertical line | Separates choices for command keywords and arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type the vertical line when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is show portchannel {<1‐128>|hash|information} you must enter: show portchannel <1‐128> or show portchannel hash or show portchannel information © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Preface...
Page 20 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 21: Chapter 1. Iscli Basics
Chapter 1. ISCLI Basics Your RackSwitch G8264CS is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. This guide describes the individual ISCLI commands available for the G8264CS. The ISCLI provides a direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, the ISCLI allows you to view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any necessary configuration. This chapter explains how to access the Industry Standard Command Line Interface (ISCLI) for the switch. © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 22: Iscli Command Modes
ISCLI Command Modes The ISCLI has three major command modes listed in order of increasing privileges, as follows:  User EXEC mode This is the initial mode of access. By default, password checking is disabled for this mode, on console.  Privileged EXEC mode This mode is accessed from User EXEC mode. This mode can be accessed using the following command: enable Global Configuration mode  This mode allows you to make changes to the running configuration. If you save the configuration, the settings survive a reload of the G8264CS. Several sub‐modes can be accessed from the Global Configuration mode. For more details, see Table 2. This mode can be accessed using the following command: configure terminal Each mode provides a specific set of commands. The command set of a higher‐privilege mode is a superset of a lower‐privilege mode—all lower‐privilege mode commands are accessible when using a higher‐privilege mode. The following table lists the ISCLI command modes. Table 2. ISCLI Command Modes Command Mode/Prompt Command used to enter or exit User EXEC Default mode, entered automatically on console RS G8264CS> Exit: exit or logout Privileged EXEC Enter Privileged EXEC mode, from User EXEC mode:...
Page 23 VLAN Enter VLAN Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configvlan)# vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end Router OSPF Enter OSPF Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configrouterospf)# router ospf Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end Router OSPFv3 Enter OSPFv3 Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configrouterospf3)# ipv6 router ospf Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end Router BGP Enter BGP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configrouterbgp)# router bgp Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics...
Page 24 Table 2. ISCLI Command Modes (continued) Command Mode/Prompt Command used to enter or exit Router RIP Enter RIP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configrouterrip)# router rip Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end Route Map Enter Route Map Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configroutemap)# routemap <1‐64> Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end Router VRRP Enter VRRP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configvrrp)# router vrrp Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end PIM Component Enter Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Component Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configippimcomp)# ip pim component <1‐2>...
Page 25 Command Mode/Prompt Command used to enter or exit FC Port Configuration Enter Fibre Channel Port Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configfc)# interface fc <port alias or number> Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end FC Zone Configuration Enter Fibre Channel Zone Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configzone)# zone name <1‐64 characters> Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end FC Zoneset Configuration Enter Fibre Channel Zoneset Configuration mode, from Global Configuration mode: RS G8264CS(configzoneset)# zoneset name <1‐64 characters> Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics...
Page 26: Global Commands
Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the ISCLI command modes. These commands are useful for obtaining online help, navigating through the interface, and for saving configuration changes. For help on a specific command, type the command, followed by help. Table 3. Description of Global Commands Command Action Provides more information about a specific command or lists commands available at the current level. list Lists the commands available at the current level. exit Go up one level in the command mode structure. If already at the top level, exit from the command line interface and log out. copy runningconfig Write configuration changes to non‐volatile flash startupconfig memory. logout Exit from the command line interface and log out. traceroute Use this command to identify the route used for station‐to‐station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: traceroute [{<hostname>|<IP address>} [<max‐hops (1‐32)> [<msec‐delay (1‐4294967295)>]][dataport|mgtport]] Where: hostname/IP address: Sets the hostname or  IP address of the target station. maxhops: Sets the maximum distance to trace.  msecdelay: Sets the number of milliseconds ...
Page 27 Where: hostname/IP address: Sets the hostname or  IP address of the target station. tries: Sets the number of attempts (optional).  msecdelay: Sets the number of milliseconds  between attempts (optional). length: Sets the ping request payload size  (optional). source IP address: Sets the IP source  address for the IP packet (optional). ttl: Sets the Time to live in the IP header.  tos: Sets the Type of Service bits in the IP  header. dontfragment: Sets the don’t fragment bit in  the IP header (only for IPv4 addresses). By default, the management port is used. To use a specific port, use the following options: data port: dataport  management port: mgtport  Note: The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics...
Page 28 Table 3. Description of Global Commands Command Action telnet This command is used to form a Telnet session between the switch and another network device. The format is as follows: telnet [{<hostname>|<IP address>} [<service port (1‐65535)>][dataport|mgtport]] Where: hostname/IP address: Sets the target  station. port: Sets the logical Telnet port or service  number. By default, the management port is used. To use a specific port, use the following options: data port: dataport  management port: mgtport  Note: The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. show history This command displays the last ten issued commands. show who Displays a list of users who are currently logged in. show line Displays a list of users who are currently logged in, in table format. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 29: Command Line Interface Shortcuts
RS G8264CS(config)# vlan 15,9099,40904094 (access multiple ranges) RS G8264CS(config)# vlan 15,19,20,40904094 (access a mix of lists and ranges) The numbers in a range must be separated by a dash: <start of range><end of range> Multiple ranges or list items are permitted using a comma: <range or item 1>, <range or item 2> Do not use spaces within list and range specifications. Ranges can also be used to apply the same command option to multiple items. For example, to access multiple ports with one command: RS G8264CS(config)# interface port 14 (access ports 1 though 4) Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same mode. For example, consider the following full command and a valid abbreviation: RS G8264CS(config)# show macaddresstable interface port 12 or: RS G8264CS(config)# sh ma i p 12 Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any prompt and pressing <Tab>, the ISCLI displays all available commands or options that begin with that letter. Entering additional letters further refines the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed, that command is supplied on the command line, waiting to be entered. If multiple commands share the typed characters, when you press <Tab>, the ISCLI completes the common part of the shared syntax. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics...
Page 30: User Access Levels
User Access Levels To enable better switch management and user accountability, three levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the G8264CS. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:  user Interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the G8264CS. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. oper  Operators can make temporary changes on the G8264CS. These changes are lost when the switch is rebooted. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reboot of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation.  admin Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the G8264CS. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator‐level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet, remote Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. Note: It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. Table 4. User Access Levels User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password User The User has no direct responsibility for switch ...
Page 31: Idle Timeout
Idle Timeout By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after ten minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the following command, which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes, or disabled when set to 0: system idle <0‐60> Command mode: Global Configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics...
Page 32 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 33: Chapter 2. Information Commands
Port description  For details, see page 151. Command mode: All show interface trunk <port alias or number> Displays port status information, including: Port alias and number  Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not  Port VLAN ID (PVID)  Port description  VLAN membership  FDB Learning status  Flooding status  For details, see page 152. Command mode: All show interface transceiver Displays the status of the port transceiver module on each port. For details, see page 153. Command mode: All show informationdump Dumps all switch information available (10K or more, depending on your configuration). If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 34: System Information
System Information The information provided by each command option is briefly described in the following table, with pointers to where detailed information can be found. Table 6. System Information Options Command Syntax and Usage dir [configs|images] Displays the configuration files and NOS images currently on the switch. configs ‐ displays only the configuration files currently on the switch  images ‐ displays only the system images currently on the switch  For more details, see page Command mode: Privileged EXEC show access user Displays configured user names and their status. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show logging [messages] [severity <0‐7>] [reverse] [|{include|exclude|section|begin|head <1‐2000>| |last <1‐2000>}] Displays the current syslog configuration, followed by the most recent 2000 syslog messages. messages displays the most recent 2000 syslog messages only  severity displays syslog messages of the specified severity level  reverse displays syslog messages starting with the most recent message  | displays syslog messages that match one of the following filters:  • include displays syslog messages that match the specified expression • exclude displays syslog messages that don’t match the specified expression •...
Page 35 MAC address of the switch management processor  IP address of management interface  Hardware version and part number  Software image file and version number  Configuration name  Log‐in banner, if one is configured  Internal temperatures  Fan status  Power supply status  For details, see page Command mode: All The following command displays the configuration files and NOS images currently on the switch: Command mode: Privileged EXEC images: total 18528 rwrr 1 root root 10038789 Jan 8 14:16 image1 rwrr 1 root root 8932087 Jan 7 20:16 image2 rwrr 1 root root 16 Jan 8 14:18 uboothdr configs: total 8 rwrr 1 root root 342 Jan 11 14:43 conf1 rwrr 1 root root 7637 Jan 11 14:43 conf2 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 36: Cli Display Information
CLI Display Information These commands allow you to display information about the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI. Table 7. CLI Display Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show terminallength Displays the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI for the current session. A value of 0 means paging is disabled. Command mode: All show line console length Displays the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI by default for console sessions. A value of 0 means paging is disabled. Command mode: All show line vty length Displays the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI by default for Telnet and SSH sessions. A value of 0 means paging is disabled. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 37: Error Disable And Recovery Information
Error Disable and Recovery Information These commands allow you to display information about the Error Disable and Recovery feature for interface ports. Table 8. Error Disable Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show errdisable information Displays all Error Disable and Recovery information. Command mode: All show errdisable linkflap [information] Displays ports that have been disabled due to excessive link flaps. Command mode: All show errdisable recovery Displays a list ports with their Error Recovery status. Command mode: All show errdisable timers Displays a list of active recovery timers, if applicable. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 38: Snmpv3 System Information
SNMPv3 System Information SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format   security for messages access control   remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. Table 9. SNMPv3 Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show snmpserver v3 Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 access Displays View‐based Access Control information. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 community Displays information about the community table information. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 group Displays information about the group, including the security model, user name and group name. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 notify Displays the Notify table information. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 targetaddress Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample, see page Command mode: All show snmpserver v3 targetparameters...
Page 39: Snmpv3 Usm User Table Information
Command mode: All The USM user table contains the following information:  the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the  Secuity Model  an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated  the privacy protocol Engine ID = 80:00:4F:4D:03:08:17:F4:8C:E8:00 usmUser Table: User Name Protocol adminmd5 HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY adminsha HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY v1v2only NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY adminshaaes HMAC_SHA, AES PRIVACY Table 10. USM User Table Information Parameters Field Description User Name A string representing the user name you can use to access the switch. Protocol Whether messages sent from this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. Lenovo N/OS supports DES algorithm for privacy and two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC‐SHA. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 40: Snmpv3 View Table Information
SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons. The following command displays the SNMPv3 View Table: show snmpserver v3 view Command mode: All View Name Subtree Mask Type iso 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 excluded Table 11. SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters Field Description View Name Displays the name of the view. Subtree Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names. Mask Displays the bit mask. Type Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 41: Snmpv3 Access Table Information
The following command displays SNMPv3 access information: show snmpserver v3 access Command mode: All Group Name Model Level ReadV WriteV NotifyV v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv iso iso v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv iso iso iso Table 12. SNMPv3 Access Table Information Field Description Group Name Displays the name of group. Model Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or SNMPv2 or USM. Level Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. For example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv. ReadV Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. WriteV Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. NotifyV Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 42: Snmpv3 Group Table Information
SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. The group is identified by a group name. The following command displays SNMPv3 group information: show snmpserver v3 group Command mode: All All active SNMPv3 groups are listed below: Sec Model User Name Group Name snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp usm adminshaaes admingrp Table 13. SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters Field Description Sec Model Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM, SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3. User Name Displays the name for the group. Group Name Displays the access name of the group. SNMPv3 Community Table Information The following command displays the SNMPv3 community table information stored in the SNMP engine: show snmpserver v3 community Command mode: All ...
Page 43: Snmpv3 Target Address Table Information
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information The following command displays SNMPv3 target address information stored in the SNMP engine: show snmpserver v3 targetaddress Command mode: All Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param Table 15. SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters Field Description Name Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Transport Displays the transport addresses. Addr Port Displays the SNMP UDP port number. Taglist This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. Params The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 44: Snmpv3 Target Parameters Table Information
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information The following command displays SNMPv3 target parameters information: show snmpserver v3 targetparameters Command mode: All Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level v1v2param snmpv2c v1v2only snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv Table 16. SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information Field Description Name Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. MP Model Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. User Name Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Sec Model Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model the system does not support. Sec Level Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. SNMPv3 Notify Table Information The following command displays the SNMPv3 Notify Table: show snmpserver v3 notify Command mode: All ...
Page 45: Snmpv3 Dump Information
View Name Subtree Mask Type iso 1 included v1v2only 1 included v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table: All active SNMPv3 groups are listed below: Sec Model User Name Group Name snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp usm adminshaaes admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap snmpNotify Table: Name Tag v1v2trap v1v2trap snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level v1v2param snmpv2c v1v2only snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 46: General System Information
General System Information The following command displays system information: show sysinfo Command mode: All System Information at 12:27:46 Wed May 27, 2015 Time zone: No timezone configured Daylight Savings Time Status: Disabled Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Switch has been up for 0 days, 21 hours, 21 minutes and 44 seconds. Last boot: 15:07:19 Tue May 26, 2015 (reset from console) MAC address: 74:99:75:75:63:00 IP (If 1) address: 0.0.0.0 Management Port MAC Address: 74:99:75:75:63:fe Management Port IP Address (if 128): 10.241.37.200 Hardware Revision: 0 Hardware Part No: BAC0011000 Switch Serial No: Y250CM2C9009 Manufacturing date: 12/50 MTM Value: 7159HCM ESN: MM05941 Software Version 8.4.1.0 (FLASH image1), factory default configuration. Boot kernel version 8.4.1.0 USB Boot: disabled Temperature Mezzanine : 32 C Temperature CPU Local : 38 C Temperature Mother Top : 31 C Temperature Mother Bottom : 33 C Temperature Switch Asic Max : 43 C Temperature FC Module Max : 59 C System Warning at 86 C / Shutdown at 95 C / Set Point is 76 C Fan 1 Module 1: 7468rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 2 Module 1: 3163rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 3 Module 2: 7346rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 4 Module 2: 3362rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 5 Module 3: 7479rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 6 Module 3: 3126rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 7 Module 4: 7336rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack Fan 8 Module 4: 3174rpm 25pwm( 9%) FrontToBack System Fan Airflow: FrontToBack Power Supply 1: FrontToBack [43X3311]...
Page 47: Show Specific System Information
 Internal temperatures Fan status   Power supply status Show Specific System Information The following table lists commands used for displaying specific entries from the general system information screen. Table 18. Specific System Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show environment fan Displays information about internal temperatures and fan status. Command mode: All show environment power Displays information about power supply status. Command mode: All show version brief Displays the software version number, image file and configuration name. For a sample output, see below. Command mode: All Sample output for command show version brief: Software Version 8.4.1.0 (FLASH image1), active configuration. Displays the software version number, image file and configuration name. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 48: Show Recent Syslog Messages
Show Recent Syslog Messages The following command displays system log messages: show logging [messages] [severity <0‐7>] [reverse] Command mode: All Current syslog configuration: host 0.0.0.0 via MGT port, severity 7, facility 0 host2 0.0.0.0 via MGT port, severity2 7, facility2 0 console enabled severity level of console output 6 severity level of write to flash 7 syslogging all features Syslog source loopback interface not set Nov 2 5:49:53 172.25.254.19 INFO console: System log cleared by user admin. Nov 2 5:51:23 172.25.254.19 CRIT system: Fan Mod 4 Removed Nov 2 5:54:27 172.25.254.19 CRIT system: **** MAX TEMPERATURE (61) ABOVE FAIL THRESH **** Nov 2 5:54:27 172.25.254.19 CRIT system: **** PLATFORM THERMAL SHUTDOWN **** Nov 2 6:02:06 0.0.0.0 NOTICE system: link up on management port MGT Nov 2 6:02:06 0.0.0.0 INFO system: booted version 0.0.0 from FLASH image2, active configuration Nov 2 6:02:09 0.0.0.0 NOTICE system: SR SFP+ inserted at port 63 is Approved Nov 2 6:02:12 0.0.0.0 NOTICE system: 1m DAC inserted at port 64 is Accepted Nov 2 6:02:12 0.0.0.0 NOTICE system: link up on management port MGT Nov 2 6:03:11 172.25.254.19 NOTICE system: Received DHCP Offer IP: 172.25.254.19 Mask: 255.255.0. Broadcast 172.25.255.255 GW: 172.25.1.1 Nov 2 6:03:11 0.0.0.0 NOTICE ip: MGT port default gateway 172.25.1.1 operational Nov 2 6:22:54 172.25.254.19 NOTICE mgmt: admin(admin) login on Console Nov 2 6:33:00 172.25.254.19 NOTICE mgmt: admin(admin) idle timeout from Console Each syslog message has a severity level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown here.
Page 49: User Status
User Status The following command displays user status information: show access user Command mode: All except User EXEC Usernames: user enabled offline oper disabled offline admin Always Enabled online 1 session Current User ID table: 1: name paul , dis, cos user , password valid, offline Current strong password settings: strong password status: disabled This command displays the status of the configured usernames. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 50: Ldap Information
LDAP Information The following command displays LDAP server configuration information: show ldapserver Command mode: All except User EXEC  for LDAP configured in legacy mode: Current LDAP settings: Primary LDAP Server (null) via MGT port Secondary LDAP Server (null) via MGT port Current LDAP server (null) LDAP port 389, Retries 3, Timeout 5, LDAP server OFF, Backdoor access disabled LDAP domain name LDAP user attribute uid  for LDAP configured in enhanced mode: Current LDAP settings: LDAP server 1 10.10.43.55:389 via MGT port LDAP server 2 LDAPserver109:389 via DATA port LDAP server 3 (null) LDAP server 4 (null) LDAP Bind Mode Login Credentials LDAP Bind DN (null) Retries 3, Timeout 5, LDAP server OFF, Backdoor access disabled LDAP domain name LDAP attributes user attribute uid group attribute memberOf login attribute ibmchassisRole LDAP group filter (null) G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 51: Layer 2 Information
Table 19. Layer 2 Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show dot1x information Displays 802.1X Information. For details, see page Command mode: All show failover trigger <1‐8> information Displays Layer 2 Failover information. For details, see page Command mode: All show hotlinks information Displays Hot Links information. For details, see page 63. Command mode: All show layer2 information Dumps all Layer 2 switch information available (10K lines or more, depending on your configuration). If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. Command mode: All show lldp information Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) information. For details, see page Command mode: All show portchannel information Displays the state of each port in the various Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs). For details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 52 Table 19. Layer 2 Information Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show spanningtree Displays Spanning Tree information, including the status (on or off), Spanning Tree mode (RSTP, PVRST, or MSTP) and VLAN membership. In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information: Priority  Hello interval  Maximum age value  Forwarding delay  Aging time  You can also see the following port‐specific STG information: Port alias and priority  Cost  State  For details, see page Command mode: All show spanningtree blockedports Lists the ports blocked by each STP instance. Command mode: All show spanningtree mst configuration Displays the current MSTP settings. Command mode: All show spanningtree mst <0‐32> [information] Displays Spanning Tree information for the specified instance. 0 is used for CIST. CIST bridge information includes: Priority ...
Page 53 Table 19. Layer 2 Information Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show spanningtree root Displays root bridge ID for every spanning‐tree instance and the path cost associated to it. For details, see page Command mode: All show spanningtree stp <1‐128> [information] Displays information about a specific Spanning Tree Group. For details, see page Command mode: All show vlag Displays vLAG Information. For details, see page Command mode: All show vlan Displays VLAN configuration information for all configured VLANs, including: VLAN Number  VLAN Name  Status  Port membership of the VLAN  For details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 54: X Information
802.1X Information The following command displays 802.1X information: show dot1x information Command mode: All System capability : Authenticator System status : disabled Protocol version : 1 Guest VLAN status : disabled Guest VLAN : none Authenticator Backend Assigned Port Auth Mode Auth Status PAE State Auth State VLAN *1 forceauth unauthorized initialize initialize none *2 forceauth unauthorized initialize initialize none *3 forceauth unauthorized initialize initialize none The following table describes the IEEE 802.1X parameters. Table 20. 802.1X Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Port Displays each port’s alias. Auth Mode Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port. The Authorization mode can be one of the following: forceunauth  auto  forceauth  Auth Status Displays the current authorization status of the port, either authorized or unauthorized. Authenticator Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. The PAE State PAE state can be one of the following: initialize ...
Page 55 Table 20. 802.1X Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description Backend Auth Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend State Authorization state can be one of the following: initialize  request  response  success  fail  timeout  idle  Assigned VLAN Displays corresponding VLAN associated with the port. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 56: Fdb Information
FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. Note: The master forwarding database supports up to 128K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. Table 21. FDB Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show macaddresstable Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. Command mode: All show macaddresstable all Displays all unicast and multicast entries in the Forwarding Database. Command mode: All show macaddresstable address <MAC address> Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx. For example, 080020123456. Command mode: All show macaddresstable configuredstatic Displays all configured static MAC entries in the FDB. Command mode: All show macaddresstable interface port <port alias or number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. Command mode: All show macaddresstable multicast Displays all static multicast MAC entries in the FDB. For details, see page Command mode: All show macaddresstable portchannel <1‐128> Displays all FDB entries for a particular Link Aggregation Group (LAG).
Page 57: Fdb Multicast Information
Command mode: All show macaddresstable vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All FDB Multicast Information The following commands display FDB multicast information. Table 22. Multicast FDB Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show macaddresstable multicast Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB. Command mode: All show macaddresstable multicast address <MAC address> Displays a single multicast entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx. For example, 080020123456. Command mode: All show macaddresstable multicast interface port <port alias or number> Displays all multicast entries for a particular port. Command mode: All show macaddresstable multicast vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all multicast entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 58: Show All Fdb Information
Show All FDB Information The following command displays Forwarding Database information: show macaddresstable Command mode: All Mac address Aging Time: 300 MAC address VLAN Port Trnk State Permanent 00:04:38:90:54:18 1 4 FWD 00:09:6b:9b:01:5f 1 13 FWD 00:09:6b:ca:26:ef 4095 1 FWD 00:0f:06:ec:3b:00 4095 1 FWD 00:11:43:c4:79:83 1 4 FWD P An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by the switch. When in the aggregation (TRK) state, the port field represents the Link Aggregation Group (LAG) number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch, but has only been seen as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown state, no outbound port is indicated, although ports which reference the address as a destination are listed under “Reference ports.” Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To clear the entire FDB, refer to “Forwarding Database Maintenance” on page 647. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 59: Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Use these commands to display LACP status information about each port on the G8264CS Table 23. LACP Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show lacp Displays the current LCAP configuration. Command mode: All show lacp aggregator <aggregator ID> Displays detailed information about the LACP aggregator. Command mode: All show lacp information Displays a summary of LACP information. For details, see page Command mode: All show lacp information state {down|off|up} Displays a summary of LACP information for the interfaces that are down, off or up. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> lacp [information] Displays LACP information about the selected port. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 60: Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol The following command displays LACP information: show lacp information Command mode: All port mode adminkey operkey selected prio aggr trunk status minlinks 1 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 2 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 3 active 65535 65535 individual 32768 down 1 4 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 5 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 6 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 7 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 8 active 65535 65535 yes 32768 1 65 up 1 9 active 1000 1000 suspended 32768 down 1 10 active 1000 1000 suspended 32768 down 1 (*) LACP PortChannel is statically bound to the admin key LACP dump includes the following information for each port in the G8264CS: mode  Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive or off). adminkey Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.  operkey  Shows the value of the port’s operational key. selected  Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group. prio  Shows the value of the port priority. aggr  Displays the aggregator associated with each port. trunk ...
Page 61: Layer 2 Failover Information
Displays a summary of Layer 2 Failover information. For details, see page Command mode: All show failover trigger <trigger number> [information] Displays detailed information about the selected Layer 2 Failover trigger. Command mode: All Layer 2 Failover Information The following command displays Layer 2 Failover information: show failover trigger information Command mode: All Failover: On Trigger 1 Manual Monitor: Enabled Trigger 1 limit: 0 Monitor State: Up Member Status 17 Operational Control State: Auto Controlled Member Status Physical ports 1 Operational Trigger 2: Disabled Trigger 3: Disabled Trigger 4: Disabled Trigger 5: Disabled Trigger 6: Disabled Trigger 7: Disabled Trigger 8: Disabled © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 62 A monitor port’s Failover status is Operational only if all the following conditions hold true:  Port link is up.  If Spanning‐Tree is enabled, the port is in the Forwarding state.  If the port is a member of an LACP Link Aggregation Group (LAG), the port is aggregated. If any of these conditions are not true, the monitor port is considered to be failed. A control port is considered to be operational if the monitor trigger state is Up. Even if a port’s link status is Down, Spanning‐Tree status is Blocking, and the LACP status is Not Aggregated, from a teaming perspective the port status is Operational, since the trigger is Up. A control port’s status is displayed as Failed only if the monitor trigger state is Down. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 63: Hot Links Information
Hot Links Information The following command displays Hot Links information: show hotlinks information Command mode: All Hot Links Info: Trigger Current global Hot Links setting: ON Hot Links BPDU flood: disabled Hot Links FDB update: disabled FDB update rate (pps): 200 Current Trigger 1 setting: enabled name "Trigger 1", preempt enabled, fdelay 1 sec Active state: None Master settings: port 1 Backup settings: port 2 Hot Links information includes the following:  Hot Links status (on or off) Status of BPDU flood option   Status of FDB send option Status and configuration of each Hot Links trigger  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 64: Lldp Information
LLDP Information The following commands display LLDP information. Table 25. LLDP Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show lldp Displays the current Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration. Command mode: All show lldp information Displays all LLDP information. Command mode: All show lldp port [<port alias or number>] Displays LLDP information for all ports or a specific port. Command mode: All show lldp port <port alias or number> tlv evb Displays Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) type‐length‐value (TLV) information for the specified port. Command mode: All show lldp receive Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine. Command mode: All show lldp remotedevice [<1‐256>|detail] Displays information received from LLDP‐capable devices. For more information, see page Command mode: All show lldp remotedevice port <port alias or number> Displays information received from LLDP‐capable devices for a specific port. A list of ports needs to be delimited by ʹ,ʹ and a range of ports delimited by ʹ‐ʹ. Command mode: All show lldp transmit Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 65: Lldp Remote Device Information
1 | 2 | 00 00 c9 e5 47 e3 | 0000c9e547e3 | | NnTB 2 | 3 | 00 90 fa 75 0e c5 | 0090fa750ec5 | | NB 14 | 4 | a8 97 dc d1 f8 00 | 60 | | NB 14 | 5 | a8 97 dc d1 f8 00 | 60 | | NnTB 15 | 6 | a8 97 dc d1 f8 00 | 80 | | NB 15 | 7 | a8 97 dc d1 f8 00 | 80 | | NnTB 18 | 8 | 00 90 fa 3d 48 49 | 0090fa3d4849 | | NB MGT | 9 | 74 99 75 c5 08 00 | 6 | G805254 | NB LLDP remote device information provides a summary of information about remote devices connected to the switch. To view detailed information about a device, as shown below, follow the command with the index number of the remote device. To view detailed information about all devices, use the detail option. Local Port Alias: 1 Remote Device Index : 15 Remote Device TTL : 99 Remote Device RxChanges : false Chassis Type : Mac Address Chassis Id : 0018b1331d00 Port Type : Locally Assigned Port Id : 23 Port Description : 23 System Name : System Description : Lenovo RackSwitch G8296, Lenovo Networking OS: version 8.2.0.3, Boot image: version 8.2.0.3 System Capabilities Supported : bridge, router System Capabilities Enabled : bridge, router Remote Management Address: Subtype : IPv4 Address : 10.100.120.181 Interface Subtype : ifIndex Interface Number : 128 Object Identifier : © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 66: Unidirectional Link Detection Information
Unidirectional Link Detection Information The following commands display UDLD information: Table 26. UDLD Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show udld Displays all UDLD information. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> udld Displays UDLD information about the selected port. Command mode: All UDLD Port Information The following command displays UDLD information for the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> udld Command mode: All UDLD information on port 1 Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled Port administrative mode: normal Port enable operational state: link up Port operational state: advertisement Port bidirectional status: bidirectional Message interval: 15 Time out interval: 5 Neighbor cache: 1 neighbor detected Entry #1 Expiration time: 31 seconds Device Name: Device ID: 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Port ID: 1 UDLD information includes the following:  Status (enabled or disabled) ...
Page 67: X Discovery Information
The following commands display 802.1x information: Table 27. 802.1x Discovery Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show interface port <port alias or number> dot1x Displays 802.1x information about the selected port. Command mode: All show dot1x Displays all 802.1x information. Command mode: All show dot1x <port alias or number> Displays 802.1x information for specified port. Command mode: All 802.1x Port Information The following command displays 802.1x information for the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> dot1x Command mode: All Quiet Tx Max Supp Server ReAuth ReAuth VLAN Port Auth Mode Period Period Req Timeout Timeout Status Period Assign G forceauth 60 30 2 30 30 off 3600 off 1 forceauth 60 30 2 30 30 off 3600 off G Global port configuration 802.1x port display shows information about the selected port and the peer to which the link is connected. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 68: Oam Discovery Information
OAM Discovery Information The following commands display OAM information: Table 28. OAM Discovery Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show interface port <port alias or number> oam Displays OAM information about the selected port. Command mode: All show oam Displays all OAM information. Command mode: All OAM Port Information The following command displays OAM information for the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> oam Command mode: All OAM information on port 1 State enabled Mode active Link up Satisfied Yes Evaluating No Remote port information: Mode active MAC address 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Stable Yes State valid Yes Evaluating No OAM port display shows information about the selected port and the peer to which the link is connected. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 69: Vlag Information
Command Syntax and Usage show vlag Displays the current vLAG configuration. Command mode: All show vlag adminkey <1‐65535> Displays vLAG LACP information. Command mode: All show vlag adminkey <1‐65535> information Displays all vLAG LACP information. Command mode: All show vlag information Displays all vLAG information. Command mode: show vlag isl Displays vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) information. Command mode: All show vlag peergateway Displays the current state of the vLAG peer gateway. For details, see page Command mode: All show vlag portchannel <1‐64> Displays vLAG static Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information. Command mode: All show vlag portchannel <1‐64> information Displays all vLAG static Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information. Command mode: All show vlag vrrp Displays current vLAG related VRRP information. For details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 70: Vlag Aggregation Information
vLAG Aggregation Information The following command displays vLAG information for the Link Aggregation Group (LAG): show vlag portchannel <1‐64> Command mode: All vLAG is enabled on trunk 13 Protocol Static Current settings: enabled ports: 13 Current L2 trunk hash settings: smac dmac Current L3 trunk hash settings: sip dip Current ingress port hash: disabled Current L4 port hash: disabled Current FCoE trunk hash settings: sid did vLAG Peer Gateway Information The following command displays the current state of the vLAG peer gateway. show vlag peergateway Command mode: All Current peer gateway state: disabled vLAG VRRP Information The following command displays vLAG related VRRP information: show vlag vrrp Command mode: All vLAG VRRP mode: Active vLAG related VRRP information: 1: vrid 1, local role master, peer role backup 10: vrid 1, local role backup, peer role backup 100: vrid 1, local role backup, peer role master vLAG VRRP mode: Passive vLAG related VRRP information: 1: vrid 1, local role master, peer role init 10: vrid 1, local role backup, peer role init 100: vrid 1, local role backup, peer role init...
Page 71: Spanning Tree Information
Spanning Tree Information The following command displays Spanning Tree information: show spanningtree Command mode: All Max PVRST Instances: 256 Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled Spanning Tree Group 1: On (PVRST) VLANs: 1 Current Root: PathCost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 8001 08:17:f4:a2:c6:1f 20000 40 2 20 15 Prev Root: Port Replaced at 8001 34:40:b5:40:55:00 0 14:45:02 7262016 Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging Topology Change Counts 32769 2 20 15 300 8 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type 17 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8011 P2P 18 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8012 P2P 40 128 20000! FWD ROOT 800108:17:f4:a2:c6:1f 8028 P2P 41 128 20000! DISC ALTN 800108:17:f4:a2:c6:1f 80e9 P2P 51 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8033 P2P 52 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8034 P2P 53 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8035 P2P 54 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8036 P2P 55 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8037 P2P 56 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8038 P2P 57 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 8039 P2P 58 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 803a P2P 59 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 803b P2P 60 128 2000! FWD DESG 800134:40:b5:40:55:00 803c P2P ! = Automatic path cost. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 72: Rstp Information
RSTP Information The following command displays RSTP information: show spanningtree stp <1> information Command mode: All Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP) VLANs: 1 10 4095 Current Root: PathCost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 8000 00:25:03:49:29:00 0 0 2 20 15 Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging Topology Change Counts 32768 2 20 15 300 1 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type 1 (pc12) 128 490!+ FWD DESG 800000:25:03:49:29:00 8026 P2P 2 (pc12) 128 490!+ FWD DESG 800000:25:03:49:29:00 8026 P2P 3 (pc12) 128 490!+ FWD DESG 800000:25:03:49:29:00 8026 P2P 4 (pc12) 128 490!+ FWD DESG 800000:25:03:49:29:00 8026 P2P MGT 0 0 FWD * * = STP turned off for this port. ! = Automatic path cost. + = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost. The switch software uses the Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST) spanning tree mode, with IEEE 802.1D (2004) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) or IEEE 802.1Q (2003) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), as alternatives. The following port‐specific information is also displayed: Table 30. PVRST/RSTP/MSTP Port Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority The Port Priority parameter helps determine which bridge port (port) becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Cost The Port Path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the ...
Page 73 Table 30. PVRST/RSTP/MSTP Port Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description Designated The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge Bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. Designated The Designated Port field shows the port on the Designated Bridge Port to which this port is connected. Type Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P or SHARED. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 74: Pvrst Information
PVRST Information The following command displays PVRST information: show spanningtree stp <1‐128> information Command mode: All Spanning Tree Group 1: On (PVRST) VLANs: 1 Current Root: PathCost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 8001 a8:97:dc:03:d5:00 490 1 2 20 15 Prev Root: Port Replaced at 8001 a8:97:dc:d2:12:00 0 16:33:08 3 32016 Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging Topology Change Counts 32769 2 20 15 300 8 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type 1 (pc1) 128 490!+ FWD ROOT 8001a8:97:dc:03:d5:00 8042 P2P 2 (pc1) 128 490!+ FWD ROOT 8001a8:97:dc:03:d5:00 8042 P2P 3 (pc1) 128 490!+ FWD ROOT 8001a8:97:dc:03:d5:00 8042 P2P 4 (pc1) 128 490!+ FWD ROOT 8001a8:97:dc:03:d5:00 8042 P2P 11 128 2000! FWD DESG 8001a8:97:dc:d2:12:00 800b P2P 13 128 2000! FWD DESG 8001a8:97:dc:d2:12:00 800d P2P 14 128 2000! FWD DESG 8001a8:97:dc:d2:12:00 800e P2P 16 128 2000! FWD DESG 8001a8:97:dc:d2:12:00 8010 P2P ! = Automatic path cost. + = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost. You can configure the switch software to use the IEEE 802.1D (2004) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the IEEE 802.1Q (2003) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) or PerVLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST). The following port‐specific information is also displayed: Table 31. RSTP/MSTP/PVRST Port Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Prio (port) The Port Priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that ...
Page 75 Table 31. RSTP/MSTP/PVRST Port Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description Role The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP) or Disabled (DSB). Designated The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge Bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. Type Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P or SHARED. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 76: Spanning Tree Bridge Information
Spanning Tree Bridge Information The following command displays Spanning Tree bridge information: show spanningtree bridge Command mode: All STG Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Protocol VLANs 1 32768 2 20 15 PVRST 1 2 32768 2 20 15 PVRST 2 128 32768 2 20 15 PVRST 4095 show spanningtree vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> bridge Command mode: All Vlan Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Protocol 1 32768 2 20 15 MSTP Table 32. Bridge Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description VLAN VLANs that are part of the Spanning Tree Group Priority The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. The lower the value, the higher the priority. Hello The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP network. FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it ...
Page 77: Spanning Tree Root Information
6 8001 08:17:f4:fb:d8:00 20000 2 20 15 27 17 8011 08:17:f4:32:95:00 0 2 20 15 0 Table 33. Bridge Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Instance Spanning Tree instance Root ID Indicates the root switch bridge priority and MAC address. Path‐Cost The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Hello The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from discarding state to learning state and from learning state to forwarding state. Root Port The elected root port for the STP instance (port used to reach the root switch). © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 78: Multiple Spanning Tree Information
Multiple Spanning Tree Information The following command displays Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) information: show spanningtree mst <0‐32> information Command mode: All Mstp Digest: 0x9f71e12a07f4e3004fe0ce1f241a7b66 Spanning Tree Group 5: On (MSTP) VLANs MAPPED: 5 VLANs: 5 Current Root: PathCost Port 0000 a8:97:dc:88:c9:00 0 0 Parameters: Priority Aging Topology Change Counts 0 300 1 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type 1 (pc105) 128 156!+ FWD DESG 0000a8:97:dc:88:c9:00 80e8 P2P 2 (pc105) 128 156!+ FWD DESG 0000a8:97:dc:88:c9:00 80e8 P2P 4 128 500! FWD DESG 0000a8:97:dc:88:c9:00 800a P2P,edge 22 (pc105) 128 156!+ FWD DESG 0000a8:97:dc:88:c9:00 80e8 P2P ! = Automatic path cost. + = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost. In addition to seeing Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) status, you can view the following CIST bridge information: Table 34. CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description CIST Root The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root. CIST Regional The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root Root bridge for this MSTP region. Values on this row of information refer to the regional root. Priority (bridge) The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the ...
Page 79 port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Cost The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. State The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either Discarding (DISC), Learning (LRN) or Forwarding (FWD). Role The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP), Disabled (DSB) or Master (MAST). Designated The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge Bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. Type Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P or SHARED. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 80: Link Aggregation Group (Lag) Information
Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Information The following command displays Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information: show portchannel information Command mode: All Trunk group 1: Enabled Protocol Static Port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding When LAGs are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various LAGs. Note: If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the LAG is set to forwarding, the remaining ports in the LAG will also be set to forwarding. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 81: Vlan Information
Displays Private VLAN information. type lists only the VLAN type for each private VLAN: community, isolated  or primary Command mode: All show vlan information Displays information about all VLANs, including: VLAN number and name  VLAN statistics  Port membership  VLAN status (enabled or disabled)  Protocol VLAN status  Spanning Tree membership  Private VLAN information  Flooding settings  VMAP configuration  Command mode: All show vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> information Displays information only about the specified VLAN. Command mode: All show protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> Displays Protocol VLAN information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 82 The following command displays VLAN information: show vlan Command mode: All VLAN Name Status Ports 1 Default VLAN ena 120 2 VLAN 2 dis 2122 100 VLAN 100 ena empty 200 VLAN 200 ena empty 300 VLAN 300 ena empty 4095 Mgmt VLAN ena MGT Primary Secondary Type Ports 100 200 isolated 14 100 300 community 12 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. VLAN information includes:  VLAN Number VLAN Name   Status Port membership of the VLAN   Protocol VLAN information (if available) Private VLAN information (if available)  G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 83: Layer 3 Information
Command mode: All show interface ip Displays IP interface Information. For details, see page 125. Command mode: All show [ip] arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) information. For details, see page Command mode: All show ip bgp Displays Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) information. For details, see page Command mode: All show ip bootprelay Displays the current parameters for the BOOTP Relay broadcast domain. Command mode: All show ip dhcp snooping Displays DHCP Snooping information. For details, see page 134. Command mode: All show ip dns Displays the current Domain Name System settings. Command mode: All show ip ecmp Displays ECMP static route information. For details, see page 115. Command mode: All show ip gateway <1‐4> Displays the current gateway settings. Command mode: All show ipv6 gateway6 {<1>|<4>} Displays the current IPv6 default gateway configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 84 Table 37. Layer 3 Information Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show ip igmp Displays IGMP Information. For more IGMP information options, see page 116. Command mode: All show ip information Displays all IP information. Command mode: All show ip interface brief Displays IP Information. For details, see page 128. IP information, includes: IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN  number, and operational status. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured  gateway to use, gateway number, IP address, and health status IP forwarding settings, network filter settings, route map settings  Command mode: All show ipv6 interface <interface number> Displays IPv6 interface information. For details, see page 126. Command mode: All show ip matchaddress [<1‐256>] Displays the current the Network Filter configuration. Command mode: All show ip mroute Displays the current IP multicast routes. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld Displays Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) information. For more MLD information options, see page 121. ...
Page 85 Command mode: All show ipv6 pmtu [<destination IPv6 address>] Displays IPv6 Path MTU information. For details, see page 127. Command mode: All show ip prefixpolicy Displays the current Prefix Policy Table configuration. Command mode: All show ipv6 prefix Displays IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix information. For details, see page 114. Command mode: All show ip rip Displays the current Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration. For details, see page 109. Command mode: All show ip route Displays all routes configured on the switch. For details, see page Command mode: All show ipv6 route Displays IPv6 routing information. For more information options, see page 111. Command mode: All show ip routing Displays the current IP forwarding settings. Command mode: All show ip slp information Displays Service Location Protocol (SLP) information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 86 Table 37. Layer 3 Information Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show ip slp directoryagents Displays SLP Directory Agent (DA) information. Command mode: All show ip slp useragents Displays SLP User Agent (UA) information. Command mode: All show ip vrrp information Displays VRRP information. For details, see page 123. Command mode: All show ipsec manualpolicy Displays information about manual key management policy for IP security. For more information options, see page 132. Command mode: All show layer3 Dumps all Layer 3 switch information available (10K or more, depending on your configuration). If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data before issuing the dump commands. Command mode: All show layer3 igmpgroups Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch. Command mode: All show layer3 ipmcgroups Displays the total number of current IP multicast (IPMC) groups that are registered on the switch. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 87: Ip Routing Information
Command mode: All show ip route address <IP address> Displays a single route by destination IP address. Command mode: All show ip route ecmphash Displays the current ECMP hashing mechanism. Command mode: All show ip route gateway <IP address> Displays routes to a single gateway. Command mode: All show ip route interface <interface number> Displays routes on a single interface. Command mode: All show ip route port <port alias or number> Displays routes on a single port. Command mode: All show ip route static Displays static routes configured on the switch. Command mode: All show ip route tag {address|bgp|broadcast|fixed|martian| |multicast|ospf|rip|static} Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 40 on page Command mode: All show ip route type {broadcast|direct|indirect|local| |martian|multicast} Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 39 on page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 88: Show All Ip Route Information
Show All IP Route Information The following command displays IP route information: show ip route Command mode: All Mgmt routes: Status code: * best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metric If * 192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.50.50 direct fixed 128 * 192.168.50.50 255.255.255.255 192.168.50.50 local addr 128 * 192.168.50.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.50.255 broadcast broadcast 128 Data routes: Status code: * best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metric If * 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 multicast addr * 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast The following table describes the Type parameters. Table 39. IP Routing Type Parameters Parameter Description indirect The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address. direct Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch. local Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. broadcast Indicates a broadcast route. martian The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. ...
Page 89 Table 40. IP Routing Tag Parameters (continued) Parameter Description The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). ospf The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). broadcast Indicates a broadcast address. martian The address belongs to a filtered group. multicast Indicates a multicast address. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 90: Arp Information
ARP Information The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address status flags (see Table 42 on page 92), VLAN, age and port for the address. Table 41. ARP Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show [ip] arp [all] Displays all ARP entries. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry  Address status flag  The VLAN and port to which the address belongs  The elapsed time (in seconds) since the ARP entry was learned  For more information, see page Command mode: All show ip arp data Displays all data ARP entries. Command mode: All show [ip] arp find <IP address> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. Command mode: All show ip arp inspection Displays the current Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) configuration settings. For details, see page Command mode: All show [ip] arp interface port <port alias or number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. Command mode: All show ip arp management Displays all management ARP entries. Command mode: All show [ip] arp reply Displays the ARP entries for the switch’s IP interfaces.
Page 91: Arp Address List Information
Table 41. ARP Information Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show [ip] arp static Displays all static ARP entries. Command mode: All show [ip] arp vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4095)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All ARP Address List Information The following command displays owned ARP address list information: show [ip] arp reply Command mode: All IP address IP mask MAC address VLAN PassUp 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 08:17:f4:62:64:00 1 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 08:17:f4:62:64:00 1 46.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 08:17:f4:62:64:00 4094 3.3.3.20 255.255.255.255 08:17:f4:62:64:00 3 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 92: Show All Arp Entry Information
Show All ARP Entry Information The following command displays ARP information: show [ip] arp Command mode: All Mgmt ARP entries: Total number of Mgmt ARP entries : 3 IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Age Port 10.241.38.131 P 74:99:75:74:c4:fe 4095 MGT 10.241.38.132 74:99:75:75:69:fe 4095 71 MGT 10.241.38.254 74:99:75:c8:13:00 4095 35 MGT Data ARP entries: Current ARP configuration: rearp 5 No static ARP configured. Total number data ARP entries : 10 IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Age Port 1.1.1.4 P 74:99:75:74:c4:00 100 1.1.1.5 74:99:75:75:69:00 100 140 TRK64 1.1.1.10 P 00:00:5e:00:01:01 100 2.2.2.4 P 74:99:75:74:c4:00 200 2.2.2.5 74:99:75:75:69:00 200 141 TRK64 2.2.2.6 74:99:75:08:99:00 200 140 TRK1 2.2.2.10 P 00:00:5e:00:01:01 200 3.3.3.4 P 74:99:75:74:c4:00 300 3.3.3.6 74:99:75:08:99:00 300 150 TRK1 3.3.3.10 P 00:00:5e:00:01:01 300 The Port field shows the target port of the ARP entry. The Flags field is interpreted as follows: Table 42. ARP Flag Parameters Flag Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface. Indirect route entry.
Page 93: Dynamic Arp Inspection Information
Dynamic ARP Inspection Information The following commands display Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) information: Table 43. Dynamic ARP Inspection Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip arp inspection Displays the current DAI configuration settings. Command mode: All show ip arp inspection interfaces [<port alias or number>] Displays the current DAI configuration settings for the selected interfaces. Command mode: All show ip arp inspection vlan [<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Displays the current DAI configuration settings for the selected VLANs. Command mode: All show ip arp inspection interfaces [<port alias or number>] Command mode: All Interface Trust State 1 Trusted 2 Trusted 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted show ip arp inspection vlan [<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Command mode: All Vlan Configuration 2 Enabled © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 94: Bgp Information
BGP Information The following commands display BGP information: Table 44. BGP Peer Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip bgp aggregateaddress [<1‐16>] Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration. Command mode: All show ip bgp information Displays the BGP routing table. See page 97 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor [<1‐96>] Displays the current BGP peer configuration. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor advertisedroutes Displays all BGP advertised routes to all neighbors. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor <1‐96> advertisedroutes Displays all BGP advertised routes to a specific peer. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor group Displays BGP group information. See page 96 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor information Displays BGP peer information. See page 95 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor <1‐96> information Displays BGP peer information for a specific peer. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor <1‐96> redistribute Displays BGP neighbor redistribution. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 95: Bgp Peer Information
BGP Peer Information Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show ip bgp neighbor <1‐96> routes Displays BGP peer routes. Command mode: All show ip bgp neighbor summary Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message sent, up/down or state. See page 97 for a sample output. Command mode: All BGP Peer Information Following is an example of the information provided by the following command: show ip bgp neighbor information Command mode: All BGP Peer Information: Static Peers: 1: 3.5.0.3 , version 4, TTL 255, TTL Security hops 0 Remote AS: 10000, Local AS: 10000, Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 3.3.3.3, Local router ID: 5.5.5.5 nexthopself disabled RR client disabled BGP status: established, Old status: established Total received packets: 4321, Total sent packets: 4309 Received updates: 12, Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 60, Holdtime: 180, MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 1 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 96: Bgp Group Information
BGP Group Information Following is an example of the information provided by the following command: show ip bgp neighbor group Command mode: All BGP Group Information: Local router ID: 1.1.1.2, Local AS: 100 Group 1: Name: toG82642007 Addr: 192.168.128.0 Mask: 255.255.255.248 Remote AS list: 200 Dynamic Peers Limit: 8 Dynamic Peers in established state: 1 Dynamic Peers of this group: 97: 192.168.128.4, Group: 1 (toG82642007), TTL 1 Remote AS: 200, Local AS: 100, Link type: EBGP Remote router ID: 2.2.1.2, Local router ID: 1.1.1.2 Configured Version: 4 Negotiated Version: 4 Total path attribute out: 0 In Total Messages: 74 Out Total Messages: 74 In Updates: 0 Out Updates: 0 Established Time: 01:12:36 MinAdvTime: 00:01:00 Configured holdtime: 00:03:00 Negotiated holdtime: 00:03:00 Configured keepalive 00:01:00 Negotiated keepalive 00:01:00 In Update Last Time: 00:00:00 Out Update Last Time: 00:14:32 Last Send Time: 01:26:54 Last Received Time: 01:26:54 Inrmap list count: 0 Outrmap list count: 0 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 97: Bgp Summary Information
BGP Summary Information Following is an example of the information provided by the following command: show ip bgp neighbor summary Command mode: All BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State 1: 205.178.23.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205.178.15.148 0 148 0 0 never connect Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information provided by the following command: show ip bgp information [<IPv4 network> <IPv4 mask>] [longer_prefix] Command mode: All Status codes: * valid, > best, = multipath, i internal Origin codes: i IGP, e EGP, ? incomplete Network Mask Next Hop Metric LcPrf Wght Path *> 1.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 0 ? *> 10.100.100.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 0 ? *> 10.100.120.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 0 ? The IPv4 network and mask options restrict the output to a specific network in the BGP routing table. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 98: Ospf Information
OSPF Information The following commands display OSPF information: Table 45. OSPF Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show interface ip <1‐128> ospf Displays the current OSPF settings for the specified IP interface. Command mode: All show ip ospf area <0‐5> Displays OSPF settings for a particular area index. Command mode: All show ip ospf area information [<0‐5>] Displays area information for all areas or a particular area index. Command mode: All show ip ospf arearange <1‐16> Displays the current OSPF summary range settings. Command mode: All show ip ospf areavirtuallink <1‐3> Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. Command mode: All show ip ospf areavirtuallink information Displays information about all the configured virtual links. Command mode: All show ip ospf generalinformation Displays general OSPF information. See page 100 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip ospf host <1‐128> Displays the current OSPF host entries. Command mode: All show ip ospf host information Displays OSPF host configuration information. Command mode: All show ip ospf information Displays the OSPF information. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 99 Command Syntax and Usage show ip ospf interface [<IP interface number>] Displays OSPF information for all IP interfaces or a particular interface. See page 100 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip ospf interface loopback [<1‐5>] Displays OSPF information for all loopback interfaces or a particular loopback interface. See page 101 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip ospf interface port [<port alias or number>] Displays OSPF information for all ports or a particular port. For details, see page 101. Command mode: All show ip ospf neighbor Displays the status of all the current neighbors. Command mode: All show ip ospf redistribute Displays the current OSPF redistribute settings. Command mode: All show ip ospf routes Displays OSPF routing table. See page 101 for a sample output. Command mode: All show ip ospf summaryrange <0‐5> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non‐NSSA areas. Command mode: All show ip ospf summaryrangenssa <0‐5> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 100: Ospf General Information
OSPF General Information The following command displays general OSPF information: show ip ospf generalinformation Command mode: All OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 10.10.10.1 Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626 Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1, of which 2 are >=INIT state, 2 are >=EXCH state, 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2, of which 3transit 0nssa Area Id : 0.0.0.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary OSPF Interface Information The following command displays OSPF interface information: show ip ospf interface <interface number> Command mode: All Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2 Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5,...
Page 101: Ospf Loopback Information
Command mode: All Ip Address 10.241.39.82, Area 0.0.0.0, Admin Status UP Router ID 1.1.1.1, State Waiting, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Ip Address 0.0.0.0 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Ip Address 0.0.0.0 Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5, Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 0 If Events 1, Authentication type none OSPF Information Route Codes The following command displays OSPF route information: show ip ospf routes Command mode: All Codes: IA OSPF inter area, N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 OSPF external type 1, E2 OSPF external type 2 IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2 IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2 IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2 IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2 IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2 IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 102: Ospf Database Information
OSPF Database Information The following commands display OSPF Database information: Table 46. OSPF Database Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip ospf database Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs). Command mode: All show ip ospf database advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)> Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the LSAs in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1. Command mode: All show ip ospf database area <0‐5> Displays LS database information for the specified OSPF area. Command mode: All show ip ospf database asbrsummary [advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)>|linkstateid <link state ID (IP address)>|self] Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as follows: asbrsummary advertisingrouter 20.1.1.1 displays ASBR  summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.1. asbrsummary linkstateid 10.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary  LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.1.1. asbrsummary self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.  asbrsummary with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.  Command mode: All show ip ospf database databasesummary Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: Number of LSAs of each type in each area.  Total number of LSAs for each area.
Page 103 Table 46. OSPF Database Information Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show ip ospf database network [advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)>|linkstateid <link state ID (IP address)>|self] Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA. Command mode: All show ip ospf database nssa [advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)>|linkstateid <link state ID (IP address)>|self] Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. Command mode: All show ip ospf database router [advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)>|linkstateid <link state ID (IP address)>|self] Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. Command mode: All show ip ospf database self Displays all the self‐advertised LSAs. No parameters are required. Command mode: All show ip ospf database summary [advertisingrouter <router ID (IP address)>|linkstateid <link state ID (IP address)>|self] Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 104: Ospfv3 Information
OSPFv3 Information The following commands display OSPFv3 information: Table 47. OSPFv3 Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 ospf area <area index (0‐2)> Displays the OSPFv3 area information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf areas Displays the OSPFv3 Area Table. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf arearange <1‐16> Displays the current OSPFv3 summary range settings. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf arearange information Displays OSPFv3 summary ranges. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf areavirtuallink <1‐3> Displays the current OSPFv3 virtual link settings. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf areavirtuallink information Displays information about all the configured virtual links. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf borderrouters Displays OSPFv3 routes to an ABR or ASBR. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf host <1‐128> Displays the current OSPFv3 host entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf host information Displays OSPFv3 host configuration information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf information Displays all OSPFv3 information. To view a sample display, see page 106. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 105 106. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf neighbor [<nbr router‐ID (IP address)>] Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf redistconfig <1‐128> Displays the current OSPFv3 redistribution configuration for the specified entry. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf redistconfig information Displays OSPFv3 redistribution information to be applied to routes learned from the route table. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf requestlist [<nbr router‐ID (IP address)>] Displays the OSPFv3 request list. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf retranslist [<nbr router‐ID (IP address)>] Displays the OSPFv3 retransmission list. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf routes Displays OSPFv3 routing table. To view a sample display, see page 108. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf summaryprefix <1‐16> Displays the current OSPFv3 AS‐external range. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf summaryprefix information Displays the OSPFv3 external summary‐address configuration information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 106: Ospfv3 Information Dump
OSPFv3 Information Dump The following command displays OSPFv3 information: show ipv6 ospf information Command mode: All Router Id: 1.0.0.1 ABR Type: Standard ABR SPF schedule delay: 5 secs Hold time between two SPFs: 10 secs Exit Overflow Interval: 0 Ref BW: 100000 Ext Lsdb Limit: none Trace Value: 0x00008000 As Scope Lsa: 2 Checksum Sum: 0xfe16 Passive Interface: Disable Nssa Asbr Default Route Translation: Disable Autonomous System Boundary Router Redistributing External Routes from connected, metric 10, metric type asExtType1, no tag set Number of Areas in this router 1 Area 0.0.0.0 Number of interfaces in this area is 1 Number of Area Scope Lsa: 7 Checksum Sum: 0x28512 Number of Indication Lsa: 0 SPF algorithm executed: 2 times OSPFv3 Interface Information The following command displays OSPFv3 interface information: show ipv6 ospf interface Command mode: All Ospfv3 Interface Information Interface Id: 1 Instance Id: 0 Area Id: 0.0.0.0 Local Address: fe80::222:ff:fe7d:5d00 Router Id: 1.0.0.1 Network Type: BROADCAST Cost: 1 State: BACKUP Designated Router Id: 2.0.0.2 local address: fe80::218:b1ff:fea1:6c01 Backup Designated Router Id: 1.0.0.1 local address: fe80::222:ff:fe7d:5d00 Transmit Delay: 1 sec Priority: 1 IfOptions: 0x0 Timer intervals configured: Hello: 10, Dead: 40, Retransmit: 5 Hello due in 6 sec Neighbor Count is: 1, Adjacent neighbor count is: 1 Adjacent with neighbor 2.0.0.2 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 107: Ospfv3 Database Information
Displays AS‐External LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database interprefix [detail|hex] Displays Inter‐Area Prefix LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database interrouter [detail|hex] Displays Inter‐Area router LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database intraprefix [detail|hex] Displays Intra‐Area Prefix LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database link [detail|hex] Displays Link LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database network [detail|hex] Displays Network LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database nssa [detail|hex] Displays Type‐7 (NSSA) LSA database information. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf database router [detail|hex] Displays the Router LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 108: Ospfv3 Route Codes Information
OSPFv3 Route Codes Information The following command displays OSPFv3 route information: show ipv6 ospf routes Command mode: All Dest/ NextHp/ Cost Rt. Type Area PrefixLength IfIndex 3ffe::10:0:0:0 fe80::290:69ff 30 interArea 0.0.0.0 /80 fe90:b4bf /vlan1 3ffe::20:0:0:0 fe80::290:69ff 20 interArea 0.0.0.0 /80 fe90:b4bf /vlan1 3ffe::30:0:0:0 :: /vlan2 10 intraArea 0.0.0.0 /80 3ffe::60:0:0:6 fe80::211:22ff 10 interArea 0.0.0.0 /128 fe33:4426 /vlan2 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 109: Routing Information Protocol
Routing Information Protocol The following commands display information: Table 49. Routing Information Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip rip Displays the current RIP configuration. Command mode: All show ip rip interface [<IP interface number>|port <port alias or number>] Displays the current RIP interface configuration. For more information, see page 110. Command mode: All show ip rip redistribute Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration. Command mode: All show ip rip routes Displays RIP routes. For more information, see page 110. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 110: Rip Routes Information
RIP Routes Information The following command displays RIP route information: show ip rip routes Command mode: All >> IP Routing# 30.1.1.0/24 directly connected 3.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.11 metric 4 4.0.0.0/16 via 30.1.1.11 metric 16 10.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 3 20.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 2 This table contains all dynamic routes learned through RIP, including the routes that are undergoing garbage collection with metric = 16. This table does not contain locally configured static routes. RIP Interface Information The following command displays RIP user information: show ip rip interface <interface number> Command mode: All RIP USER CONFIGURATION : RIP: ON, update 30 RIP on Interface 49 : 101.1.1.10, enabled version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none poison disabled, split horizon enabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1 auth none, key none G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 111: Ipv6 Routing Information
The following table discribes the IPv6 Routing information options. Table 50. IPv6 Routing Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 route Displays all IPv6 routing information. For more information, see page 112. Command mode: All show ipv6 route address <IPv6 address> Displays a single route by destination IPv6 address. Command mode: All show ipv6 route gateway <IPv6 gateway address> Displays routes to a single gateway. Command mode: All show ipv6 route interface <interface number> Displays routes on a single interface. Command mode: All show ipv6 route static Displays the current static route configuration. Command mode: All show ipv6 route summary Displays a summary of IPv6 routing information, including inactive routes. Command mode: All show ipv6 route type {connected|static|ospf} Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 39 on page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 112: Ipv6 Routing Table Information
IPv6 Routing Table Information The following command displays IPv6 routing information: show ipv6 route Command mode: All IPv6 Routing Table 3 entries Codes : C Connected, S Static O OSPF M Management Gateway S ::/0 [1/20] via 2001:2:3:4::1, Interface 2 C 2001:2:3:4::/64 [1/1] via ::, Interface 2 C fe80::20f:6aff:feec:f701/128 [1/1] Note that the first number inside the brackets represents the metric and the second number represents the preference for the route. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 113: Ipv6 Neighbor Cache Information
IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 neighbors Displays all IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries. For more information, see page 113. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors find <IPv6 address> Displays a single IPv6 Neighbor Cache entry by IP address. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors interface port <port alias or number> Displays IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries on a single port. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors static Displays static IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information The following command displays a summary of IPv6 Neighbor Cache information: show ipv6 neighbors Command mode: All IPv6 Address Age Linklayer Addr State IF VLAN Port 2001:2:3:4::1 10 00:50:bf:b7:76:b0 Reachable 2 1 1 fe80::250:bfff:feb7:76b0 0 00:50:bf:b7:76:b0 Stale 2 1 2 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 114: Ipv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Information
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Information The following command displays a summary of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix information: show ipv6 prefix Command mode: All Codes: A Address , P PrefixAdvertisement D Default , N Not Advertised [L] Onlink Flag is set [A] Autonomous Flag is set AD 10:: 64 [LA] Valid lifetime 2592000 , Preferred lifetime 604800 P 20:: 64 [LA] Valid lifetime 200 , Preferred lifetime 100 Neighbor Discovery prefix information includes information about all configured prefixes. The following command displays IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix information for an interface: show ipv6 prefix interface <interface number> Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 115: Ecmp Static Route Information
ECMP Static Route Information The following command displays Equal Cost Multi‐Path (ECMP) route information: show ip ecmp Command mode: All Current ecmp static routes: Destination Mask Gateway If GW Status 10.10.1.1 255.255.255.255 100.10.1.1 1 up 200.20.2.2 1 down 10.20.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.233.3.3 1 up 10.20.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.234.4.4 1 up 10.20.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.235.5.5 1 up ECMP healthcheck ping interval: 1 ECMP healthcheck retries number: 3 ECMP Hash Mechanism: dipsip ECMP route information shows the status of each ECMP route configured on the switch. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 116 IGMP Information The following commands display IGMP information: Table 52. IGMP Multicast Group Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ip igmp Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters. Command mode: All show ip igmp filtering Displays current IGMP Filtering parameters. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups Displays information for all multicast groups. For details, see page 119. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups address <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups detail <IP address> Displays details about an IGMP multicast group, including source and timer information. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups interface port <port alias or number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups portchannel <1‐128> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Command mode: All show ip igmp groups vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. Command mode: All show ip igmp ipmcgrp Displays information for all IPMC groups. For details, see page 120. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 117 |portchannel <1‐128>|static] Displays information for all Mrouters, all dynamic/static Mrouter ports installed or Mrouter ports specific to a specified interface/portchannel. Command mode: All show ip igmp mrouter information Displays IGMP Multicast Router information. For details, see page 119. Command mode: All show ip igmp mrouter vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IGMP Multicast Router information for the specified VLAN. Command mode: All show ip igmp profile <1‐16> Displays information about the current IGMP filter. Command mode: All show ip igmp querier port <port alias or number> Displays IGMP Querier information for a particular port. Command mode: All show ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IGMP Querier information for a particular VLAN. For details, see page 118. Command mode: All show ip igmp relay Displays IGMP Relay information. Command mode: All show ip igmp snoop Displays IGMP Snooping information. Command mode: All show ip igmp snoop igmpv3 Displays the current IGMPv3 Snooping configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 118 IGMP Querier Information The following command displays IGMP Querier information for a particular VLAN: show ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Command mode: All Current IGMP Querier information: IGMP Querier information for vlan 1: Other IGMP querier none Switchquerier enabled, current state: Querier Switchquerier type: Ipv4, address 1.1.1.1, Switchquerier general query interval: 125 secs, Switchquerier maxresponse interval: 100 'tenths of secs', Switchquerier startup interval: 31 secs, count: 2 Switchquerier robustness: 2 IGMP configured version is v3 IGMP Operating version is v3 IGMP Querier information includes:  VLAN number  Querier status Other IGMP querier—none  IGMP querier present, address: (IP or MAC address)  Other IGMP querier present, interval (minutes:seconds)  Querier election type (IPv4 or MAC) and address Query interval   Querier startup interval Maximum query response interval   Querier robustness value IGMP version number  G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 119: Igmp Group Information
Expiration timer value  IGMP multicast forwarding state IGMP Multicast Router Information The following command displays Mrouter information: show ip igmp mrouter information Command mode: All Total entries: 3 Total number of dynamic mrouters: 2 Total number of installed static mrouters: 1 SrcIP VLAN Port Version Expires MRT QRV QQIC 10.1.1.1 2 21 V3 4:09 128 2 125 10.1.1.5 2 23 V2 4:09 125 * 9 24 V2 static IGMP Mrouter information includes:  Source IP address VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected   IGMP version  Mrouter expiration  Maximum query response time  Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV)  Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC) © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 120 IPMC Group Information The following command displays IGMP IPMC group information: show ip igmp ipmcgrp Command mode: All Total number of displayed ipmc groups: 4 Legend(possible values in Type column): SH static host DR dynamic registered SP static primary DU dynamic unregistered SB static backup M mrouter O other Source Group Vlan Port Type Timeleft =============== =============== ==== ============ ==== ========== * 232.0.0.1 1 DU 6 sec * 232.0.0.2 1 DU 6 sec * 232.0.0.3 1 DU 6 sec * 232.0.0.4 1 DU 6 sec IGMP IPMC Group information includes:  IGMP source address IGMP group address   VLAN and port Type of IPMC group   Expiration timer value G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 121 MLD Information The following table describes the commands used to view MLD information. Table 53. MLD Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 mld groups Displays MLD multicast group information. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld groups address <IPv6 address> Displays group information for the specified IPv6 address. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld groups interface port <port alias or number> Displays MLD groups on a single interface port. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld groups portchannel <1‐128> Displays groups on a single port channel. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld groups vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays groups on a single VLAN. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld interface [<1‐126>] Displays information for all MLD interfaces or a specific MLD interface. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld mrouter Displays all MLD Mrouter ports. See page 122 for sample output. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 122 MLD Mrouter Information The following command displays MLD Mrouter information: show ipv6 mld mrouter Command mode: All Source: fe80:0:0:0:200:14ff:fea8:40c9 Port/Vlan: 26/4 Interface: 3 QRV: 2 QQIC:125 Maximum Response Delay: 1000 Version: MLDv2 Expires:1:02 The following table describes the MLD Mrouter information displayed in the output. Table 54. MLD Mrouter Statistic Description Source Displays the link‐local address of the reporter. Port/Vlan Displays the port/vlan on which the general query is received. Interface Displays the interface number on which the general query is received. Displays the Querier’s robustness variable value. QQIC Displays the Querier’s query interval code. Maximum Response Displays the configured maximum query response time. Delay Version Displays the MLD version configured on the interface. Expires Displays the amount of time that must pass before the multicast router decides that there are no more listeners for a multicast address or a particular source on a link. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 123: Vrrp Information
Table 55. VRRP Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ip vrrp Displays the current VRRP parameters. Command mode: All show ip vrrp group Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. Command mode: All show ip vrrp group track Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for the virtual router. Command mode: All show ip vrrp information Displays VRRP information. For details, see page 124. Command mode: All show ip vrrp interface <1‐126> Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. Command mode: All show ip vrrp trackingpriorityincrement Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. Command mode: All show ip vrrp virtualrouter <1‐128> Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router. Command mode: All show ip vrrp virtualrouter <1‐128> track Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 124 The following command displays VRRP information: show ip vrrp information Command mode: All VRRP information: 1: vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if 1, renter, prio 100, master 2: vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if 1, renter, prio 100, backup 3: vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if 1, renter, prio 100, master When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. VRRP information includes:  Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address   Interface number  Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the  owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.  Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest  priority becomes master.  Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router.  backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.  init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event.  For example, once it receives a startup event, it transitions to master if its ...
Page 125: Interface Information
Interface Information The following command displays interface information: show interface ip Command mode: All Interface information: 1: IP4 192.168.49.50 255.255.255.0 192.168.49.255, vlan 1, DOWN 2: IP6 3003:0:0:0:0:0:0:5/64 , vlan 2, up fe80::213:aff:fe4f:7c02 128: IP4 192.168.50.50 255.255.255.0 192.168.50.255, vlan 4095, up Routed Port Interface Information: Loopback interface information: lo1: 192.168.48.48 255.255.255.128 192.168.48.127, up For each interface, the following information is displayed:  IPv4 interface address and subnet mask IPv6 address and prefix   VLAN assignment Status (up, down, or disabled)  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 126 IPv6 Interface Information The following command displays IPv6 interface information: show ipv6 interface <interface number> Command mode: All Interface information: 2: IP6 2001:0:0:0:225:3ff:febb:bb15/64 , vlan 1, up fe80::225:3ff:febb:bb15 Link local address: fe80::225:3ff:febb:bb15 Global unicast address(es): 2001::225:3ff:febb:bb15/64 Anycast address(es): Not Configured. Joined group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ffbb:bb15 MTU is 1500 ICMP redirects are enabled ND DAD is enabled, Number of DAD attempts: 1 ND router advertisement is disabled For each interface, the following information is displayed:  IPv6 interface address and prefix  VLAN assignment  Status (up, down or disabled)  Path MTU size  Status of ICMP redirects  Status of Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection (DAD)  Status of Neighbor Discovery router advertisements G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 127 IPv6 Path MTU Information The following command displays IPv6 Path MTU information: show ipv6 pmtu [<destination IPv6 address>] Command mode: All Path MTU Discovery info: Max Cache Entry Number : 10 Current Cache Entry Number: 2 Cache Timeout Interval : 10 minutes Destination Address Since PMTU 5000:1::3 00:02:26 1400 FE80::203:A0FF:FED6:141D 00:06:55 1280 Path MTU Discovery information provides information about entries in the Path MTU cache. The PMTU field indicates the maximum packet size in octets that can successfully traverse the path from the switch to the destination node. It is equal to the minimum link MTU of all the links in the path to the destination node. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 128 IP Information The following command displays Layer 3 information: show ip interface brief Command mode: All IP information: AS number 0 Interface information: 1: IP4 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.255, vlan 1, up 128: IP4 10.241.37.168 255.255.255.128 10.241.37.255, vlan 4095, up Loopback interface information: Default gateway information: metric strict 4: 10.241.37.254, up active Default IP6 gateway information: ECMP Hash Mechanism: dipsip Current BOOTP relay settings: OFF Global servers: Server 1 address 0.0.0.0 Server 2 address 0.0.0.0 Server 3 address 0.0.0.0 Server 4 address 0.0.0.0 Server 5 address 0.0.0.0 Current BOOTP relay option82 settings: OFF Current BOOTP relay option82 policy: Replace Current DHCP Snooping settings: Off DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs: empty Insertion of option 82 information is Disable Interface Trusted Rate limit (pps) 1 No none 2 No none 3 No none 4 No none 62 No none 63 No none 64 No none MGT No none Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled, noicmprd disabled, ICMPv6 redirect disabled Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: none...
Page 129 IP information includes:  IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, VLAN number and operational status.  Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway number, IP address and health status  BootP relay settings IP forwarding settings, including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts  and the status of ICMP re‐directs Network filter settings, if applicable   Route map settings, if applicable © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 130 IKEv2 Information The following table lists commands that display information about IKEv2. Table 56. IKEv2 Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ikev2 Displays all IKEv2 information. See page 131 for sample output. Command mode: All show ikev2 cacert Displays the CA certificate. Command mode: All show ikev2 hostcert Displays the host certificate. Command mode: All show ikev2 identity Displays IKEv2 identity information. Command mode: All show ikev2 presharekey Displays the IKEv2 preshare key. Command mode: All show ikev2 proposal Displays the IKEv2 proposal. Command mode: All show ikev2 retransmitinterval Displays the IKEv2 retransmit interval. Command mode: All show ikev2 sa Displays the IKEv2 SA. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 131 IKEv2 Information Dump The following command displays IKEv2 information: show ikev2 Command mode: All IKEv2 retransmit time: 20 IKEv2 cookie notification: disable IKEv2 authentication method: Preshared key IKEv2 proposal: Cipher: 3des Authentication: sha1 DH Group: dh2 Local preshare key: ibm123 IKEv2 choose IPv6 address as ID type No SAD entries. IKEv2 information includes:  IKEv2 retransmit time, in seconds.  Whether IKEv2 cookie notification is enabled.  The IKEv2 proposal in force. This includes the encryption algorithm (cipher), the authentication algorithm type and the Diffie‐Hellman (DH) group, which determines the strength of the key used in the key exchange process. Higher DH group numbers are more secure but require additional time to compute the key.  The local preshare key.  Whether IKEv2 is using IPv4 or IPv6 addresses as the ID type.  Security Association Database (SAD) entries, if applicable. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 132 IP Security Information The following table describes the commands used to display information about IP security. Table 57. IPsec Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ipsec dynamicpolicy [<1‐10>] Displays dynamic policy information. Command mode: All show ipsec manualpolicy [<1‐10>] Displays manual policy information. See page 133 for sample output. Command mode: All show ipsec sa Displays all security association information. Command mode: All show ipsec spd Displays all security policy information. Command mode: All show ipsec trafficselector [<1‐10>] Displays IPsec traffic selector information. Command mode: All show ipsec transformset [<1‐10>] Displays IPsec transform set information. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 133 IP Address: 2002:0:0:0:0:0:0:151 Associated transform ID: 1 Associated traffic selector ID: 1 INESP SPI: 9900 INESP encryption KEY: 3456789abcdef012 INESP authentication KEY: 23456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789 OUTESP SPI: 7700 OUTESP encryption KEY: 6789abcdef012345 OUTESP authentication KEY: 56789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abc Applied on interface: interface 1 IPsec manual policy information includes:  The IP address of the remote peer  The transform set ID associated with this policy  Traffic selector ID associated with this policy  ESP inbound SPI  ESP inbound encryption key  ESP inbound authentication key  ESP outbound SPI  ESP outbound encryption key  ESP outbound authentication key  The interface to which this manual policy has been applied © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 134 DHCP Snooping Information The following command displays DHCP Snooping information: show ip dhcp snooping Command mode: All DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs: empty Insertion of option 82 information is Disable Interface Trusted Rate limit (pps) 1 No none 5 No none 6 No none 7 No none 8 No none 9 No none 10 No none 11 No none 12 No none 13 No none 14 No none 15 No none The following command displays the DHCP binding table: show ip dhcp snooping binding Command mode: All Mac Address IP Address Lease(seconds) Type VLAN Interface 00:00:01:00:02:01 10.0.0.1 1600 dynamic 100 port 1 02:1c:5f:d1:18:9c 210.38.197.63 86337 Static 127 1 06:51:4d:e6:16:2d 194.116.155.190 86337 Static 105 1 08:69:0f:1d:ba:3d 40.90.17.26 86337 Static 150 1 08:a2:6d:00:36:56 40.194.18.213 86337 Static 108 1 0e:a7:f8:a2:74:2c 130.254.47.129 86337 Static 171 1 0e:b7:64:02:97:7c 35.92.27.110 86337 Static 249 1 Total number of bindings: 7 The DHCP Snooping binding table displays information for each entry in the table. Each entry has a MAC address, an IP address, the lease time, the interface to which the entry applies and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 135 Displays PIM component information. For details, see page 136. Command mode: All show ip pim electedrp [group <multicast group IP address>] Displays a list of the elected Rendezvous Points. Command mode: All show ip pim interface [<1‐126>|detail|loopback <1‐5>|port <port alias or number>] Displays PIM interface information. To view sample output, see page 136. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute Displays information about PIM multicast routes. For more information about displaying PIM multicast route information, see page 138. Command mode: All show ip pim neighbor [<interface number>|port <port alias or number>] Displays PIM neighbor information. To view sample output, see page 137. Command mode: All show ip pim neighborfilters Displays information about PIM neighbor filters. Command mode: All show ip pim rpcandidate [<component ID (1‐2)>] Displays a list of the candidate Rendezvous Points configured. Command mode: All show ip pim rpset [<RP IP address>] Displays a list of the Rendezvous Points learned. Command mode: All show ip pim rpstatic [<component ID (1‐2)>] Displays a list of the static Rendezvous Points configured. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 136 PIM Component Information The following command displays Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) component information: show ip pim component [<component ID (1‐2)>] Command mode: All PIM Component Information ComponentId: 1 PIM Mode: sparse, PIM Version: 2 Elected BSR: 0.0.0.0 Candidate RP Holdtime: 0 PIM component information includes the following: Component ID   Mode (sparse, dense)  PIM Version  Elected Bootstrap Router (BSR) address  Candidate Rendezvous Point (RP) hold time, in seconds PIM Interface Information The following command displays information about PIM interfaces: show ip pim interface Command mode: All Address IfName/IfId Ver/Mode Nbr Qry DRAddress DRPrio Count Interval 40.0.0.3 net4/4 2/Sparse 1 30 40.0.0.3 1 50.0.0.3 net5/5 2/Sparse 0 30 50.0.0.3 1 PIM interface information includes the following for each PIM interface: IP address ...
Page 137 PIM Neighbor Information The following command displays PIM neighbor information: show ip pim neighbor Command mode: All Neighbour IfName/Idx Uptime/Expiry Ver DRPri/Mode CompId Override Lan Address Interval Delay 40.0.0.2 net4/4 00:00:37/79 v2 1/S 1 0 0 40.0.0.4 net1/160 00:03:41/92 v2 32/S 2 0 0 PIM neighbor information includes the following:  Neighbor IP address, interface name and interface ID  Name and ID of interface used to reach the PIM neighbor  Up time (the time since this neighbor became the neighbor of the local router)  Expiry Time (the minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor expires)  Version number  Designated Router priority and mode Component ID   Override interval LAN delay interval  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 138 PIM Multicast Route Information Commands The following commands display PIM Multicast Route information: Table 59. PIM Multicast Route Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip pim mroute Displays information about all PIM multicast routes. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute [<component ID (1‐2)>] Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected component. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute count Displays a count of PIM multicast routes of each type. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute flags [s] [r] [w] Displays PIM multicast routes based on the selected entry flags. Enter flags in any combination: s: Shortest Path Tree (SPT) bit  r: Rendezvous Point Tree (RPT) bit  w: Wildcard bit  Command mode: All show ip pim mroute group <multicast group IP address> Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected multicast group. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute interface {<interface number>|port <port alias or number>} Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected incoming IP interface. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute source <multicast source IP address> Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected source IP address.
Page 139 PIM Multicast Route Information The following command displays PIM multicast route information: show ip pim mroute Command mode: All IP Multicast Routing Table Route Flags S: SPT Bit W: Wild Card Bit R: RPT Bit Timers: Uptime/Expires (8.8.8.111, 224.2.2.100) ,00:42:03/00:01:11 Incoming Interface : net44 ,RPF nbr : 44.44.44.1 ,Route Flags : S Outgoing InterfaceList : net17, Forwarding/Sparse ,00:42:03/ (*, 224.2.2.100) ,00:45:15/ ,RP : 88.88.88.2 Incoming Interface : net5 ,RPF nbr : 5.5.5.2 ,Route Flags : WR Outgoing InterfaceList : net17, Forwarding/Sparse ,00:45:15/ Total number of (*,G) entries : 1 Total number of (S,G) entries : 1 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 140: Quality Of Service Information
Quality of Service Information The following commands display QoS information: Table 60. QoS information Options Command Syntax and Usage show qos protocolpacketcontrol information queue [all] Displays the packet rate configured for each configurable packet queue. The all option also displays the packet rate configured for each reserved packet queue. Command mode: All show qos protocolpacketcontrol information protocol Displays of mapping of protocol packet types to each packet queue number. The status indicates whether the protocol is running or not running. Command mode: All show qos randomdetect Displays WRED and ECN information. For details, see page 142. Command mode: All show qos transmitqueue Displays the current 802.1p parameters. Command mode: All show qos transmitqueue information Displays all 802.1p information. For details, see page 141. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 141 1 8 2 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 10 7 5 10 7 6 11 15 7 11 15 Current port priority information: Port Priority COSq Weight 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 1 5 0 0 1 9 0 0 1 13 0 0 1 ......64 0 0 1 MGT 0 0 1 The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority‐to‐COS queue information. Table 61. 802.1p Priority‐to‐COS Queue Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority Displays the 802.1p Priority level. COSq Displays the Class of Service queue. Weight Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 142 The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p port priority information. Table 62. 802.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Port Displays the port alias. Priority Displays the 802.1p Priority level. COSq Displays the Class of Service queue. Weight Displays the scheduling weight. WRED and ECN Information The following command displays WRED and ECN information: show qos randomdetect Command mode: All Current wred and ecn configuration: Global ECN: Disable Global WRED: Disable WREDTcpMinThrTcpMaxThrTcpDrateNonTcpMinThrNonTcpMaxThrNonTcpDrate TQ0: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ1: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ2: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ3: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ4: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ5: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ6: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 TQ7: Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 143: Access Control List Information
Access Control List Information The following commands display Access Control List (ACL) information: Table 63. ACL Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show accesscontrol group [<1‐256>] Displays ACL group information. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list [<1‐256>] Displays ACL list information. For details, see page 144. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 [<1‐128>] Displays IPv6 ACL list information. For details, see page 146. Command mode: All show accesscontrol log Displays the current ACL log parameters. Command mode: All show accesscontrol vmap [<1‐128>] Displays VMAP information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 144 Access Control List Information The following commands display IPv4 Access Control List (ACL) information: Table 64. IPv4 Access Control List Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show accesscontrol list [<1‐256>] Displays ACL list information. To view sample output, see page 145. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 Displays the current IPv4 parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> log Displays the current IPv4 ACL log state. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter Displays the current metering parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> mirror Displays the current port mirroring parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark Displays the current re‐mark parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 145 Statistics : enabled Mirror Target Configuration: Mirror target destination: port Egress port for mirror target: 4 If the ACL is being used with Policy‐Based Routing (PBR), the output from this command is more like the following: Filter 1 profile: routemap 16 IPv4 Protocol : 17 Actions : Permit : dscp 22 Statistics : enabled Installed on Port 16 Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each ACL. Table 65. ACL List Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Filter x profile Indicates the ACL number. Ethernet Displays the ACL Ethernet header parameters, if configured. IPv4 Displays the ACL IPv4 header parameters, if configured. TCP/UDP Displays the ACL TCP/UDP header parameters, if configured. Meter Displays the ACL meter parameters. Re‐Mark Displays the ACL re‐mark parameters. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 146 Table 65. ACL List Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Packet Format Displays the ACL Packet Format parameters, if configured. Actions Displays the configured action for the ACL. Statistics Displays status of ACL statistics (enabled or disabled). Mirror Target Displays ACL port mirroring parameters. Configuration Filter x profile Indicates the ACL number. Access Control IPv6 List Information The following commands display IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) information: Table 66. IPv6 Access Control List Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show accesscontrol list6 [<1‐128>] Displays the current ACL parameters. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 Displays the current IPv6 parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> log Displays the current IPv6 ACL log state. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter Displays current metering parameters for the specified ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark Displays current re‐mark parameters for the specified ACL.
Page 147 RMON Information Commands The following table describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information commands. Table 67. RMON Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show rmon Displays all RMON information. Command mode: All show rmon alarm [<1‐65535>] Displays RMON Alarm information. For details, see page 149. Command mode: All show rmon event [<1‐65535>] Displays RMON Event information. For details, see page 150. Command mode: All show rmon history [<1‐65535>] Displays RMON History information. For details, see page 148. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 148: Rmon History Information
RMON History Information The following command displays RMON History information: show rmon history Command mode: All RMON History group configuration: Index IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 30 5 5 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.22 30 5 5 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.20 30 5 5 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.19 30 5 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 1800 5 5 Index Owner 1 dan The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters. Table 68. RMON History Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Index Displays the index number that identifies each history instance. IFOID Displays the MIB Object Identifier. Interval Displays the time interval for each sampling bucket. Rbnum Displays the number of requested buckets, which is the number of data slots into which data is to be saved. Gbnum Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold sampled data. Owner Displays the owner of the history instance. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 149: Rmon Alarm Information
Interval Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. Sample Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, as follows: abs — absolute value, the value of the selected variable is  compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. delta — delta value, the value of the selected variable at the  last sample is subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds. Type Displays the type of alarm, as follows: falling — alarm is triggered when a falling threshold is  crossed. rising — alarm is triggered when a rising threshold is  crossed. either — alarm is triggered when either a rising or falling  threshold is crossed. rLimit Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. fLimit Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. Last value Displays the last sampled value. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 150: Rmon Event Information
Table 69. RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description rEvtIdx Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. fEvtIdx Displays the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index. Owner Displays the owner of the alarm instance. RMON Event Information The following command displays RMON event information: show rmon event Command mode: All RMON Event group configuration: Index Type Last Sent Description 1 both 0D: 0H: 1M:20S Event_1 2 none 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_2 3 log 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_3 4 trap 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_4 5 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Down 10 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Up 11 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInMsg 15 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInEchos Index Owner 1 dan The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters. Table 70. RMON Event Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Index Displays the index number that identifies each event instance.
Page 151: Link Status Information
Link Status Information The following command displays link information: show interface status [<port alias or number>] Command mode: All Alias Port Speed Duplex Flow Ctrl Link Description TXRX 1 1 10000 full no no down 1 60 60 10000 full no no down 60 61 61 10000 full no no up 61 62 62 10000 full no no up 62 63 63 10000 full no no up 63 MGT 65 1000 full yes yes up Use this command to display link status information about each port on the G8264CS, including:  Port alias or port number  Port description  Port speed and Duplex mode (half, full or any)  Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes or both)  Link status (up, down or disabled) © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 152: Port Information
Port Information The following command displays port information: show interface trunk <port alias or number> Command mode: All Alias Port Tag RMON Lrn Fld PVID DESCRIPTION VLAN(s) Trk NVLAN 1 1 n d e e 1 1 2 2 n d e e 1 1 3 3 n d e e 1 1 4 4 n d e e 1 1 5 5 n d e e 1 1 9 9 n d e e 1 1 13 13 n d e e 1 1 14 14 n d e e 1 1 15 15 n d e e 1 1 16 16 n d e e 1 1 17 17 n d e e 1 1 18 18 n d e e 1 1 19 19 n d e e 1 1 20 20 n d e e 1 1 60 60 n d e e 1 1 61 61 n d e e 1 1 62 62 n d e e 1 1 63 63 n d e e 1 1 64 64 n d e e 1 1 MGT 65 n d e e 4095 4095 * = PVID/NativeVLAN is tagged. # = PVID is ingress tagged. Trk = Trunk mode NVLAN = NativeVLAN Port information includes: Port alias or number   Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether the port has Remote Monitoring (RMON) enabled   Whether the port has FDB learning enabled (Lrn) Whether the port has Port Flooding enabled (Fld) ...
Page 153 12 Q10G 3.D LINK UnEqQD 5.0m IBMAmphenol 00D5814N13692 Accepted 13 Q10G 4.A < NO Device Installed > 14 Q10G 4.B < NO Device Installed > 15 Q10G 4.C < NO Device Installed > 16 Q10G 4.D < NO Device Installed > 17 SFP+ 1 LINK SR_SFP+ 850nm BLADE NETWORK BNCKMSPSR Approved 18 SFP+ 2 < NO Device Installed > 19 SFP+ 3 < NO Device Installed > 20 SFP+ 4 < NO Device Installed > 21 SFP+ 5 < NO Device Installed > 22 SFP+ 6 < NO Device Installed > 23 SFP+ 7 < NO Device Installed > 24 SFP+ 8 < NO Device Installed > 25 SFP+ 9 < NO Device Installed > 26 SFP+ 10 < NO Device Installed > 27 SFP+ 11 < NO Device Installed > 28 SFP+ 12 < NO Device Installed > This command displays information about the transceiver module on each port, as follows:  Port number and alias  Link status  Media/Transceiver type (LX, LR, SX, SR, DAC, PasDAC) and laser wavelength, in nanometers  Vendor name Part number   Approval status © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 154 Use the following command to display extended transceiver information: show interface port <port alias or number> transceiver details Command mode: All Port TX Link TXFlt Volts DegsC TXuW RXuW Transceiver Approve 3 Q10G 1.C Ena LINK N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PasQD 1.0m Approved BLADE NETWORK Part:BNQSQSCBL1M Date:110925 S/N:3548Y350VT19P8EM G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 155 Displays all the configured MAC OUIs. For a sample output, see page 157. Command mode: All show virt port <port alias or number> Displays Virtual Machine information for the selected port. For a sample output, see page 158. Note: The selected port must be a server port. Command mode: All show virt portchannel <1‐128> Displays Virtual Machine information for the selected portchannel. For a sample output, see page 158. Command mode: All show virt vm [v [r]] Displays all Virtual Machine information. v displays verbose information  r rescans data center  For more details, see page 159. Command mode: All show virt vmcheck Displays the current VM Check settings. For a sample output, see page 159. Command mode: All show virt vmgroup [<1‐4096>] Displays the current VM Group parameters. For a sample output, see page 160. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 156 Table 71. VMReady Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show virt vmpolicy vmbwidth [<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>|<index range>] [|{include|exclude| |section|begin}] Displays the current VM bandwidth management parameters for all virtual machines or only for a certain virtual machine by specifying its MAC address, UUID, name, IP address or index number. | displays the VM bandwidth management parameters matching one of the  following filters: • include displays parameters matching the specified expression • exclude displays parameters not matching the specified expression • section displays parameters matching the specified section • begin displays parameters beginning from the first parameter that matches the specified expression For a sample output, see page 160. Command mode: All show virt vmprofile [<profile name>] Displays the current VM Profile parameters. For a sample output, see page 160. Command mode: All show virt vmware Displays the current VMware parameters. To view command options, see page 161. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 157 Current Hello setting: disabled Current VMwarespecific settings ESX/ESXitovCenter heartbeat UDP port number: 902 Current VM profiles: None VM group 1 current configuration:Current VM group's secure mode: Disabled Current Group Ports: 13 17 Current Group vPorts: : empty VLAN: 2 VLAN Tagging: Disabled Current GROUP VMAP Config is empty VM group 2 current configuration: empty VM OUI Information The following command displays all the configured MAC OUIs: show virt oui Command mode: All VM MAC OUI Vendor Name 00:50:56 VMware 00:0c:29 VMware 00:05:69 VMware 00:0f:4b VirtualIron 00:03:ff Microsoft 00:15:5d Microsoft 00:1c:42 Parallels 00:16:3e Xen 00:80:27 Sun Number of MAC OUI entries: 9 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 158 VM Port Information The following command displays VM information for a specific port: show virt port <port alias or number> Command mode: All IP Address VMAC Address Index Port VM Group (Profile) Check status 3.3.3.2 00:50:56:a5:32:f7 0 23 40.40.31.1 00:50:56:a5:4e:9f 1 23 30 test30 Number of entries: 2 VM Portchannel Information The following command displays VM information for a specific portchannel: show virt portchannel <1‐128> Command mode: All IP Address VMAC Address Index Port VM Group (Profile) Check status 5.5.5.2 00:50:56:a5:17:07 2 ST 5 0.0.0.0 00:50:56:a5:4b:03 4 ST 5 5.5.5.3 00:50:56:af:20:6f 3 ST 5 Number of entries: 3 0.0.0.0 indicates IP address not yet available ST: Server Trunk G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 159 127.31.46.25 00:50:56:9c:00:c8 5 4 127.31.46.15 00:50:56:9c:21:2f 0 4 127.31.46.35 00:50:56:9c:29:29 6 3 Number of entries: 7 * indicates VMware ESX Service Console Interface + indicates VMware ESX/ESXi VMKernel or Management Interface VM information includes the following for each Virtual Machine (VM): State of the Virtual Machine (~ indicates the VM is inactive/idle)   IP address MAC address   Index number assigned to the VM  Server port on which the VM was detected  VM group that contains the VM, if applicable  VM Check status for the corresponding VM VM Check Information The following command displays VM Check information: show virt vmcheck Command mode: All Action to take for spoofed VMs: Basic: Oper disable the link Advanced: Install ACL to drop traffic Maximum number of acls that can be used for mac spoofing: 50 Trusted ports by configuration: empty © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 160 VM Group Information The following command displays VM Group parameters: show virt vmgroup [<1‐4096>] Command mode: All VM group 1 current configuration: Current VM group's secure mode: Disabled Current Group Ports: 13 17 Current Group vPorts: : empty VLAN: 2 Tagging/Trunkmode: Disabled Current GROUP VMAP Config is empty VM Bandwidth Information The following command displays VM bandwidth management parameters: show virt vmpolicy vmbwidth Command mode: All Bandwidth Profile for VM 00:50:56:a5:32:f7 is enabled. TX: Rate: 1024 Burst: 2048 ACL: 127 VM Profile Information The following command displays VM Profile parameters: show virt vmprofile Command mode: All VM profile "test30": VLAN ID: 30 Traffic shaping not enabled. VM Groups: 30 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 161 VMware Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show virt vmware hello Displays Virtual Machine hello settings. For a sample output, see page 162. Command mode: All show virt vmware hosts Displays a list of VMware hosts. For a sample output, see page 162. Command mode: All show virt vmware showhost {<host UUID>|<host IP address>|<host name>} Displays detailed information about a specific VMware host. For a sample output, see page 163. Command mode: All show virt vmware showvm {<VM UUID>|<VM IP address>|<VM name>} Displays detailed information about a specific Virtual Machine (VM). For a sample output, see page 164. Command mode: All show virt vmware switchportmapping Displays ESX Server ‐ switchport mapping. For a sample output, see page 164. Command mode: All show virt vmware vms Displays the UUIDs and the names of all VMware VMs. For a sample output, see page 164. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 162 VMware Hello Information The following command displays VM hello parameters: show virt vmware hello Command mode: All Current Settings: Hello Disabled Hello timer: 23 seconds Hello ports: 13 Hello address: 10.36.30.1 VMware Host Information The following command displays VM host information: show virt vmware hosts Command mode: All UUID Name(s), IP Address 80a42681d0e55910a0bfbd23bd3f7803 127.12.41.30 3c2e063c153cdd118b32a78dd1909a69 127.12.46.10 64f1fe30143cdd1184f2a8ba2cd7ae40 127.12.44.50 c818938e143cdd119f7ad8defa4b83bf 127.12.46.20 fc719af0093cdd1195beb0adac1bcf86 127.12.46.30 009a581a143cdd11be4cc9fb65ff04ec 127.12.46.40 VM host information includes the following:  UUID associated with the VMware host.  Name or IP address of the VMware host. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 163 Vswitches available on the host: vSwitch0 vSwitch1 Host physical nics: Device vSwitch MAC Address vmnic0 None 5c:f3:fc:49:f0:e4 vmnic1 vSwitch0 5c:f3:fc:49:f0:e6 vmnic2 None 00:00:c9:da:f5:d8 vmnic3 vSwitch1 00:00:c9:da:f5:dc vusb0 None 5e:f3:fc:4f:f0:e7 Port Groups and their vSwitches on the host: Lenovo_test vSwitch0 VM Network vSwitch0 Management Network vSwitch0 Lenovo_Default vSwitch1 Lenovo_test30 vSwitch1 Lenovo_test40 vSwitch1 VM Network 2 vSwitch1 Lenovo_test50 vSwitch1 Lenovo_unu vSwitch1 Detailed information about host and VM interfaces on this hypervisor: MAC Address 5c:f3:fc:49:f0:e6 Port N/A Type VM Kernel IP Address 10.241.32.131 Host Name 10.241.32.131 Host UUID cab9df068fd73ecfa4baf373ed60ad9d vSwitch vSwitch0 Port Group Management Network VLAN ID 0 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 164 VMware VM Information The following command displays information for a specific Virtual Machine (VM): show virt vmware showvm {<VM UUID>|<VM IP address>|<VM name>} Command mode: All MAC Address 00:50:56:a5:32:f7 Port 23 Type Virtual Machine VM vCenter Name arch131_nfs_3 VM OS hostname Not Available VM IP Address 3.3.3.2 VM UUID 422547ad0ef75992118463aa9030377e Current VM Host 10.241.32.131 vSwitch vSwitch1 Port Group Lenovo_Default VLAN ID 0 The following command displays the UUIDs and the names of all the VMware VMs: show virt vmware vms Command mode: All Rescanning data center. Please wait. UUID Name(s), IP Address 42312c262a75c05beed26d837ac46fdd SNSC 4225801cdfdb061d65e44e4860d6fbcf arch2_06 422534406de774168a29fb462114ead0 arch2_05 422f49dfbf88e4d56cee047a626029aa arch2_4_clone 4225a4f23422038f77b56134f5fd00b6 arch_clone 422fddf6b9c3fb529eedfb7ccab48ab8 WIN_iperf 422573e7f2a1373a87ec7f78d8313cca linux 422f08f6c3b1a641a44af2698a850f3c IxVM008, localhost, 10.241.30.208 422f15d25e6e88ef689e9af8e4c69c34 IxVM007, localhost, 10.241.30.207 422f54d355b53731e8f162abac8a0911 IxVM006, localhost, 10.241.30.206 422f42d0329eaec299c82724aa26db7a IxVM005, localhost, 10.241.30.205 VMware VM information includes the following: UUID associated with the VMware VM.   Name or IP address of the VMware VM. ESX Server - Switchport Mapping The following command displays ESX Server ‐ switchport mapping: show virt vmware switchportmapping...
Page 165: Virtual Nic (Vnic) Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage show vnic Displays the current vNIC settings. For a sample output, see page 166. Command mode: All show vnic vnic [all] Displays information about each vNIC. The all option displays information about all the vNICs. For a sample output, see page 166, Command mode: All show vnic vnicgroup [<1‐32>] Displays information about each vNIC Group, including: Status (enabled or disabled)  VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group  Uplink Failover status (enabled or disabled)  Link status for each vNIC (up, down or disabled)  Port link status for each port associated with the vNIC Group (up, down or  disabled) For a sample output, see page 167. Command mode: All show vnic informationdump Displays all vNIC information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 166: Vnic Information
vNIC Information The following command displays the current Virtual NIC (vNIC) parameters: show vnic Command mode: All Current Settings for vNIC Feature: State: On vNICs: 11.1 : Enabled, Max Bandwidth (increments of 100Mbps) 25 vNIC Group 32: Enabled, VLAN 32 vNICs: 11.1 Ports: empty Uplink Port: 20 Uplink failover: Enabled The following command displays Virtual NIC information: show vnic vnic [all] Command mode: All vNIC vNICGroup Vlan MaxBandwidth Type MACAddress Link 1.1 10 10 25 default none down 50.2 4 44 25 default 00:00:c9:93:d2:07 up 53.1 # * 10 default none disabled 53.4 4 44 25 default 00:00:c9:93:d5:03 up # = Not added to any vNIC group * = Not added to any vNIC group or no vlan set for its vNIC group vNIC information includes the following for each vNIC:  vNIC ID  vNIC Group that contains the vNIC  VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group  Maximum bandwidth allocated to the vNIC  vNIC type (default or FCoE)  MAC address of the vNIC, if applicable ...
Page 167: Vnic Group Information
Command mode: All vNIC Group 1: enabled VLAN : 3001 Failover : enabled vNIC Link 1.1 up 7.1 up 8.1 down 9.1 up 10.1 up Port Link 2 up UplinkPort Link 10 up vNIC Group information includes the following for each vNIC Group:  Status (enabled or disabled)  VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group  Uplink Failover status (enabled or disabled)  Link status for each vNIC (up, down or disabled)  Port link status for each port associated with the vNIC Group (up, down or disabled) © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 168: Evb Information
EVB Information The following commands display Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) Virtual Station Interface (VDP) discovery and configuration information. Table 74. EVB Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show virt evb profile Displays all EVB profile parameters. Command mode: All show virt evb profile <profile number> [ports] Displays the selected EVB profile parameters. It can include ports. Command mode: All show virt evb profile ports Displays all EVB profile parameters including ports. Command mode: All show virt evb vdp tlv Displays all active Virtual Station Interface (VSI) Discovery and Configuration Protocol (VDP) type‐length‐values (TLVs). Command mode: All show virt evb vdp vm Displays all associated Virtual Machines (VMs). For a sample output, see page 170. Command mode: All show virt evb vsidb <VSI database number (1)> Displays Virtual Station Interface database information. Command mode: All show virt evb vsitypes [mgrid <0‐255>|typeid <1‐16777215>| |version <0‐255>] Displays the current Virtual Station Interface Type database parameters. For a sample output, see page 169. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 169: Evb Vsitype Information
ACL Index: 1 SRC MAC : 00:00:00:00:00:00 SRC MAC MASK : 00:00:00:00:00:00 DST MAC : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff DST MAC MASK : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff VLAN : 0 (0x000) Ether Type : 0x0800 (IPv4) SRC IP : 0.0.0.0 SRC IP MASK : 0.0.0.0 DST IP : 0.0.0.0 DST IP MASK : 0.0.0.0 TOS : 0 (0x00) ACL Action : deny ACL Index: 2 SRC MAC : 00:00:00:00:00:00 SRC MAC MASK : 00:00:00:00:00:00 DST MAC : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff DST MAC MASK : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff VLAN : 0 (0x000) Ether Type : 0x0000 ACL Action : permit INDEX : 2 Name : Type ID : 20 Version : 1 Manager ID : 1 VLAN : 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 TxRate : 10000000 TxBurst : 64 RxRate : 10000000 RxBurst : 64 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 170: Evb Vms Information
ACL Index: 1 SRC MAC : 00:00:00:00:00:00 SRC MAC MASK : 00:00:00:00:00:00 DST MAC : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff DST MAC MASK : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff VLAN : 0 (0x000) Ether Type : 0x0800 (IPv4) SRC IP : 0.0.0.0 SRC IP MASK : 0.0.0.0 DST IP : 0.0.0.0 DST IP MASK : 0.0.0.0 TOS : 0 (0x00) ACL Action : deny ACL Index: 2 SRC MAC : 00:00:00:00:00:00 SRC MAC MASK : 00:00:00:00:00:00 DST MAC : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff DST MAC MASK : ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff VLAN : 0 (0x000) Ether Type : 0x0000 ACL Action : permit EVB VMs Information The following command displays all active VMs: show virt evb vdp vm Command mode: All Total number of VM Association entries : 2 TypeId MAC Vlan Port TxACL RxEntry ACLs 9 00:50:56:95:30:ec 50 13.1 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 70 00:50:56:a5:6e:e7 70 13.1 232 226 227 228 229 230 231 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 171: Converged Enhanced Ethernet Information
Converged Enhanced Ethernet Information The following table describes the Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) information options. Table 75. CEE Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show cee global {ets|pfc} [information| |prioritygroup <0‐7, 15>] Displays the current global ETS or PFC parameters. information displays global information  prioritygroup displays the current global Priority Group parameters  Command mode: All show cee information Displays all CEE information. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> Displays all DCBX information for the specified port or range of ports. Command mode: All show cee information pfc port <port alias or number> Displays all PFC information for the specified port or range of ports. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 172: Dcbx Information
DCBX Information The following table describes the Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange (DCBX) protocol information options. Table 76. DCBX Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> Displays all DCBX information for the specified port or range of ports. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> app_proto Displays information about the DCBX Application Protocol state machine on the specified port or range of ports. For details, see page 179. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> control Displays information about the DCBX Control state machine for the specified port or range of ports. For details, see page 173. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> ets Displays information about the DCBX ETS state machine for the specified port or range of ports. For details, see page 176. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> feature Displays information about the DCBX Feature state machine for the specified port or range of ports. For details, see page 174. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> pfc Displays information about the DCBX PFC state machine for the specified port or range of ports. For details, see page 178. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 173: Dcbx Control Information
2 2 enabled 0 0 0 0 3 3 enabled 0 0 0 0 4 4 enabled 0 0 2 0 5 5 enabled 0 0 0 0 9 9 enabled 0 0 0 0 13 13 enabled 0 0 0 0 14 14 enabled 0 0 0 0 15 15 enabled 0 0 0 0 16 16 enabled 0 0 0 0 17 17 enabled 0 0 0 0 18 18 enabled 0 0 0 0 19 19 enabled 0 0 0 0 20 20 enabled 0 0 0 0 21 21 enabled 0 0 0 0 22 22 enabled 0 0 0 0 23 23 enabled 0 0 0 0 24 24 enabled 0 0 0 0 DCBX Control information includes the following:  Port alias and number DCBX status (enabled or disabled)   Operating version negotiated with the peer device Maximum operating version supported by the system   Sequence number that changes each time a DCBX parameter in one or more DCB feature TLVs changes  Sequence number of the most recent DCB feature TLV that has been acknowledged © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 174: Dcbx Feature Information
DCBX Feature Information The following command displays DCBX Feature information: show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> feature Command mode: All DCBX Port Feature Statemachine Info ================================================================================== Alias Port Type AdmState Will Advrt OpVer MxVer PrWill SeqNo Err OperMode Syncd 1 1 ETS enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 1 1 PFC enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 1 1 AppProt disabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 2 2 ETS enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 2 2 PFC enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 2 2 AppProt disabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 3 3 ETS enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 3 3 PFC enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 3 3 AppProt disabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 4 4 ETS enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 4 4 PFC enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 4 4 AppProt disabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 5 5 ETS enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 5 5 PFC enabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No 5 5 AppProt disabled No Yes 0 0 No 1 No disabled No The following table describes the DCBX Feature information. Table 77. DCBX Feature Information Fields Parameter Description Alias Displays each port’s alias. Port Displays each port’s number. Type Feature type AdmState Feature status (Enabled or Disabled) Will Willing flag status (Yes/True or No/Untrue)
Page 175 Table 77. DCBX Feature Information Fields Parameter Description OperMode Operating status negotiated with the peer device (enabled or disabled) Syncd Synchronization status between this port and the peer (Yes or © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 176: Dcbx Ets Information
DCBX ETS Information The following command displays DCBX ETS information: show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> ets Command mode: All DCBX Port Priority Group Priority Allocation Table ==================================================== Alias Port Priority PgIdDes PgIdOper PgIdPeer 2 2 0 PGID0 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 1 PGID0 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 2 PGID0 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 3 PGID1 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 4 PGID2 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 5 PGID2 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 6 PGID2 PGID0 PGID0 2 2 7 PGID2 PGID0 PGID0 DCBX Port Priority Group Bandwidth Allocation Table ===================================================== Alias Port PrioGrp BwDes BwOper BwPeer 2 2 0 10 10 50 2 2 1 50 50 50 2 2 2 40 40 0 The following table describes the DCBX ETS information. Table 78. DCBX Feature Information Fields Parameter Description DCBX Port Priority Group ‐ Priority Allocation Table Alias Displays each port’s alias Port Displays each port’s number Priority Displays each port’s priority PgIdDes Priority Group ID configured on this switch PgIdOper...
Page 177 Table 78. DCBX Feature Information Fields (continued) Parameter Description DCBX Port Priority Group ‐ Bandwidth Allocation Table Alias Displays each port’s alias Port Displays each port’s number PrioGrp Displays each port’s priority group BwDes Bandwidth allocation configured on this switch BwOper Bandwidth allocation negotiated with the peer (operating bandwidth) BwPeer Bandwidth allocation configured on the peer © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 178: Dcbx Pfc Information
DCBX PFC Information The following command displays DCBX Priority Flow Control (PFC) information: show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> pfc Command mode: All DCBX Port Priority Flow Control Table ===================================== Alias Port Priority EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer 2 2 0 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 1 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 2 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 3 enabled disabled disabled 2 2 4 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 5 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 6 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 7 disabled disabled disabled DCBX PFC information includes the following: Port alias and number   802.1p value EnableDesr: Status configured on this switch   EnableOper: Status negotiated with the peer (operating status) EnablePeer: Status configured on the peer  G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 179: Dcbx Application Protocol Information
DCBX Application Protocol Table =============================== FCoE Priority Information ========================= Protocol ID : 0x8906 Selector Field : 0 Organizationally Unique ID: 0x1b21 Alias Port Priority EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer 2 2 0 enabled enabled enabled 2 2 1 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 2 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 3 enabled enabled enabled 2 2 4 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 5 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 6 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 7 disabled disabled disabled FIP Snooping Priority Information ================================= Protocol ID : 0x8914 Selector Field : 0 Organizationally Unique ID: 0x1b21 Alias Port Priority EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer 2 2 0 enabled enabled enabled 2 2 1 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 2 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 3 enabled enabled enabled 2 2 4 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 5 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 6 disabled disabled disabled 2 2 7 disabled disabled disabled © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 180 The following table describes the DCBX Application Protocol information. Table 79. DCBX Application Protocol Information Fields Parameter Description Protocol ID Identifies the supported Application Protocol. Selector Field Specifies the Application Protocol type, as follows:  0 = Ethernet Type  1 = TCP socket ID Organizationally Unique DCBX TLV identifier Alias Port alias Port Port number Priority 802.1p value EnableDesr Status configured on this switch EnableOper Status negotiated with the peer (operating status) EnablePeer Status configured on the peer G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 181: Ets Information
Displays global ETS information. Command mode: All The following command displays ETS information: show cee global ets information Command mode: All Global ETS information: Number of COSq: 8 Mapping of 802.1p Priority to Priority Groups: Priority PGID COSq 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 1 1 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 7 2 2 Bandwidth Allocation to Priority Groups: PGID PG% Description 0 10 1 50 2 40 Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) information includes the following:  Number of Class of Service queues (COSq) configured  802.1p mapping to Priority Groups and Class of Service queues  Bandwidth allocated to each Priority Group © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 182: Pfc Information
PFC Information The following table describes the Priority Flow Control (PFC) information options. Table 81. PFC Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show cee port <port alias or number> pfc Displays PFC information. Command mode: All show cee port <port alias or number> pfc information Displays PFC information. Command mode: All show cee port <port alias or number> pfc priority <0‐7> Displays PFC information. Command mode: All The following command displays PFC information: show cee port <port alias or number> pfc information Command mode: All PFC information for Port 1: PFC ON Priority State Description 0 Dis 1 Dis 2 Dis 3 Ena 4 Dis 5 Dis 6 Dis 7 Dis State indicates whether PFC is Enabled/Disabled on a particular priority G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 183: Fcoe Initialization Protocol Snooping Information
FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping Information The following table describes the FIP Snooping information options. Table 82. FIP Snooping Information Options Command Syntax and Usage show fcoe fips fcf Displays FCF learned (detected). Command mode: All show fcoe fips fcoe Displays FCoE connections learned (detected). Command mode: All show fcoe fips information Displays FIP Snooping information for all ports. Command mode: All show fcoe fips port <port alias or number> [information] Displays FIP Snooping (FIPS) information for the specified port or ports, including a list of current FIPS ACLs. Command mode: All show fcoe fips vlans Displays VLAN information. Command mode: All show fcoe information Displays all current FCoE information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 184: Fip Snooping Fcoe Forwarder Information
FIP Snooping FCoE Forwarder Information The following command shows FCoE forwarder (FCF) information that has been learned (detected) by the switch: show fcoe fips fcf Command mode: All Total number of FCFs detected: 0 The following command displays FIP Snooping information for the selected port: show fcoe fips port <port alias or number> information Command mode: All FIP Snooping on port INT2: This port has been configured to automatically detect FCF. It has currently detected to have 0 FCF connecting to it. FIPS ACLs configured on this port: SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6f, action deny. SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:70, action deny. SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, action deny. SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6e, action deny. DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6f, ethertype 0x8914, action permit. DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:70, ethertype 0x8914, action permit. DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, ethertype 0x8914, action permit. DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6e, ethertype 0x8914, action permit. SMAC 0e:fc:00:01:0a:00, DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, ethertype 0x8906, vlan 1002, action permit. DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:01, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit. DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:02, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit. Ethertype 0x8914, action deny. Ethertype 0x8906, action deny. SMAC 0e:fc:00:00:00:00, SMAC mask ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, action deny. FIP Snooping port information includes the following: Fibre Channel Forwarding (FCF) mode   Number of FCF links connected to the port List of FIP Snooping ACLs assigned to the port  G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 185: Fibre Channel Information
Command mode: All show fcalias Displays the current FC alias ‐ PWWN (port World Wide Name) mapping. Command mode: All show fcdomain Displays the current configuration of FC domains. Command mode: All show fcns database Displays FC name server database information. For details, see page 187. Command mode: All show fdmi database Displays fibre channel management interface database information. Command mode: All show fcs database Displays fabric configuration status database information. For details, see page 188. Command mode: All show fcoe database Displays Fibre Channel over Ethernet database information. Command mode: All show fcf Displays Fibre Channel forwarding information. For details, see page 188. Command mode: All show npv status Displays N_Port Virtualization information. Command mode: All show npv flogitable Displays the contents of the NPV fabric login table. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 186 Table 83. Fibre Channel Information Commands Command Syntax and Usage show npv trafficmap Displays NPV source‐destination traffic mapping. For details, see page 189. Command mode: All show npv autodisruptiveloadbalance [<switch_number>] Displays all VLANs that have automated disruptive load balance enabled. Command mode: All show zone Lists all FC zones. Command mode: All show zone status Displays FC zone status information. For details, see page 189. Command mode: All show zone name <zone name> Displays information for the specified FC zone. Command mode: All show zoneset Lists all FC zonesets. Command mode: All show zoneset name <zoneset name> Displays information for the specified FC zoneset. Command mode: All show zoneset active Displays the currently active FC zoneset. Command mode: All show interface fc information Displays FC port information. For details, see page 190. Command mode: All show interface fc port <port alias or number> Displays FC information for the specified ports.
Page 187: Fabric Login Database Information
Command mode: All Port FCID PortWWN NodeWWN 1 010c00 20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00 20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00 2 010c01 20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00 20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00 Total number of entries = 2 Fibre Channel Name Server Database Information The following command displays information about the FC name server database: show fcns database Command mode: All FCID TYPE PWWN 010100 N 20:02:00:11:0d:8a:10:00 010400 N 20:3a:00:80:e5:2d:1a:30 010c00 N 10:00:00:00:27:1a:13:f0 010c01 N 10:00:00:00:27:1a:13:f7 010c02 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:5d 010c03 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:3f 010c04 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:44 010c05 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:34 010c06 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:23 010c07 N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:8e:18 01140d N 10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:4a Total number of entries = 72 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 188: Fabric Configuration Status Database Information
Fabric Configuration Status Database Information The following command displays information about the fabric configuration: show fcs database Command mode: All Fabric Name : 10:00:74:99:75:22:48:00 Switch Domain Id : 1 Switch Mgmt Id : 010000 Switch WWN : 10:00:74:99:75:22:48:00 Switch Ports: Port PWWN 55 20:02:74:99:75:22:48:00 63 00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00 64 00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00 Fibre Channel Forwarding Information The following command displays information about Fibre Channel forwarding: show fcf Command mode: All FCF:1 in VLAN: 1002 NPVGw FCMAP : 0x0efc00 Priority : 128 FKAAdv : 8 FC Port : 55 60 63 64 ==================================================== FCF:2 in VLAN: 1003 NPVGw FCMAP : 0x0efc01 Priority : 128 FKAAdv : 8 FC Port : 56 59 ...
Page 189: Npv Traffic Information
NPV Traffic Information The following command displays information about NPV source‐destination traffic mapping: show npv trafficmapping Command mode: All VLAN Source Ports NPUplink Dest Ports 1002 55,60,63,64 1003 56,59 Zone Status Information The following command displays status information about FC zones: show zone status Command mode: All DefaultZone : Permit FC Zoning Limits : MAX ZONES per ZONESET : 64 MAX MEMBERS per ZONE : 20 MAX ZONESETS : 4 MAX ZONES : 200 MAX ALIASES : 200 MAX MEMBERS : 1000 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 190: Fc Port Information
FC Port Information The following command displays information about FC ports: show interface fc information Command mode: All Alias Port Admin Oper Login Config Running Link Link State State Status Type Type Status Speed 53 53 Online Online LoggedIn F F Active 4Gb/s 54 54 Online Offline NotLoggedIn F F Active 4Gb/s 55 55 Online Offline NotLoggedIn F Unknown Inactive Unknown 56 56 Online Offline NotLoggedIn F Unknown Inactive Unknown 57 57 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 58 58 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 59 59 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 60 60 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 61 61 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 62 62 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 63 63 Down Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown 64 64 Online Downed NotLoggedIn Eth Eth Inactive Unknown Fibre Channel port information includes the following: Table 84. Fibre Channel Port Information Descriptions Parameter Description Alias Port alias Port Port number Admin State Configured state of the port (online, offline, or down) Oper State Current operational state of the port (online, offline, or downed) Login Status Login status of the port on the FC fabric (LoggedIn or NotLoggedIn) Config Type Configured FC port type, as follows: E (Expansion port) **not supported ...
Page 191 Command mode: All Port Number: 53 AdminState Online ConfigType F EPortIsolationReason NotApplicable LinkSpeed Auto LinkState Inactive LoginStatus NotLoggedIn OperationalState Offline RunningType Unkn Port Number: 54 AdminState Online ConfigType F EPortIsolationReason NotApplicable LinkSpeed Auto LinkState Inactive LoginStatus NotLoggedIn OperationalState Offline RunningType Unkn Port Number: 55 AdminState Online ConfigType Eth EPortIsolationReason NotApplicable LinkSpeed 10000 LinkState Inactive LoginStatus NotLoggedIn OperationalState Offline RunningType Eth © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 2: Information Commands...
Page 192: Information Dump
Information Dump The following command dumps switch information: show informationdump Command mode: All Use the dump command to dump all switch information available (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 193: Chapter 3. Statistics Commands
Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show counters Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 295. Command mode: All show layer3 counters Displays Layer 3 statistics. Command mode: All show ntp counters Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 293 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. Command mode: All show snmpserver counters Displays SNMP statistics. See page 289 for sample output. Command mode: All clear cpu Clears all CPU utilization statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear counters Clears all statistics for all interfaces. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear interface port <port alias or number> counters Clears all statistics for the specified port. Command mode: All clear mpcounters Clears all MP‐related statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 194: Port Statistics
Port Statistics These commands display traffic statistics on a port‐by‐port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. Table 86. Port Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show interface port <port alias or number> bitrateusage Displays the traffic rate in kilobits per second. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> bridgingcounters Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 201 for sample output. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> bridgingrate Displays per‐second bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> egressqueuecounters [<queue number (0‐7)>|drop] Displays the total number of packets and bytes either successfully transmitted or dropped for each queue of the specified ports. queue number filters the output to the specified queue number  drop lists only the queues with dropped traffic (non‐zero counters for  dropped packets/bytes counters) See page 212 for sample output. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> egressqueuerate [<queue number (0‐7)>|drop] Displays the number of packets and bytes per second either successfully transmitted or dropped for each queue of the specified ports. queue number filters the output to the specified queue number  drop lists only the queues with dropped traffic (non‐zero rates for dropped ...
Page 195 Displays per‐second interface statistics for the port. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> linkcounters Displays link statistics for the port. See page 208 for sample output. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> oam counters Displays Operation, Administrative, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol statistics for the port. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> rmoncounters Displays Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 209 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip bootprelay counters interface <port alias or number> Displays BOOTP relay statistics for the port. See page 200 for sample output. Command mode: All clear counters Clears statistics for all ports. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear interface port <port alias or number> counters Clears all statistics for the port. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear interface port <port alias or number> egressqueuecounter Clears all QoS egress counters for the specified ports for all queues. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip bootprelay counters [interface <port alias or number>] Clears BOOTP relay statistics for a specific ports or all ports. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 196: X Authenticator Statistics
802.1X Authenticator Statistics Use the following command to display the 802.1X authenticator statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> dot1x counters Command mode: All Authenticator Statistics: eapolFramesRx = 925 eapolFramesTx = 3201 eapolStartFramesRx = 2 eapolLogoffFramesRx = 0 eapolRespIdFramesRx = 463 eapolRespFramesRx = 460 eapolReqIdFramesTx = 1820 eapolReqFramesTx = 1381 invalidEapolFramesRx = 0 eapLengthErrorFramesRx = 0 lastEapolFrameVersion = 1 lastEapolFrameSource = 00:01:02:45:ac:51 The following table describes the 802.1X authenticator statistics. Table 87. 802.1X Authenticator Statistics of a Port Statistics Description eapolFramesRx Total number of EAPOL frames received eapolFramesTx Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted eapolStartFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Start frames received eapolLogoffFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received eapolRespIdFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received eapolRespFramesRx Total number of Response frames received eapolReqIdFramesTx Total number of Request Identity frames ...
Page 197: X Authenticator Diagnostics
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant = 460 backendAuthSuccesses = 5 backendAuthFails = 458 The following table describes the 802.1X authenticator diagnostics statistics. Table 88. 802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port Statistics Description authEntersConnecting Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state. authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL‐Logoff message. authEntersAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an EAP‐Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant. authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 198 Table 88. 802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (continued) Statistics Description authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout. authFailWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure. authReauthsWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of a re‐authentication request authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL‐Start message being received from the Supplicant. authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL‐Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. authReauthsWhileAuthenticated Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of a re‐authentication request. authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated Total number of times that the state ...
Page 199 Authentication server. Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator. backendOtherRequests Total number of times that the state ToSupplicant machine sends an EAP‐Request packet (other than an Identity, Notification, Failure, or Success message) to the Supplicant. Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP‐method. backendNonNakResponses Total number of times that the state FromSupplicant machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP‐Request, and the response is something other than EAP‐NAK. Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator.s chosen EAP‐method. backendAuthSuccesses Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server. backendAuthFails Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 200: Bootstrap Protocol Relay Statistics
BootStrap Protocol Relay Statistics Use the following command to display the BOOTP Relay statistics of the selected port: show ip bootprelay counters interface <port alias or number> Command mode: All BOOTP Relay statistics for port 1: Requests received from client: 0 Requests relayed to server: 0 Requests relayed with option 82: 0 Requests dropped due to ... relay not allowed: 0 no server or unreachable server: 0 packet or processing errors: 0 Replies received from server: 0 Replies relayed to client: 0 Replies dropped due to ... packet or processing errors: 0 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 201: Bridging Statistics
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. dot1PortOutFrames The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. dot1PortInDiscards Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. dot1TpLearnedEntry The total number of Forwarding Database entries, Discards which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent. dot1StpPortForward The number of times this port has transitioned from the Transitions Learning state to the Forwarding state. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 202: Ethernet Statistics
Ethernet Statistics Use the following command to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> ethernetcounters Command mode: All Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 The following table describes the ethernet statistics. Table 90. Ethernet Statistics of a Port Statistics Description dot3StatsAlignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. The count represented by an instance of this object is ...
Page 203 The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit‐times into the transmission of a packet. Five hundred and twelve bit‐times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision‐related statistics. dot3StatsExcessive A count of frames for which transmission on a Collisions particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. dot3StatsInternalMac A count of frames for which transmission on a TransmitErrors particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation‐specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 204 Table 90. Ethernet Statistics of a Port (continued) Statistics Description dot3StatsFrameTooLongs A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. dot3StatsInternalMac A count of frames for which reception on a ReceiveErrors particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation‐specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 205: Interface Statistics
NonForwarding State: 0 MMU Aging Discards: 0 IBP/CBP Discards: 0 Other Discards: 0 The following table describes the interface statistics. Table 91. Interface Statistics of a Port Statistics Description ifInOctets The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. ifInUcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub‐layer to a higher sub‐ layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub‐layer. ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub‐layer to a higher sub‐ layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub‐layer. ifInMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher‐level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. ifInFlowControlPkts The total number of flow control pause packets received on the interface. ifInPriFlowControlPkts The total number of priority flow control pause packets received on the interface. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 206 Table 91. Interface Statistics of a Port (continued) Statistics Description ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher‐layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. ifInErrors For packet‐oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher‐layer protocol. For character‐oriented or fixed‐length interfaces, the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher‐layer protocol. ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. ifOutUcastPkts The total number of packets that higher‐level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher‐level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed toa broadcast address at this sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64‐bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts. ifOutMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher‐level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. This object is a 64‐bit version of ...
Page 207 Description VLAN Discards Discarded because the packet was tagged with a VLAN to which this port is not a member. Filter Discards Dropped by the Content Aware Engine (user‐configured filter). Policy Discards Dropped due to policy setting. For example, due to a user‐configured static entry. Non‐Forwarding State Discarded because the ingress port is not in the forwarding state. IBP/CBP Discards Discarded because of Ingress Back Pressure (flow control), or because the Common Buffer Pool is full (for example, insufficient packet buffering). HOL‐blocking Dis‐ Discarded because of the Head Of Line (HOL) blocking cards mechanism. Low‐priority packets are placed in a sepa‐ rate queue and can be discarded while applications or the TCP protocol determine whether a retransmission is necessary. HOL blocking forces transmission to stop until the overloaded egress port buffer can receive data again. MMU Discards Discarded because of the Memory Management Unit. Cell Error Discards MMU Aging Discards Other Discards Discarded packets not included in any category. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 208: Interface Protocol Statistics
Interface Protocol Statistics Use the following command to display the interface protocol statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> ipcounters Command mode: All GEA IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives : 0 ipInHeaderError: 0 ipInDiscards : 0 The following table describes the interface protocol statistics. Table 92. Interface Protocol Statistics of a Port Statistics Description ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error. ipInHeaderErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly. Link Statistics Use the following command to display the link statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> linkcounters Command mode: All Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 1 The following table describes the link statistics. ...
Page 209: Rmon Statistics
The following table describes the RMON statistics. Table 94. RMON Statistics of a Port Statistics Description etherStatsDropEvents The total number of packets received that were dropped because of system resource constraints. etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received. etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 210 Table 94. RMON Statistics of a Port (continued) Statistics Description etherStatsCRCAlignErrors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non‐integral number of octets (Alignment Error). etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. etherStatsFragments The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non‐integral number of octets (Alignment Error). etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non‐integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Jabber is defined as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. ...
Page 211 Table 94. RMON Statistics of a Port (continued) Statistics Description etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts256to511Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts512to1023 The total number of packets (including bad Octets packets) received that were greater than 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts1024to1518 The total number of packets (including bad Octets packets) received that were greater than 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 212: Qos Queue Counter‐Based Statistics
QoS Queue Counter-Based Statistics Use the following command to display the counter‐based QoS queue statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> egressqueuecounters Command mode: All QoS statistics for port 1: QoS Queue 0: Tx Packets: 31 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 10444 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 1: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 2: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 3: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 7: Tx Packets: 900 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 64320 Dropped Bytes: 0 The following table describes the counter‐based QoS queue statistics. Table 95. QoS Queue Counter‐Based Statistics of a Port Statistics Description Tx Packets Total number of successfully transmitted ...
Page 213: Qos Queue Rate‐Based Statistics
Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 3: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 7: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 The following table describes the rate‐based QoS queue statistics. Table 96. QoS Queue Rate‐Based Statistics of a Port Statistics Description Tx Packets Number of successfully transmitted packets per second for the QoS queue Dropped Packets Number of dropped packets per second for the QoS queue Tx Bytes Number of successfully transmitted bytes per second for the QoS queue Dropped Bytes Number of dropped bytes per second for the QoS queue © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 214: Multicast Qos Queue Counter‐Based Statistics
Multicast QoS Queue Counter-Based Statistics Use the following command to display the counter‐based multicast QoS queue statistics of the selected port: show interface port <port alias or number> egressmcastqueue counters Command mode: All Multicast QoS statistics for port 1: QoS Queue 8: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 9: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 10: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 11: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 The following table describes the counter‐based multicast QoS queue statistics. Table 97. Multicast QoS Queue Counter‐Based Statistics of a Port Statistics Description Tx Packets Total number of successfully transmitted packets for the multicast QoS queue Dropped Packets Total number of dropped packets for the ...
Page 215: Multicast Qos Queue Rate‐Based Statistics
Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 10: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 QoS Queue 11: Tx Packets: 0 Dropped Packets: 0 Tx Bytes: 0 Dropped Bytes: 0 The following table describes the rate‐based multicast QoS queue statistics. Table 98. Multicast QoS Queue Rate‐Based Statistics of a Port Statistics Description Tx Packets Number of successfully transmitted packets per second for the multicast QoS queue Dropped Packets Number of dropped packets per second for the multicast QoS queue Tx Bytes Number of successfully transmitted bytes per second for the multicast QoS queue Dropped Bytes Number of dropped bytes per second for the multicast QoS queue © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 216: Link Aggregation Group (Lag) Statistics
Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Statistics The following commands display Link Aggregation Group (LAG) statistics: Table 99. LAG Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show interface portchannel <1‐128> interfacecounters Displays interface statistics for the LAG. Command mode: All clear interface portchannel <1‐128> counters Clears all the statistics on the selected LAG. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 217: Layer 2 Statistics
Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> lacp counters Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics. See page 221 for sample output. Command mode: All show interface port <port alias or number> lldp counters Displays LLDP statistics. See page 223 for sample output. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters Displays FDB statistics. See page 220 for sample output. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters all Displays all FDB statistics for all FDB entries. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters interface port <port alias or number> Displays FDB statistics for a particular port. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters portchannel <1‐128> Displays all FDB statistics for a particular Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters state {unknown|forward| |trunk} Displays all FDB statistics for a particular state. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters static Displays all FDB statistics for all static FDB entries. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 218 Table 100. Layer 2 Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show macaddresstable counters unicast Displays all FDB statistics for all Unicast FDB entries. Command mode: All show macaddresstable counters vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all FDB statistics on a single VLAN. Command mode: All show oam counters Displays OAM statistics. See page 225 for sample output. Command mode: All show spanningtree statistics Displays all Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) statistics. See page 224 for sample output. Command mode: All show spanningtree statistics port <port alias or number> Displays STP statistics for the specified port. See page 224 for sample output. Command mode: All show spanningtree statistics stp <1‐128> Displays STP statistics for the specified Spanning Tree Group (STG). See page 224 for sample output. Command mode: All show vlag statistics Displays all vLAG statistics. See page 226 for sample output. Command mode: All clear hotlinks Clears all Hot Links statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear interface port <port alias or number> lacp counters Clears Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics.
Page 219 Table 100. Layer 2 Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage clear spanningtree statistics Clears all STP statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear vlag statistics Clears all vLAG statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 220: Fdb Statistics
FDB Statistics Use the following command to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database, including the number of new entries, finds, and unsuccessful searches: show macaddresstable counters Command mode: All FDB statistics: current: 83 hiwat: 855 FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 101. Forwarding Database Statistics Statistic Description current Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. hiwat Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 221: Lacp Statistics
Table 102. LACP Statistics Statistic Description Valid LACPDUs Total number of valid LACP data units received. received Valid Marker PDUs Total number of valid LACP marker data units received. received Valid Marker Rsp Total number of valid LACP marker response data units PDUs received received. Unknown Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version/TLV type version or type, length, and value (TLV) received. Illegal subtype Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received received. LACPDUs Total number of LACP data units transmitted. transmitted Marker PDUs Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted. transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted transmitted. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 222: Hotlinks Statistics
Hotlinks Statistics Use the following command to display statistics: Hot Links show hotlinks counters Command mode: All Hot Links Trigger Stats: Trigger 1 statistics: Trigger Name: Trigger 1 Master active: 0 Backup active: 0 FDB update: 0 failed: 0 The following table describes the Hotlinks statistics: Table 103. Hotlinks Statistics Statistic Description Master active Total number of times the Master interface transitioned to the Active state. Backup active Total number of times the Backup interface transitioned to the Active state. FDB update Total number of FDB update requests sent. failed Total number of FDB update requests that failed. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 223: Lldp Port Statistics
LLDP Port 1 Statistics Frames Transmitted : 0 Frames Received : 0 Frames Received in Errors : 0 Frames Discarded : 0 TLVs Unrecognized : 0 Neighbors Aged Out : 0 The following table describes the LLDP port statistics: Table 104. LLDP port Statistics Statistic Description Frames Total number of LLDP frames transmitted. Transmitted Frames Received Total number of LLDP frames received. Frames Received Total number of LLDP frames that had errors. in Errors Frames Total number of LLDP frames discarded. Discarded TLVs Total number of unrecognized TLV (Type, Length, and Unrecognized Value) fields received. Neighbors Aged Total number of neighbor devices that have had their LLDP information aged out. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 224: Spanning Tree Statistics
Spanning Tree Statistics Use the following command to display Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) statistics: show spanningtree statistics Command mode: All Spanningtree group: 1 Port RxBpdu TxBpdu RxTCN LastTCNRx TxTCN LastTCNTx 17 28 212246 22 13:53:41 7152016 210286 11:35:54 7202016 18 13 212244 7 13:53:18 7152016 210289 11:35:54 7202016 20 212328 210259 181570 11:35:55 7202016 210257 11:35:54 7202016 21 212326 2 210366 11:35:54 7202016 1 13:33:07 7152016 22 238753 423006 204170 11:35:54 7202016 420536 11:35:54 7202016 23 232365 423004 204612 11:35:54 7202016 420530 11:35:54 7202016 24 240073 423000 199662 11:35:53 7202016 420528 11:35:54 7202016 Spanningtree group: 23 Port RxBpdu TxBpdu RxTCN LastTCNRx TxTCN LastTCNTx 11 39 211499 5 14:01:02 7152016 101 2:11:41 7202016 12 36 211499 2 13:53:06 7152016 104 2:11:41 7202016 13 36 211497 2 13:53:06 7152016 104 2:11:41 7202016 14 36 211481 2 13:53:06 7152016 104 2:11:41 7202016 15 36 211497 2 13:53:06 7152016 104 2:11:41 7202016 Use the following command to display STP statistics for a specific port: show spanningtree statistics port <port alias or number> Command mode: All Port: 17 stg RxBpdu TxBpdu RxTCN LastTCNRx TxTCN LastTCNTx 1 28 212329 22 13:53:41 7152016 210369 11:38:41 7202016 Dropped Bpdu counter: 28 Use the following command to display STP statistics for a specific Spanning Tree Group (STG): show spanningtree statistics stp <1‐128> Command mode: All Spanningtree group: 1 Port RxBpdu TxBpdu RxTCN LastTCNRx TxTCN LastTCNTx ...
Page 225 Use the following command to display OAM statistics: show oam counters Command mode: All OAM statistics on port 1 Information OAMPDU Tx : 0 Information OAMPDU Rx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Local faults 0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps Remote faults 0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps OAM statistics include the following:  Total number of OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU) transmitted and received.  Total number of unsupported OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU) transmitted and received.  Local faults detected. Remote faults detected.  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 226 vLAG Statistics The following table describes the vLAG statistics commands: Table 105. vLAG Statistics Options Command Syntax and Usage show vlag statistics Displays all vLAG statistics. See page 226 for sample output. Command mode: All show vlag islstatistics Displays vLAG ISL statistics for the selected port. See page 227 for sample output. Command mode: All clear vlag statistics Clears all vLAG statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC Use the following command to display vLAG statistics: show vlag statistics Command mode: All vLAG PDU sent: Role Election: 10 System Info: 7 Peer Instance Enable: 624 Peer Instance Disable: 52 FDB Dynamic Add: 166079 FDB Dynamic Del: 33856 FDB Inactive Add: 0 FDB Inactive Del: 0 Health Check: 4665 ISL Hello: 2126 Other: 0 Unknown: 0 vLAG PDU received: Role Election: 11 System Info: 6 Peer Instance Enable: 572 Peer Instance Disable: 52 FDB Dynamic Add: 122523 FDB Dynamic Del: 38991 FDB Inactive Add: 7200 FDB Inactive Del: 0 Health Check: 4656 ISL Hello: 2114 Other: 0 Unknown: 0 vLAG IGMP packets forwarded: IGMP Reports: 0...
Page 227 FDB Inactive Add Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for addition of FDB inactive entry. FDB Inactive Del Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for deletion of FDB inactive entry. Health Check Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for health checks. ISL Hello Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for ISL hello. Other Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for other reasons. Unknown Total number of vLAG PDUs sent/received for unknown operations. vLAG ISL Statistics Use the following command to display vLAG statistics: show vlag islstatistics Command mode: All In Counter Out Counter Octets: 2755820 2288 Packets: 21044 26 ISL statistics include the total number of octets received/transmitted, and the total number of packets received/transmitted over the Inter‐Switch Link (ISL). © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 228: Layer 3 Statistics
Layer 3 Statistics The following commands display Layer 3 statistics: Table 107. Layer 3 Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show [ip] arp counters Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 242 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip arp inspection statistics [vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Displays Dynamic ARP Inspection statistics. See page 242 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip counters Displays Internet Protocol (IP) statistics. See page 233 for sample output. Command mode: All show ipv6 counters Displays Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) statistics. See page 235 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip dhcp snooping counters Displays Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) Snooping statistics. Command mode: All show ip dns counters Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. See page 243 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip icmp counters Displays Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) statistics. See page 244 for sample output.
Page 229 255 for sample output. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf counters Displays Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) statistics. See page 260 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip pim counters Displays Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) statistics for all configured PIM interfaces. See page 265 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip pim interface {<1‐126>|loopback <1‐5>|port <port alias or number>} counters Displays PIM statistics for the selected interface. Command mode: All show ip pim mroute count Displays statistics of various multicast entry types. Command mode: All show ip policy statistics Displays statistics for the current routing policy. Command mode: All show ip rip counters Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See page 266 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip route counters Displays IPv4 route statistics. See page 240 for sample output. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 230 Table 107. Layer 3 Statistics Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 route counters Displays IPv6 route statistics. See page 241 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip slp counters Displays Service Location Protocol (SLP) statistics. Command mode: All show ip tcp counters Displays Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics. See page 246 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip udp counters Displays User Datagram Protocol (UDP) statistics. See page 248 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip vrrp counters When virtual routers are configured, you can display the protocol statistics for Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP). See page 264 for sample output. Command mode: All show layer3 counters Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. Command mode: All clear ip arp counters Clears Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip arp inspection statistics [vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Clears Dynamic ARP Inspection statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip counters Clears IPv4 statistics. Use this command with caution as it deletes all the IPv4 ...
Page 231 Clears DHCP Snooping statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip dns counters Clears Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip icmp counters Clears Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip igmp [<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] counters Clears all IGMP statistics. The vlan option clears IGMP statistics only for a specific VLAN. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ipv6 mld counters Clears MLD statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ipv6 neighbors counters Clears all IPv6 Neighbor Cache statistics from switch memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip ospf counters Clears Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ipv6 ospf counters Clears Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip pim counters Clears PIM statistics for all interfaces. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip pim interface {<interface number>|loopback|port <port alias or number>} counters Clears PIM statistics on the selected interface. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 232 Table 107. Layer 3 Statistics Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage clear ip rip counters Clears Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip route counters Clears IPv4 route statistics. Command mode: Privleged EXEC clear ipv6 route counters Clears IPv6 route statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip slp counters Clears SLP statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip tcp counters Clears Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip udp counters Clears User Datagram Protocol (UDP) statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear ip vrrp counters Clears VRRP statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 233 The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error. ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time‐to‐live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so forth. ipInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. ipInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly. ipInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user‐protocols (including ICMP). © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 234 Table 108. IPv4 Statistics (continued) Statistics Description ipOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user‐protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. ipOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. ipDefaultTTL The default value inserted into the TimeToLive (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch), whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 235: Ipv6 Statistics
Sent : 19 ICMPMsgs 0 ICMPErrMsgs 0 DstUnReach 0 TimeExcds 0 ParmProbs 0 PktTooBigs 10 EchoReq 9 EchoReply 0 RouterSols 0 RouterAdv 11 NeighSols 5 NeighborAdv 0 RedirectMsgs 0 AdminProhibMsgs UDP statistics ************** Received : 0 UDPDgrams 0 UDPNoPorts 0 UDPErrPkts Sent : 0 UDPDgrams Use the following command to clear IPv6 statistics: clear ipv6 counters Command mode: Privileged EXEC The following table describes the IPv6 statistics. Table 109. IPv6 Statistics Statistic Description Rcvd Number of datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error. HdrErrors Number of datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time‐to‐live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so forth. TooBigErrors The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 236 Table 109. IPv6 Statistics (continued) Statistic Description AddrErrors Number of datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. FwdDgrams Number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets, which were Source‐Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source‐ Route option processing was successful. UnknownProtos Number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. Discards Number of IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly. Delivers Number of datagrams successfully delivered to IP user‐protocols (including ICMP). OutRequests Number of IP datagrams which local IP user‐protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. OutDiscards Number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their ...
Page 237 Description Received ICMPPkts Number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. ICMPErrPkt Number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP‐specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so forth). DestUnreach Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. TimeExcds Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. ParmProbs Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. PktTooBigMsg The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface. ICMPEchoReq Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. ICMPEchoReps Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. RouterSols Number of Router Solicitation messages received by the switch. RouterAdv Number of Router Advertisements received by the switch. NeighSols Number of Neighbor Solicitations received by the switch. NeighAdv Number of Neighbor Advertisements received by the switch. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 238 Table 110. ICMP Statistics Statistic Description Redirects Number of ICMP Redirect messages received. AdminProhib The number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface. ICMPBadCode The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface. Sent ICMPMsgs Number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. ICMPErrMsgs Number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counterʹs value. DstUnReach Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. TimeExcds Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. ParmProbs Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. PktTooBigs The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface. EchoReq Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. EchoReply Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. RouterSols Number of Router Solicitation messages sent by the switch. RouterAdv Number of Router Advertisements sent by the switch.
Page 239 The following table describes the UDP statistics. Table 111. UDP Statistics Statistic Description Received UDPDgrams Number of UDP datagrams received by the switch. UDPNoPorts Number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. UDPErrPkts Number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. Sent UDPDgrams Number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 240 IPv4 Route Statistics The following command displays IPv4 route statistics: show ip route counters Command mode: All Route statistics: Current total outstanding routes : 2 Highest number ever recorded : 2 Current static routes : 0 Current RIP routes : 0 Current OSPF routes : 0 Current BGP routes : 0 Maximum supported routes : 16384 ECMP statistics (active in ASIC): Maximum number of ECMP routes : 16384 Maximum number of static ECMP routes : 128 Number of routes with ECMP paths : 0 The following table describes the IPv4 route statistics. Table 112. IPv4 Route Statistics Statistics Description Current total Total number of outstanding routes in the route table. outstanding routes Highest number ever Highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. recorded Current static routes Total number of static routes in the route table. Current RIP routes Total number of RIP routes in the route table. Current OSPF routes Total number of OSPF routes in the route table. Current BGP routes Total number of BGP routes in the route table. Maximum supported Maximum number of routes that are supported. routes Maximum number of ...
Page 241 ECMP statistics: Maximum number of ECMP routes : 600 Max ECMP paths allowed for one route : 5 Number of routes with ECMP paths : 0 The following table describes the IPv6 route statistics. Table 113. IPv6 Route Statistics Statistics Description ipv6RoutesCur Total number of outstanding routes in the route table. ipv6RoutesHighWater Highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. ipv6RoutesMax Maximum number of routes that are supported. Maximum number of Maximum number of ECMP routes supported. ECMP routes Max ECMP paths Maximum number of ECMP paths supported for each allowed for one route route. Number of routes Current number of routes that contain ECMP paths. with ECMP paths Use the following command to clear all IPv6 route statistics: clear ipv6 route counters Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 242: Arp Statistics
ARP statistics The following command displays Address Resolution Protocol statistics. show [ip] arp counters Command mode: All Mgmt ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 1 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 Data ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 1 arpEntriesHighWater: 1 arpEntriesMax: 16383 The following table describes the ARP statistics. Table 114. ARP Statistics Statistic Description arpEntriesCur The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. arpEntriesHighWater The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. arpEntriesMax The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. The following command displays Dynamic ARP Inspection statistics. show ip arp inspection statistics [vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Command mode: All Vlan Forwarded Dropped 2 100 200 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 243: Dns Statistics
DNS Statistics The following command displays Domain Name System statistics. show ip dns counters Command mode: All DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 dnsBadRequests: 0 The following table describes the DNS statistics. Table 115. DNS Statistics Statistics Description dnsInRequests The total number of DNS response packets that have been received. dnsOutRequests The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. dnsBadRequests The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 244: Icmp Statistics
ICMP Statistics The following command displays ICMP statistics: show ip icmp counters Command mode: All ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: 245802 icmpInErrors: 1393 icmpInDestUnreachs: 41 icmpInTimeExcds: 0 icmpInParmProbs: 0 icmpInSrcQuenchs: 0 icmpInRedirects: 0 icmpInEchos: 18 icmpInEchoReps: 244350 icmpInTimestamps: 0 icmpInTimestampReps: 0 icmpInAddrMasks: 0 icmpInAddrMaskReps: 0 icmpOutMsgs: 253810 icmpOutErrors: 0 icmpOutDestUnreachs: 15 icmpOutTimeExcds: 0 icmpOutParmProbs: 0 icmpOutSrcQuenchs: 0 icmpOutRedirects: 0 icmpOutEchos: 253777 icmpOutEchoReps: 18 icmpOutTimestamps: 0 icmpOutTimestampReps: 0 icmpOutAddrMasks: 0 icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 0 The following table describes the ICMP statistics. Table 116. ICMP Statistics Statistic Description icmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. icmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP‐specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so forth). icmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. icmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. icmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages ...
Page 245 The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. icmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. icmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. icmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages sent. icmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects. icmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. icmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. icmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. icmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. icmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. icmpOutAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 246 TCP Statistics The following command displays TCP statistics: show ip tcp counters Command mode: All TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: 4 tcpRtoMin: 0 tcpRtoMax: 240000 tcpMaxConn: 512 tcpActiveOpens: 252214 tcpPassiveOpens: 7 tcpAttemptFails: 528 tcpEstabResets: 4 tcpInSegs: 756401 tcpOutSegs: 756655 tcpRetransSegs: 0 tcpInErrs: 0 tcpCurrEstab: 0 tcpCurConn: 3 tcpOutRsts: 417 The following table describes the TCP statistics. Table 117. TCP Statistics Statistic Description tcpRtoAlgorithm The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. tcpRtoMin The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. tcpRtoMax The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. tcpMaxConn The limit on the total number of TCP connections the ...
Page 247 The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN‐SENT state or the SYN‐RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN‐RCVD state. tcpEstabResets The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE‐WAIT state. tcpInSegs The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. tcpOutSegs The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. tcpRetransSegs The total number of segments retransmitted ‐ that is, the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. tcpInErrs The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP checksums). tcpCurrEstab The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. tcpCurConn The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. tcpOutRsts The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 248 UDP Statistics The following command displays UDP statistics: show ip udp counters Command mode: All UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: 54 udpOutDatagrams: 43 udpInErrors: 0 udpNoPorts: 1578077 The following table describes the UDP statistics. Table 118. UDP Statistics Statistic Description udpInDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. udpOutDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). udpInErrors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. udpNoPorts The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 249: Igmp Statistics
Total number of valid IGMP packets received rxIgmpInvalidPkts Total number of invalid packets received rxIgmpGenQueries Total number of General Membership Query packets received rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries Total number of Group Source‐Specific Queries (GSSQ) received rxIgmpDiscardPkts Total number of IGMP packets discarded rxIgmpLeaves Total number of Leave requests received rxIgmpReports Total number of Membership Reports received txIgmpReports Total number of Membership reports transmitted txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups txIgmpLeaves Total number of Leave messages transmitted © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 250 Table 119. IGMP Statistics (continued) Statistic Description rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords Total number of Current State records received rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords Total number of Source List Change records received rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords Total number of Filter Change records received txIgmpGenQueries Total number of General Membership Query packets transmitted rxPimHellos Total number of PIM hellos received G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 251 MLD Statistics The following table describes the commands used to view MLD statistics. Table 120. MLD Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 mld counters Displays MLD statistics. See page 252 for sample output. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld groups counters Displays total number of MLD entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld interface counters Displays total number of MLD entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 mld interface <1‐126> counters Displays total number of MLD entries on the interface. Command mode: All clear ipv6 mld counters Clears MLD counters. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 252 MLD Global Statistics The following command displays MLD global statistics for all MLD packets received on all interfaces: show ipv6 mld counters Command mode: All MLD global statistics: Total L3 IPv6 (S, G, V) entries: 2 Total MLD groups: 2 Bad Length: 0 Bad Checksum: 0 Bad Receive If: 0 Receive nonlocal: 0 Invalid Packets: 4 MLD packet statistics for interfaces: MLD interface packet statistics for interface 1: MLD msg type Received Sent xErrors General Query 0 1067 0 MAS Query 0 0 0 MASSQ Query 0 0 0 MLDv1 Report 0 0 0 MLDv1 Done 0 0 0 MLDv2 Report 1069 1084 0 INC CSRs(v2) 1 0 0 EXC CSRs(v2) 2134 1093 0 TO_INC FMCRs(v2) 1 0 0 TO_EXC FMCRs(v2) 0 15 0 ALLOW SLCRs(v2) 0 0 0 BLOCK SLCRs(v2) 0 0 0 MLD interface packet statistics for interface 2: MLD msg type Received Sent xErrors MLD interface packet statistics for interface 3: MLD msg type Received Sent xErrors General Query 0 2467 0 MAS Query 0 0 0 MASSQ Query 0 0 0 MLDv1 Report 0 0 0 MLDv1 Done 0 0 0...
Page 253 Listener Number of packets sent by a host when it wants to stop Done(v1/v2) receiving multicast traffic. Listener Report(v2) Number of packets sent by a multicast listener in response to MLDv2 query. MLDv2 INC mode Number of current state records with include filter mode. CSRs MLDv2 EXC mode Number of current state records with exclude filter mode. CSRs MLDv2 TO_INC Number of filter mode change records for which the filter FMCRs mode has changed to include mode. MLDv2 TO_EXC Number of filter mode change records for which the filter FMCRs mode has changed to exclude mode. MLDv2 ALLOW Number of source list change records for which the SLCRs specified sources from where the data is to be received has changed. MLDv2 BLOCK Number of source list change records for which the SLCRs specified sources from where the data is to be received is to be blocked. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 254: Ospf Statistics
OSPF Statistics The following commands display OSPF statistics: Table 122. OSPF Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ip ospf counters Displays global OSPF statistics. See page 255 for sample output. Command mode: All show ip ospf area [<0‐5>] counters Displays OSPF statistics for all areas or a specified area. Command mode: All show ip ospf interface [<interface number>|port <port alias or number>] counters Displays OSPF statistics for all interfaces or a specified interface. Command mode: All clear ip ospf counters Clears OSPF statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 255: Ospf Global Statistics
negotiation done 2 wait timer 2 exchange done 2 backup 0 bad requests 0 nbr change 5 bad sequence 0 loading done 2 n1way 0 rst_ad 0 down 1 Timers kickoff hello 514 retransmit 1028 lsa lock 0 lsa ack 0 dbage 0 summary 0 ase export 0 The following table describes the OSPF general statistics. Table 123. OSPF General Statistics Statistic Description Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Tx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Rx Hello The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 256 Table 123. OSPF General Statistics (continued) Statistic Description Tx Hello The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Rx Database The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Tx Database The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Rx ls Requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Tx ls Requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Rx ls Acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Tx ls Acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Rx ls Updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Tx ls Updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Start The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
Page 257 OSPF interfaces and areas. rst_ad The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. down The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial state of a neighbor conversation.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Intf Change Stats: hello The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. down The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. loop The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. unloop The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. wait timer The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. backup The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. nbr change The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 258 Table 123. OSPF General Statistics (continued) Statistic Description Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. retransmit The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. lsa lock The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. lsa ack The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. dbage The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. summary The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. ase export The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 259 OSPFv3 Statistics The following commands display OSPFv3 statistics: Table 124. OSPFv3 Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 ospf counters Displays OSPFv3 statistics. See page 260 for sample output. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf area [<area index (0‐2)>] counters Displays OSPFv3 statistics for all areas or a specified area. Command mode: All show ipv6 ospf interface [<interface number>] counters Displays OSPFv3 statistics for all interfaces or a specified interface. Command mode: All clear ipv6 ospf counters Clears OSPFv3 statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 260 OSPFv3 Global Statistics The following command displays statistics about OSPFv3 packets received on all OSPFv3 areas and interfaces: show ipv6 ospf counters Command mode: All OSPFv3 stats Rx/Tx/Disd Stats: Rx Tx Discarded Pkts 9695 95933 0 hello 9097 8994 0 database 39 51 6 ls requests 16 8 0 ls acks 172 360 0 ls updates 371 180 0 Errors rx on pasv intf 0 rx but ospf off 0 rx on intf not up 0 rx version mismatch 0 rx rtr id is zero 0 rx with our rtr id 0 instance id mismatch 0 area mismatch 0 dest addr mismatch 0 bad checksum 0 no associated nbr 0 bad packet type 0 hello mismatch 0 options mismatch 0 dead mismatch 0 bad nbma/ptomp nbr 0 Nbr change stats: Intf change Stats: down 0 down 5 attempt 0 loop 0 init 1 waiting 6 n2way 1 ptop 0 exstart 1 dr 4 exchange done 1 backup 6 loading done 1 dr other 0 full 1 all events 33...
Page 261 The sum total of all Hello packets discarded, including packets for which no associated interface has been found. Rx database The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Tx database The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Discarded The sum total of all Database Description packets discarded. database Rx ls requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Tx ls requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Discarded ls The sum total of all Link State Request packets discarded. requests Rx ls acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Tx ls acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Discarded ls acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets discarded. Rx ls updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPFv3 interfaces. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 262 Table 125. OSPFv3 General Statistics (continued) Statistics Description Tx ls updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces. Discarded ls The sum total of all Link State Update packets discarded. updates Nbr Change Stats: down The total number of Neighboring routers down (in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPFv3 interfaces. attempt The total number of transitions into attempt state of neighboring routers across allOSPFv3 interfaces. init The total number of transitions into init state of neighboring routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces. n2way The total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. exstart The total number of transitions into exstart state of neighboring routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces exchange done The total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacencyʹs final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets, across all OSPFv3 interfaces. loading done The total number of link state updates received for all out‐of‐date portions of the database across all OSPFv3 interfaces. full The total number of transitions into full state of neighboring routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces. all events The total number of state transitions of neighboring routers ...
Page 263 Table 125. OSPFv3 General Statistics (continued) Statistics Description backup The total number of transitions into backup state of all OSPFv3 interfaces. all events The total number of changes associated with any OSPFv3 interface, including changes into internal states. Timers Kickoff: hello The total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OSPFv3 interfaces. wait The total number of times the wait timer has been fired (which causes an interface to exit waiting state), across all OPSFv3 interfaces. poll The total number of times the timer whose firing causes hellos to be sent to inactive NBMA and Demand Circuit neighbors has been fired, across all OPSFv3 interfaces. nbr probe The total number of times the neighbor probe timer has been fired, across all OPSFv3 interfaces. Number of LSAs: originated The number of LSAs originated by this router. rcvd newer The number of LSAs received that have been determined to be originations newer originations. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 264: Vrrp Statistics
VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the G8264CS provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP‐capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. When virtual routers are configured, you can display the protocol statistics for VRRP. The following command displays VRRP statistics: show ip vrrp counters Command mode: All VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: 0 vrrpBadAdvers: 0 vrrpOutAdvers: 0 vrrpOutGratuitousARPs: 0 vrrpBadVersion: 0 vrrpBadVrid: 0 vrrpBadAddress: 0 vrrpBadData: 0 vrrpBadPassword: 0 vrrpBadInterval: 0 The following table describes the VRRP statistics. Table 126. VRRP Statistics Statistics Description vrrpInAdvers The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received. vrrpBadAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. vrrpOutAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. vrrpBadVersion The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad version number. vrrpOut The total number of VRRP gratuitous ARPs that have been GratuitousARPs sent.
Page 265 Description Hello Tx/Rx Number of Hello messages transmitted or received Join/Prune Tx/Rx Number of Join/Prune messages transmitted or received Assert Tx/Rx Number of Assert messages transmitted or received Register Tx/Rx Number of Register messages transmitted or received Null‐Reg Tx/Rx Number of NULL‐register messages received RegStop Tx/Rx Number of Register Stop messages transmitted or received CandRPAdv Tx/Rx Number of Candidate RP Advertisements transmitted or received BSR Tx/Rx Number of Bootstrap Router (BSR) messages transmitted or received Graft Tx/Rx Number of Graft messages transmitted or received Graft Ack Tx/Rx Number of Graft Acknowledgements transmitted or received Mcast data Tx/Rx Number of multicast datagrams transmitted or received MDP drop Tx/Rx Number of Multicast data packet Tx/Rx dropped CTL drop Tx/Rx Number of PIM control packet Tx/Rx dropped Bad pkts Number of bad PIM packets received © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 266: Routing Information Protocol Statistics
Routing Information Protocol Statistics The following command displays RIP statistics: show ip rip counters Command mode: All RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION: RIP packets received = 12 RIP packets sent = 75 RIP request received = 0 RIP response recevied = 12 RIP request sent = 3 RIP reponse sent = 72 RIP route timeout = 0 RIP bad size packet received = 0 RIP bad version received = 0 RIP bad zeros received = 0 RIP bad src port received = 0 RIP bad src IP received = 0 RIP packets from self received = 0 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 267: Dhcp Snooping Statistics
DHCP Statistics The following commands display DHCP statistics: Table 128. DHCP Statistics Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip dhcp snooping counters Displays DHCP Snooping statistics. Command mode: All clear ip dhcp snooping counters Clears DHCP Snooping statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC DHCP Snooping Statistics The following command displays DHCP Snooping statistics: show ip dhcp snooping counters Command mode: All DHCP Snooping statistics: Received Request packets 2 Received Reply packets 2 Recevied Invalid packets 0 Dropped packets out of rate 0 Dropped packets other reason 0 DHCP Snooping Statistics count all DHCP packets processed by DHCP snooping. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 268: Management Processor Statistics
Management Processor Statistics The following commands display Management Processor (MP) statistics: Table 129. Management Processor Statistics Options Command Syntax and Usage show mp i2c show processes i2c Displays Inter‐Integrated Circuit (I2C) statistics. Command mode: All show mp memory show processes memory Displays memory utilization statistics. Command mode: All show mp packet Displays MP packet statistics.For command options, see page 270. Command mode: All show mp tcpblock show processes tcpblock Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 280. Command mode: All show mp thread show processes thread Displays thread statistics. Command mode: All show mp udpblock show processes udpblock Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 281. Command mode: All show processes Displays MP specific statistics. For command options, see page 282.
Page 269 Table 129. Management Processor Statistics Options Command Syntax and Usage show processes cpu history Displays a history of CPU use statistics. To view a sample output, see page 284. Command mode: All clear mpcounters Clears all MP statistics. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 270 MP Packet Statistics Commands The following commands display MP Packet statistics: Table 130. Packet Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage show mp packet counters Displays packet statistics, to check for leaks and load. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 271. Command mode: All show mp packet dump {all|rx|tx} all displays all packet statistics and logs received or sent by the CPU.  rx displays all packet statistics and logs received by the CPU.  tx displays all packet statistics and logs sent by the CPU.  Command mode: All show mp packet last {both|rx|tx} <number of logs (1‐1000)> both displays a list of the most recent packets received or sent by the CPU.  rx displays a log of the most recent packets received by the CPU.  tx displays a log of the most recent packets sent by the CPU.  Command mode: All show mp packet logs {all|rx|tx} all displays a log of all packets received or sent by the CPU.  rx displays a log of packets received by the CPU.  tx displays a log of packets sent by the CPU.  Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} <parsing option>...
Page 271: Mp Packet Statistics
ARP Replies: 4988 0 LACP packets: 0 0 IPv4 packets: 100394 86826 ICMP Requests: 0 77321 ICMP Replies: 77315 0 IGMP packets: 0 0 PIM packets: 0 0 VRRP packets: 0 0 TCP packets: 84 174 FTP 0 0 HTTP 0 0 SSH 0 0 TACACS 0 0 TELNET 84 174 TCP other 0 0 UDP packets: 17666 9331 DHCP 13510 5175 NTP 3 3 PTP 0 0 RADIUS 0 0 SNMP 4153 4153 TFTP 0 0 UDP other 0 0 RIP packets: 0 0 OSPF packets: 0 0 BGP packets: 0 0 IPv6 packets: 6647 8 LLDP PDUs: 5162 23848 FCoE FIP PDUs: 0 0 ECP PDUs: 0 64 MgmtSock Packets: 192529 86833 Other: 141477 62 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 272 Packet Buffer Statistics: allocs: 973757 frees: 973753 failures: 0 dropped: 0 small packet buffers: current: 1 max: 2048 threshold: 512 hiwatermark: 2 hiwater time: 15:11:47 Mon Oct 20, 2014 medium packet buffers: current: 3 max: 2048 threshold: 512 hiwatermark: 5 hiwater time: 15:12:17 Mon Oct 20, 2014 jumbo packet buffers: current: 0 max: 16 hiwatermark: 0 pkt_hdr statistics: current : 0 max : 3072 hiwatermark : 12 The following table describes MP packet statistics. Table 131. Packet Statistics Statistics Description Packets received by CPU Total packets Total number of packets received BPDUs Total number of spanning‐tree Bridge Protocol Data ...
Page 273 Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Maximum number of small packet allocations supported. threshold Threshold value for small packet allocations, beyond which only high‐priority small packets are allowed. hi‐watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. hi‐water time Time stamp that indicates when the hi‐watermark was reached. medium packet buffers current Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Maximum number of medium packet allocations supported. threshold Threshold value for medium packet allocations, beyond which only high‐priority medium packets are allowed. hi‐watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. hi‐water time Time stamp that indicates when the hi‐watermark was reached. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 274 Table 131. Packet Statistics (continued) Statistics Description jumbo packet buffers current Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Maximum number of jumbo packet allocations supported. hi‐watermark The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. pkt_hdr statistics current Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Maximum number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. hi‐watermark The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 275 Management Processor Packet Thread Statistics The following command displays Management Processor Packet Thread statistics: show mp packet threadcounters Command mode: All Per Thread Current Buffer Statistics: thid name headers smalls mediums jumbos 1 STEM 0 0 0 0 2 STP 0 0 0 0 3 MFDB 0 0 0 0 4 TND 0 0 0 0 5 CONS 0 0 0 0 6 TNET 0 0 0 0 7 TNET 0 0 0 0 8 TNET 0 0 0 0 9 TNET 0 0 0 0 10 LOG 0 0 0 0 11 TRAP 0 0 0 0 12 NTP 0 0 0 0 13 RMON 0 0 0 0 16 IP 0 0 0 0 17 RIP 0 0 0 0 18 AGR 0 0 0 0 19 EPI 0 0 0 0 20 PORT 0 0 0 0 75 IGMP 0 0 0 0 76 ICMP 0 0 0 0 77 STPM 0 0 0 0 78 ARP 0 0 0 0 79 VMFD 0 0 0 0 80 NORM 0 0 0 0 81 DONE 0 0 0 0 Others 0 0 3 0 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 276 Logged Packet Statistics The following command displays logged packets that have been received or sent, based on the specified filter: show mp packet parse {rx|tx} <parsing option> The filter options are described in the following table. Table 132. Packet Log Parsing Options Command Syntax and Usage show mp packet parse {rx|tx} arp Displays only ARP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} bgp Displays only BGP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} bpdu Displays only BPDUs logged Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} cisco Displays only Cisco packets (BPDU/CDP/UDLD) logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} dhcp Displays only DHCP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ecp Displays only ECP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ftp Displays only FTP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} http Displays only HTTP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} https Displays only HTTPS packets logged. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 277 Displays only ICMP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} igmp Displays only IGMP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ipaddr <IPv4 address> Displays only logged packets with the specified IPv4 address. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ipv4 Displays only IPv4 packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ipv6 Displays only IPv6 packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} lacp Displays only LACP PDUs logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} lldp Displays only LLDP PDUs logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} mac <MAC address> Displays only logged packets with the specified MAC address. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} mgmtsock Displays only packets logged from management ports. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ntp Displays only NTP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ospf Displays only OSPF packets logged. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 278 Table 132. Packet Log Parsing Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show mp packet parse {rx|tx} other Displays logs of all packets not explicitly selectable. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} pim Displays only PIM packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} port <port alias or number> Displays only logged packets with the specified port. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} radius Displays only RADIUS packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} rarp Displays only Reverse‐ARP packets. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} raw Displays raw packet buffer in addition to headers. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} rip Displays only RIP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} snmp Displays only SNMP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ssh Displays only SSH packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tacacs Displays only TACACS packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tcp Displays only TCP packets logged. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 279 Table 132. Packet Log Parsing Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tcpother Displays only TCP other‐port packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} telnet Displays only TELNET packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tftp Displays only TFTP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} udp Displays only UDP packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} udpother Displays only UDP other‐port packets logged. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4095)> Displays only logged packets with the specified VLAN. Command mode: All show mp packet parse {rx|tx} vrrp Displays only VRRP packets logged. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 280 TCP Statistics The following command displays MP TCP statistics: show mp tcpblock Command mode: All Data Ports: All TCP allocated control blocks: 1971dd0c: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 10.241.31.135 830 listen MGT up 53ee55f8: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0 830 listen 53ee5480: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 0 <=> 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 830 listen 59c51b00: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 10.241.31.135 80 listen MGT up 144b4670: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 10.241.31.135 23 listen MGT up 144b4aac: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 127.0.0.1 23 listen up 53ee4c58: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 0 <=> 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 23 listen 53ee4ae8: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0 23 listen Mgmt Ports: Active Internet connections (servers and established) Proto RecvQ SendQ Local Address Foreign Address State tcp 0 0 127.0.0.1:5000 *:* LISTEN tcp 0 0 10.241.31.135:http *:* LISTEN tcp 0 0 10.241.31.135:telnet *:* LISTEN tcp 0 0 127.0.0.1:680 127.0.0.1:5500 ESTABLISHED tcp 0 0 127.0.0.1:5000 127.0.0.1:647 ESTABLISHED tcp 0 0 127.0.0.1:5500 127.0.0.1:680 ESTABLISHED tcp 0 0 127.0.0.1:647 127.0.0.1:5000 ESTABLISHED The following table describes the MP TCP statistics. Table 133. MP Specified TCP Statistics Statistics Description 14835bd8 Memory...
Page 281 UDP Statistics The following command displays MP UDP statistics: show mp udpblock Command mode: All Data Ports: All UDP allocated control blocks: 68: listen 161: listen Mgmt Ports: Active Internet connections (servers and established) Proto RecvQ SendQ Local Address Foreign Address State udp 0 0 10.241.31.135:snmp *:* 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 10.241.31.135 161 accept MGT up © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 282 MP Specific Statistics The following command displays Management Processor specific statistics: show processes Command mode: All STEM thread stats: Thread Thread Stack Total Invoked Max Messages Queue Status ID Name Used / Max Runtime(us) Count Runtime(us) in Queue Hwat 1 STEM 0 0 0 0 idle 2 STP 6936 32768 4054620 205230 702 0 4 idle 3 MFDB 520 8192 1241155 3898928 44 0 2 idle 4 TND 2504 8192 126191 9482 129 0 3 idle 5 CONS 12904 61440 95720 135324 9009 0 1 running 6 TNET 280 61440 3 1 0 0 1 idle 7 TNET 280 61440 3 1 0 0 1 idle 8 TNET 280 61440 6 1 0 0 1 idle 9 TNET 280 61440 2 1 0 0 1 idle 10 LOG 1912 8192 4071659 2857 3972888 0 3 idle 11 TRAP 808 8192 42286 150352 21 0 3 idle 12 NTP 72 8192 4 1 0 0 1 idle 13 RMON 232 8192 562055 81607 60 0 1 idle 16 IP 2552 32768 4906570 1180443 398 0 2 idle 17 RIP 792 32768 89 132 0 0 2 idle 18 AGR 4568 131072 49017 8168 32 0 1 idle 19 EPI 840 32768 143250 3859 87 0 1 idle 20 PORT 2440 24576 139925 40817 1561 0 1 idle 70 ECPR 72 16384 1 1 0 0 1 idle 71 VDPT 312 32768 38375 8162 24 0 1 idle 72 VFDB 536 32768 31 2 0 0 1 idle 73 HIST 104 4096 93695 81612 32 0 1 idle 74 SLP 888 32768 290 12 2 0 1 idle 75 IGMP 808 16384 19 6 4 0 1 idle 76 ICMP 72 8192 0 1 0 0 1 idle 77 STPM 72 32768 2 1 0 0 1 idle 78 ARP 552 32768 16777825 10257755 541 0 2 idle 79 VMFD 104 16384 0 1 0 0 1 idle 80 NORM 408 4096 4 2 4 0 1 idle 81 DONE 21384 61440 1060987 23215 254600 0 1 idle G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 283: Cpu Statistics
For 5 minute: 3.69% Highest CPU Utilization: thread 5 (CONS) at 14:06:29 Mon Jul 6, 2015 Thread Thread Utilization Status ID Name 1sec 5sec 1Min 5Min 1 STEM 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% idle 2 STP 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% idle 3 MFDB 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% idle 4 TND 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% idle 5 CONS 0.14% 0.04% 0.00% 0.00% running 6 TNET 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% idle The following table describes the CPU statistics. Table 134. CPU Statistics Statistics Description Thread ID The thread ID number. Thread Name The name of the thread. 1sec The percent of CPU use over 1 second. 5sec The percent of CPU use over 5 seconds. 1Min The percent of CPU use over 1 minute. 5Min The percent of CPU use over 5 minutes. Status The status of the process. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 284 CPU Statistics History The following command displays a history of CPU use statistics: show processes cpu history Command mode: All CPU Utilization History 40 (LACP) 8% at 12:41:07 Mon Jul 6, 2015 75 (ARP ) 32% at 12:41:08 Mon Jul 6, 2015 75 (ARP ) 48% at 12:41:13 Mon Jul 6, 2015 54 (PROX) 62% at 13:52:06 Mon Jul 6, 2015 54 (PROX) 63% at 15:03:43 Mon Jul 6, 2015 54 (PROX) 64% at 4:02:46 Wed Jul 8, 2015 54 (PROX) 65% at 3:54:27 Thu Jul 9, 2015 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 285: Qos Statistics
 ipv4miscellaneous (IPv4 packets with IP options and TTL exception)  ipv6nd (IPv6 Neighbor Discovery packets)  lacp (LACP packets)  lldp (LLDP packets)  ospf (OSPF packets)  ospf3 (OSPF3 Packets)  pim (PIM packets)  rip (RIP packets)  system (system protocols, such as tftp, ftp, telnet or ssh)  udld (UDLD packets)  vlag (VLAG packets)  vrrp (VRRP packets)  Command mode: All show qos protocolpacketcontrol queuecounters [<packet queue number (0‐47)>|all] Displays the total number of packets received by each queue. The all option displays the number of packets reveived by all queues, including the reserved packet queues. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 286 Table 135. QoS Statistics Commands Command Syntax and Usage clear qos protocolpacketcontrol all Clears all packet queue statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear qos protocolpacketcontrol protocolcounters [<packet type>] Clears packet queue statistics for the selected packet type. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear qos protocolpacketcontrol queuecounters [<packet queue number (0‐47)>] Clears packet queue statistics for the selected queue. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 287 Command Syntax and Usage show accesscontrol counters Displays all ACL statistics. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list <1‐256> counters Displays the Access Control List statistics for a specific ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> counters Displays the IPv6 ACL statistics for a specific ACL. Command mode: All show accesscontrol meter <1‐127> counters Displays ACL meter statistics. Command mode: All show accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> counters Displays VLAN Map statistics for the selected VMAP. For a sample display, see page 288. Command mode: All clear accesscontrol list {<1‐256>|all} counters Clears ACL statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear accesscontrol list6 {<1‐128>|all} counters Clears IPv6 ACL statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear accesscontrol meter <1‐127> counters Clears ACL meter statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear accesscontrol vmap {<1‐128>} counters Clears VLAN Map statistics. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 288: Acl Statistics
ACL Statistics This option displays ACL statistics. show accesscontrol counters Command mode: All Hits for ACL 1: 26057515 Hits for ACL 2: 26057497 VMAP Statistics The following command displays VLAN Map statistics. show accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> counters Command mode: All Hits for VMAP 1: 57515 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 289: Snmp Statistics
The following tabl describes the SNMP statistics. Table 137. SNMP Statistics Statistic Description snmpInPkts The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. snmpInBadVersions The total number of SNMP Messages, which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version. snmpInBadCʹtyNames The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). snmpInBadCʹtyUses The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 290 Table 137. SNMP Statistics (continued) Statistic Description snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. Note: OSIʹs method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined in X.208), and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209). ASN.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types, from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN.1 type as a string of eight‐bit octets. snmpEnableAuthTraps An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch). snmpOutPkts The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. snmpInBadTypes The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. snmpInTooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status field is too big. snmpInNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status field is noSuchName.
Page 291 The total number of SNMP Get‐Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set‐Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get‐Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpOutTooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status field is too big. snmpOutNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status is noSuchName. snmpOutBadValues The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status field is badValue. snmpOutReadOnlys Not in use. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 292 Table 137. SNMP Statistics (continued) Statistic Description snmpOutGenErrs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error‐status field is genErr. snmpOutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get‐Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpOutGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get‐Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpOutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set‐Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpOutGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get‐Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpOutTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpSilentDrops The total number of GetRequest‐PDUs, GetNextRequest‐PDUs, GetBulkRequest‐PDUs, SetRequest‐PDUs, and InformRequest‐PDUs delivered to the OSPFSNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response‐PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request.
Page 293: Ntp Statistics
NTP Statistics Field Description Primary Server  Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time.  Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.  Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the  switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.  Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated  its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Last update based Last update of time on the switch based on either primary on response from or secondary NTP response received. primary server © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 294 Table 138. NTP Statistics Field Description Last update time The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated. Current system The switch system time when the following command was time issued: show ntp counters The following command displays information about NTP associated peers: show ntp associations Command mode: All address ref clock st when(s) offset(s) *12.200.151.18 198.72.72.10 3 35316 2 *synced, #unsynced The following table describes the NTP associations statistics. Table 139. NTP Associations Field Description address Peer address ref clock Peer reference clock address Peer stratum when(s) Time in seconds since the latest NTP packet was received from the peer offset(s) Offset in seconds between the peer clock and local clock G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 295: Statistics Dump
Statistics Dump The following command dumps switch statistics: show counters Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics (40K or more, depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 3: Statistics Commands...
Page 296 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 297: Chapter 4. Configuration Commands
General Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage copy activeconfig runningconfig Copy the active configuration to the current (running) configuration. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy activeconfig <TFTP server filepath> [dataport|mgtport] Backs up the active configuration to a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy activeconfig tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy <TFTP server filepath> activeconfig [dataport|mgtport] Restores the active configuration from a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt activeconfig mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy backupconfig runningconfig Copy the backup configuration to the current (running) configuration. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy backupconfig <TFTP server filepath> [dataport|mgtport] Backs up the backup configuration to a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy backupconfig tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy <TFTP server filepath> backupconfig [dataport|mgtport] Restores the backup configuration from a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt backupconfig mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy runningconfig backupconfig Copy the current (running) configuration from switch memory to the backupconfig partition. For details, see page 610. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 298 Table 140. General Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage copy runningconfig startupconfig Copy the current (running) configuration from switch memory to the startupconfig partition. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy runningconfig {ftp|tftp|sftp} [dataport|mgtport] Backs up the current (running) configuration to a file on the selected FTP/TFTP/SFTP server. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy runningconfig tftp address <TFTP server IP address> filename <TFTP server filepath> [dataport|mgtport] Backs up the current (running) configuration to a file on the specified TFTP server. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy runningconfig <TFTP server filepath> [dataport|mgtport] Backs up the current (running) configuration to a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy runningconfig tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy <TFTP server filepath> runningconfig [dataport|mgtport] Restores the current (running) configuration from a file on the specified TFTP server. For example: copy tftp://10.72.97.135:/directory/config.txt runningconfig mgtport Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy {ftp|tftp|sftp} runningconfig [dataport|mgtport] Restores current configuration from a FTP/TFTP/SFTP server. For details, see page 611. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy {tftp|sftp} {cacert|hostkey|hostcert|publickey} Import interface used by NIST certified test laboratories for USGv6 (NIST SP 500‐267) certification purposes. Required for RSA digital signature authentication verification during IKEv2 interoperability testing. Uses TFTP or SFTP to import: cacert: Certificate Authority root certificate ...
Page 299 Table 140. General Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage dir [configs|images] Displays the configuration files and NOS images currently on the switch. configs ‐ displays only the configuration files currently on the switch  images ‐ displays only the system images currently on the switch  For more details, see page Command mode: Privileged EXEC mv <source filename> <destination filename> Copies a configuration files or a system image from the specified location to another specified location. Note: This command is applicable only to configuration files or NOS images. Command mode: Privileged EXEC write [memory] Copy the current (running) configuration from switch memory to the activeconfig partition. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show runningconfig Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details, see page 609. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show runningconfig diff Displays running configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 300: Viewing And Saving Changes
Viewing and Saving Changes As you use the configuration commands to set switch parameters, the changes you make take effect immediately. You do not need to apply them. Configuration changes are lost the next time the switch boots, unless you save the changes. You can view all running configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the show runningconfig diff command in Privileged EXEC mode. Note: Some operations can override the settings of the Configuration commands. Therefore, settings you view using the Configuration commands (for example, port status) might differ from run‐time information that you view using the Information commands. The Information commands display current run‐time information of switch parameters. Saving the Configuration You must save configuration settings to flash memory, so the G8264CS reloads the settings after a reboot. Note: If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. To save the new configuration, enter the following command: RS G8264CS# copy runningconfig startupconfig or: RS G8264CS# write Note: The write command doesn’t prompt the user for confirmation. When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reboot, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 634. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 301: System Configuration
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator logs into the switch, the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the show sysinfo command. Command mode: Global configuration no banner Deletes the login banner. Command mode: Global configuration [no] boot strict enable Enables or disables switch operation in security strict mode. When enabled, the authentication and privacy protocols and algorithms of the device are compliant with NIST SP‐800‐131A, with non‐complaint protocols and algorithms disabled. Note: This setting is applied only after a reboot, during which the device will be reset to default factory configuration. By default, this setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration easyconnect Allows to apply a series of customizable and predefined configurations based on common deployment scenarios. The EasyConnect (EZC) wizard will display the available configuration options. For more details on using the EZC wizard, see the Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Application Guide for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4. Command mode: Privileged EXEC enable password Configures a password required to enter Privileged EXEC command mode. By default, no password is required. Command mode: Global configuration no enable Removes the configured password required to enter Privileged EXEC command mode. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 302 Table 141. System Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage hostname <1‐64 characters> Enables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). Command mode: Global configuration no hostname Deletes the host name set by the system administrator and displays the default system host name in the CLI. Command mode: Global configuration line console length <0‐300> Configures the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI by default for console sessions. Setting it to 0 disables paging. The default value is 28. Command mode: Global configuration no line console Sets line console length to the default value of 28. Command mode: Global configuration line vty length <0‐300> Sets the default number of lines per screen displayed for Telnet and SSH sessions. A value of 0 disables paging. The default value is 28. Command mode: Global configuration no line vty Sets line vty length to the default value of 28. Command mode: Global configuration [no] prompting Enables or disables CLI confirmation prompts. By default, this settings is enabled. Note: When disabled, the switch will choose the default answer. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system bootp Enables or disables the use of the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP). If you enable BOOTP, the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. For more details, see page 549.
Page 303 Command mode: Global configuration [no] system daylight Enables or disables daylight savings time in the system clock. When enabled, the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. By default, this option is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system dhcp [hostname|syslog] Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the IP address on interface 1. When enabled, the IP address obtained from the DHCP server overrides the static IP address. The default setting is enabled. hostname enables or disables hostname option support  syslog enables or disables log server option support  Command mode: Global configuration system idle <0‐60> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions in minutes. A value of 0 disables the system idle timeout. The default value is 10 minutes. Command mode: Global configuration system linkscan {fast|normal|slow} Configures the link scan interval used to poll the status of ports. The values for the different intervals are: fast ‐ 75 miliseconds  normal ‐ 150 miliseconds  slow ‐ 500 miliseconds  Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 304 Table 141. System Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage system notice <maximum 2021 character multi‐line login notice> <ʹ.ʹ to end> [addline <notice text>] Displays a login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. This notice can contain up to 2021 characters and new lines. The addline option adds new lines of text to the existing login notice without replacing it. Command mode: Global configuration no system notice Deletes the login notice. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system packetlogging Enables or disables logging of packets that come to the CPU. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system resetcontrol Enables or disables the reset control flag. When enabled, the switch continues to function after a crash of the main processor, using the last known Layer 2/3 information. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system serverports port <port alias or number> Adds or removes the specified port to the list of server ports. For more details, see page 358. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system serviceled enable Enables (on) or disables (off) the Service Required LED on the front panel of the switch unit. Command mode: Global configuration [no] system serviceled operationalenable Enables (on) or disables (off) the Service Required LED to glow in steady blue to locate the device. Command mode: Privileged EXEC system time <hh>:<mm>:<ss> Configures the system time using a 24‐hour clock format. The time retains its ...
Page 305 Daylight Savings Time, etc. The time zone can be directly specified using its unique time zone index. Command mode: Global configuration no system timezone Deletes the time zone configuration. Command mode: Global configuration system usbeject Allows you to safely remove a USB drive from the USB port, without corrupting files on the drive. Note: Not available in stacking. Command mode: Global configuration terminal dontask Disables CLI confirmation prompts for the current session. The switch will choose the default answer. By default, CLI confirmation prompts are enabled, if they are not configured differently by using the prompting command. Note: When using this command any settings configured through the prompting command will be temporarily disregarded for the duration of the current session. Command mode: All no terminal dontask Enables CLI confirmation prompts for the current session. By default, CLI confirmation prompts are enabled, if they are not configured differently by using the prompting command. Command mode: All terminallength <0‐300> Configures the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI for the current session. A value of 0 disables paging. By default, it is set to the corresponding line vty length or line console length value in effect at login. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 306 Table 141. System Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ssl minimumversion {tls10|tls11|tls12} Configures the minimum accepted Transport Layer Security (TLS) version. tls10 ‐ TLS version 1.0  tls11 ‐ TLS version 1.1  tls12 ‐ TLS version 1.2  Command mode: Global configuration show boot strict Displays the current security strict mode status. Command mode: Global configuration show system Displays the current system parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 307 System Error Disable and Recovery Configuration The Error Disable and Recovery feature allows the switch to automatically disable a port if an error condition is detected on the port. The port remains in the error‐disabled state until it is re‐enabled manually or re‐enabled automatically by the switch after a timeout period has elapsed. The error‐disabled state of a port does not persist across a system reboot. Table 142. Error Disable Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] errdisable recovery Globally enables or disables automatic error‐recovery for error‐disabled ports. The default setting is disabled. Note: Each port must have error‐recovery enabled to participate in automatic error recovery. Command mode: Global configuration errdisable timeout <30‐86400> Configures the error‐recovery timeout, in seconds. After the timer expires, the switch attempts to re‐enable the port. The default value is 300 seconds. Note: When you change the timeout value, all current error‐recovery timers are reset. Command mode: Global configuration show errdisable Displays the current system Error Disable configuration. For more command options, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 308 Link Flap Dampening Configuration The Link Flap Dampening feature allows the switch to automatically disable a port if too many link flaps (link up/link down) are detected on the port during a specified time interval. The port remains in the error‐disabled state until it is re‐enabled manually or re‐enabled automatically by the switch after a timeout period has elapsed. Table 143. Link Flap Dampening Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] errdisable linkflap enable Enables or disables Link Flap Dampening. Command mode: Global configuration errdisable linkflap maxflaps <1‐100> Configures the maximum number of link flaps allowed in the configured time period. The default value is 5. Command mode: Global configuration errdisable linkflap time <5‐500> Configures the time period, in seconds. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration show errdisable linkflap Displays the current Link Flap Dampening parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 309: System Host Log Configuration
Sets the severity level of the syslog messages saved to flash memory. The default is 7, which means log all severity levels. Command mode: Global configuration no logging buffer severity Disables the saving of syslog messages to the flash memory. Command mode: Global configuration [no] logging console Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. The default setting is enabled. Note: When necessary, disabling console logging ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. Command mode: Global configuration logging console severity <0‐7> This option sets the severity level of syslog messages delivered via the console, telnet, and SSH. The system displays only messages with the selected severity level and above. For example, if you set the console severity to 2, only messages with severity level of 1 and 2 are displayed. The default is 7, which means log all severity levels. Command mode: Global configuration no logging console severity Disables delivering syslog messages to the console based on severity. Command mode: Global configuration logging host <1‐2> address <IPv4 address> Sets the IP address of the first or second syslog host. Command mode: Global configuration logging host <1‐2> address6 <IPv6 address> Sets the IPv6 address of the first or second syslog host. Command mode: Global configuration logging host <1‐2> {dataport|mgtport} Sets the port of the first or second syslog host. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 310 Table 144. Host Log Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage logging host <1‐2> facility <0‐7> This option sets the facility level of the first or second syslog host displayed. The default value is 0. Command mode: Global configuration logging host <1‐2> severity <0‐7> This option sets the severity level of the first or second syslog host displayed. The default value is 7, which means log all severity levels. Command mode: Global configuration no logging host <1‐2> Deletes the specified syslog host. Command mode: Global configuration [no] logging log {all|<feature>} Enables or disables features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can choose to enable/disable syslog on all available features by using the option all or enable/disable specific features (such as vlans, stg or ssh). For a complete list of features, see page 312. Command mode: Global configuration [no] logging pdrop enable Enables or disables packet drop logging. By default, the switch generates these messages once every 2 minutes. Command mode: Global configuration logging pdrop interval <0‐30> Configures the packet drop logging interval, in minutes. The default value is 2 minutes. Command mode: Global configuration logging sourceinterface loopback <1‐5> Sets the loopback interface number for syslogs. Command mode: Global configuration no logging sourceinterface loopback Removes the loopback interface for syslogs. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 311 The default setting is 2. Command mode: Global configuration show logging [messages] [severity <0‐7>] [reverse] [|{include|exclude|section|begin|head <1‐2000>| |last <1‐2000>}] Displays the current syslog settings, followed by the most recent 2000 syslog messages. messages displays the most recent 2000 syslog messages only  severity displays syslog messages of the specified severity level  reverse displays syslog messages starting with the most recent message  | displays syslog messages that match one of the following filters:  • include displays syslog messages that match the specified expression • exclude displays syslog messages that don’t match the specified expression • section displays syslog messages that match the specified section • begin displays syslog messages beginning from the first message that matches the specified expression • head displays the oldest syslog messages for the specified value • last displays the most recent syslog messages for the specified value For details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 312 The following list displays the features available for the [no] logging log command: arpinspection ‐ Dynamic ARP Inspection logging  bgp ‐ BGP logging  cfg ‐ Configuration logging  cfgchg ‐ Configuration Change logging  cli ‐ Command Line Interface logging  console ‐ Console logging  dcbx ‐ DCB Capability Exchange logging  difftrak ‐ Configuration Difference Tracking logging  dot1x ‐ 802.1x logging  failover ‐ Failover logging  fcoe ‐ Fibre Channel over Ethernet logging  hotlinks ‐ Hot Links logging  igmpgroup ‐ IGMP group logging  igmpmrouter ‐ IGMP mrouter logging  igmpquerier ‐ IGMP querier logging  ip ‐ Internet Protocol version 4 logging  ipv6 ‐ Internet Protocol version 6 logging  lacp ‐ Link Aggregation Control Protocol logging  link ‐ System Port Link logging  lldp ‐ LLDP logging ...
Page 313  vnic ‐ VNIC logging  vrrp ‐ Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol logging  web ‐ Web logging  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 314: Ssh Server Configuration
SSH Server Configuration For the RackSwitch G8264CS, these commands enable Secure Shell access from any SSH client. Table 145. SSH Server Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ssh enable Enables or disables the SSH server. Command mode: Global configuration ssh generatehostkey Generate the RSA host key. Command mode: Global configuration ssh maxauthattempts <1‐20> Sets the maximum number of SSH authentication attempts. The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration no ssh maxauthattempts Resets the maximum number of SSH authentication attempts to its default value of 2. Command mode: Global configuration ssh port <TCP port number (1‐65535)> Sets the SSH server port number. The default port number is 22. Command mode: Global configuration no ssh port Resets the SSH server port to the default port number ‐ 22. Command mode: Global configuration ssh publickey index <1‐100> {adduser|deluser} username <user name> Assigns another user name for existing public keys or removes a user name. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ssh scpenable Enables or disables the SCP apply and save. Command mode: Global configuration ssh scppassword Set the administration password for SCP access.
Page 315 Displays the current SFTP/SSH host key configuration. address: Displays a specific SFTP/SSH host key  all: Displays all SFTP/SSH host keys  Commands mode: All show sshclientpubkey {all|index <1‐100>|username <user name>} Displays the current SSH public key configuration. all: Displays all SSH public keys  index: Displays a specific SSH public key  username: Displays all the SSH public keys of a particular user  Command mode: All clear sshclienthostkey {address <SFTP server IP address>|all} Clears stored SFTP/SSH host key configuration. address: Clears a specific SFTP/SSH host key  all: Clears all SFTP/SSH host keys  Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear sshclientpubkey {all|index <1‐100>|username <user name>} Clears stored public key configuration. all: Clears all SSH public keys  index: Clears a specific SSH public key  username: Clears a particular username from all the SSH public keys  Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 316: Radius Server Configuration
RADIUS Server Configuration The following table describes the RADIUS Server commands. Table 146. RADIUS Server Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] radiusserver backdoor Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. The default value is disabled. To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your switch, contact your Service and Support line. Command mode: Global configuration [no] radiusserver enable Enables or disables the RADIUS server. Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver port <UDP port number (1500‐3000)> Configures the RADIUS server port. Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. The default port is 1645. Command mode: Global configuration default radiusserver port Resets the RADIUS server port to the default UDP port ‐ 1645. Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver primaryhost <IP address> key <1‐32 characters> Sets the primary RADIUS server address and the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s). Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver primaryhost {dataport|mgtport} Defines the primary interface port to use to send RADIUS server requests. Select the port to use for data transfer. Command mode: Global configuration no radiusserver primaryhost [key] Deletes the primary RADIUS server. The key option only deletes the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server. Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver retransmit <1‐3>...
Page 317 Command Syntax and Usage radiusserver secondaryhost <IP address> key <1‐32 characters> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address and the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s). Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver secondaryhost {dataport|mgtport} Defines the secondary interface port to use to send RADIUS server requests. Select the port to use for data transfer. Command mode: Global configuration [no] radiusserver secondaryhost [key] Deletes the secondary RADIUS server. The key option only deletes the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server. Command mode: Global configuration [no] radiusserver securebackdoor Enables or disables the RADIUS back door using secure password for telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. This command does not apply when backdoor is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration radiusserver timeout <1‐10> Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 3 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration ip radius sourceinterface loopback <1‐5> Sets the RADIUS source loopback interface. Command mode: Global configuration no ip radius sourceinterface loopback Removes all RADIUS source loopback interfaces. Command mode: Global configuration show radiusserver Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 318: Tacacs+ Server Configuration
TACACS+ Server Configuration TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a userʹs logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS is not an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial‐In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492. TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS, as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also, RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile, whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device:  TACACS+ is TCP‐based, so it facilitates connection‐oriented traffic. It supports full‐packet encryption, as opposed to password‐only in  authentication requests.  It supports de‐coupled authentication, authorization and accounting. Table 147. TACACS+ Server Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] tacacsserver accountingenable Enables or disables TACACS+ accounting. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver attempts <1‐10> Sets the number of failed login attempts before disconnecting the user. The default is 2 attempts. Command mode: Global configuration no tacacsserver attempts Resets the number of failed login attempts to the default value of 2. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver backdoor Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for Telnet, SSH/SCP or ...
Page 319 Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver commandauthorization Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver commandlogging Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver directedrequest [notruncate|restricted] Enables TACACS+ directed request, which uses a specified TACACS+ server for authentication, authorization, accounting. When directed‐request is enabled, each user must add a configured TACACS+ server hostname to the username (for example, username@hostname) during login. This command allows the following options: restricted: Only the username is sent to the specified TACACS+ server.  notruncate: The entire login string is sent to the TACACS+ server.  Command mode: Global configuration no tacacsserver directedrequest Disables TACACS+ directed request. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ server. By default, the server is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver enablebypass Enables or disables the enable‐bypass for administrator privilege. By default, enable‐bypass is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver encryptionenable Enables or disables the encryption of TACACS+ packets. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 320 Table 147. TACACS+ Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] tacacsserver passwordchange Enables or disables TACACS+ password change. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver port <TCP port number (1‐65000)> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. The default is 49. Command mode: Global configuration default tacacsserver port Resets the TACACS+ server port to the default port number ‐ 49. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver primaryhost <IP address> key <1‐32 characters> Sets the primary TACACS+ server address and the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s). Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver primaryhost {dataport|mgtport} Defines the primary interface port to use to send TACACS+ server requests. Select the port to use for data transfer. Command mode: Global configuration no tacacsserver primaryhost [key] Deletes the primary TACACS+ server. The key option only removes the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver privilegemapping Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege‐level mapping. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver retransmit <1‐3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 3 requests. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver secondaryhost <IP address> key <1‐32 characters> Sets the secondary TACACS+ server address and the shared secret between the ...
Page 321 Command mode: Global configuration no tacacsserver secondaryhost [key] Deletes the secondary TACACS+ server. The key option only removes the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server. Command mode: Global configuration [no] tacacsserver securebackdoor Enables or disables TACACS+ secure back door access through Telnet, SSH/SCP or HTTP/HTTPS only when the TACACS+ servers are not responding. This feature is recommended to permit access to the switch when the TACACS+ servers become unresponsive. If no back door is enabled, the only way to gain access when TACACS+ servers are unresponsive is to use the back door via the console port. The default is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver timeout <4‐15> Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration tacacsserver usermapping <0‐15> {user|oper|admin} Maps a TACACS+ authorization level to a switch user level. Enter a TACACS+ authorization level (0‐15), followed by the corresponding switch user level. Command mode: Global configuration no tacacsserver usermapping <0‐15> Removes a TACACS+ authorization level. Command mode: Global configuration ip tacacs sourceinterface loopback <1‐5> Sets the TACACS+ source loopback interface. Command mode: Global configuration no ip tacacs sourceinterface loopback Deletes all TACACS+ source loopback interfaces. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 322 Table 147. TACACS+ Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage primarypassword Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input. Command mode: Global configuration secondarypassword Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input. Command mode: Global configuration show tacacsserver Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 323: Ldap Server Configuration
Configures the LDAP client mode. legacy ‐ provides LDAP version 1 (LDAPv1) client functionality  enhanced ‐ provides LDAP versions 2 and 3 (LDAPv2, LDAPv3) client  functionality The default mode is legacy. Note: When switching between LDAP client modes, LDAP configurations made before the change are lost. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver attribute group <1‐128 characters> Configures a customized LDAP group search attribute, where the group membership information of the user is stored. The default value is memberOf. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver attribute group Resets the LDAP group search attribute to its default value of memberOf. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver attribute loginpermission <1‐128 characters> Configures a customized LDAP login permission attribute, where the user’s or the group’s permission string is stored. The default value is ibmchassisRole. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver attribute loginpermission Resets the LDAP login permission attribute to its default value of ibmchassisRole. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 324 Table 148. LDAP Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ldapserver attribute username <1‐128 characters> Configures a customized LDAP user search attribute. The default value is uid (unique identification number). Note: The user attribute needs to be set to cn (common name) if LDAP server is MS active directory. For example: cn=John Smith Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver attribute username Resets the LDAP user search attribute to its default value of uid. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver attribute Resets the LDAP attributes to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ldapserver backdoor Enables or disables the LDAP back door for Telnet, SSH, SCP, HTTP, or HTTPS access. The default setting is disabled. Note: To obtain the LDAP back door password for your G8264CS, contact your Service and Support line. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver basedn <1‐128 characters> Configure the Distinguished Name (DN) of the LDAP server. The DN consists of a sequence of different Relative Distinguished Names (RDN) connected by commas. An RDN is an attribute that has an associated value in the format ‘attribute=value’. For a list of typical RDNs, see page 329. Enter the full path for your organization. For example: ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver basedn Deletes the configured DN. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 325  ldapserver binddn command when sending a bind request. sasl ‐ configures the switch to use Simple Authentication and Secure Layer  (SASL) when sending a bind request. The default bind request method is login. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver binddn {dn <1‐64 characters>|key <1‐32 characters>} Configures a customized distinguished name (DN) and password. This creates a set of pre‐configured credentials that can be used for authentication when sending a bind request to the LDAP server. Note: The credentials configured through this command are used only when the switch bind mode is set to preconfig. If the bind mode is set to login, any credentials configured through this command are ignored. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver binddn Deletes the pre‐configured credentials. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver domain <1‐128 characters> Sets the domain name for the LDAP server. Enter the full path for your organization. For example: ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver domain Removes the LDAP server domain name. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 326 Table 148. LDAP Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] ldapserver enable Enables or disables the LDAP server. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver groupfilter <LDAP groups> Configures a list of LDAP groups to be searched for login permissions. Multiple groups must be separated by commas. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver groupfilter Removes the list of LDAP groups searched for login permissions. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver host <LDAP server number (1‐4)> <IP address or hostname> [port <UDP port number(1‐65535)>] [dataport|mgtport] Configures up to four external LDAP servers. The default UDP port used by LDAP is 389. Note: The IP address and port number of a LDAP server must be non‐zero. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver host <LDAP server number (1‐4)> Removes the specified external LDAP server. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver port <UDP port number (1‐65000)> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. The default port is 389. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration default ldapserver port Resets the LDAP server port to the default port number ‐ 389. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver primaryhost <IPv4 address> [dataport|mgtport] Configures the primary LDAP server with an IPv4 address. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode.
Page 327 |mgtport] Configures the primary LDAP server with an IPv6 address. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver ipv6 primaryhost Deletes the primary LDAP server. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver retransmit <1‐3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server. The default is 3 requests. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver security clear Configures LDAP to not encrypt LDAP credentials (DN and password) when sending a bind request to the LDAP server. The default security mode is clear (clear text). Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver security ldaps Configures LDAP to encrypt LDAP credentials (DN and password) using Secure LDAP (LDAPS) when sending a bind request to the LDAP server. This requires the LDAP client to present a Certificate Authority (CA) root certificate. The CA root certificate can be downloaded from the LDAP server. For more details, see page 298. The LDAP client and LDAP server must initiate a separate Transport Layer Security (TLS) session before any LDAP messages are exchanged. This is usually achieved on UDP port 636. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 328 Table 148. LDAP Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ldapserver security starttls Configures LDAP to encrypt LDAP credentials (DN and password) using Start Transport Layer Security (StartTLS) when sending a bind request to the LDAP server. This requires the LDAP client to present a Certificate Authority (CA) root certificate. The CA root certificate can be downloaded from the LDAP server. For more details, see page 298. The LDAP client and LDAP server do not need to initiate a separate TLS session before any LDAP messages are exchanged. StartTLS encrypts a non‐encrypted LDAP connection by wrapping it with TLS at any time during or after the connection has been established. Thus, there is no need to use a separate port for encrypted LDAP communication. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ldapserver security mutual Enables or disables LDAP to request the LDAP server to also provide its own Certificate Authority (CA) root certificate for authentication by the LDAP client. The LDAP server and the LDAP client both compare the other’s CA root certificate against their own. If both certificates match, the authentication succeeds. If either certificate does not match, the authentication fails. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ldapserver srv Enables or disables the switch to look up LDAP server information by retrieving a Service (SRV) record associated with LDAP from the configured Domain Name System (DNS). For more details on DNS, see “Domain Name System Configuration” on page 547. Note: This option is available only in LDAP enhanced mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver secondaryhost <IPv4 address> [dataport|mgtport] Configures the secondary LDAP server with an IPv4 address. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ldapserver secondaryhost Deletes the secondary LDAP server.
Page 329 Command Syntax and Usage no ldapserver ipv6 secondaryhost Deletes the secondary LDAP server. Note: This option is available only in LDAP legacy mode. Command mode: Global configuration ldapserver timeout <4‐15> Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration show ldapserver Displays the current LDAP server parameters. For more details, see page Command mode: All except User EXEC Typical RDNs include the following: dc (domain component). For example: dc=lenovo,dc=com  cn (common name). For example: cn=John Smith  ou (organization unit name). For example: ou=development  o (organization name). For example: o=Lenovo  street (street name). For example: street=Baker  l (locality name). For example: l=London  st (state or province name). For example: st=London  c (country name). For example: c=England  uid (user ID). For example: uid=329800735698586629295641978511506172918  © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 330: Ntp Server Configuration
NTP Server Configuration These commands allow you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. By default, this option is disabled. Table 149. NTP Server Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ntp enable Enables or disables the NTP synchronization service. Command mode: Global configuration ntp interval <5‐44640> Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes, to re‐synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. The default value is 1440. Command mode: Global configuration ntp ipv6 primaryserver {dataport|mgtport} Prompts for the port of the IPv6 primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration ntp ipv6 primaryserver <IPv6 address> [dataport|mgtport] Prompts for the IPv6 address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp ipv6 primaryserver Deletes the IPv6 primary NTP server. Command mode: Global configuration ntp ipv6 secondaryserver {dataport|mgtport} Prompts for the port of the IPv6 secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration ntp ipv6 secondaryserver <IPv6 address> [dataport|mgtport] Prompts for the IPv6 address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp ipv6 secondaryserver Deletes the IPv6 secondary NTP server.
Page 331 Prompts for the IP address or host name of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp primaryserver Deletes the primary NTP server. Command mode: Global configuration ntp offset <0‐86400> Configures the minimum offset in seconds between the switch clock and the NTP server that triggers a system log message. The default value is 300 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp offset Resets the NTP offset to the default 300 seconds value. Command mode: Global configuration ntp secondaryserver {dataport|mgtport} Prompts for the port of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration ntp secondaryserver <hostname or IP address [dataport|mgtport] Prompts for the IP address or host name of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp secondaryserver Deletes the secondary NTP server. Command mode: Global configuration ntp source loopback <1‐5> Sets the NTP source loopback interface. Command mode: Global configuration no ntp source loopback Deletes all NTP source loopback interface. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 332 Table 149. NTP Server Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] ntp synclogs Enables or disables informational logs for NTP synchronization failures. Default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration show ntp Displays the current NTP service settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 333: System Snmp Configuration
 System contact  Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string   Write community string Trap community strings  Table 150. System SNMP Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] snmpserver authenticationtrap enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver contact <1‐64 characters> Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver contact Deletes the name of the system contact. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver host <trap host IP address> <trap host community string (1‐33 characters)> Adds a trap host server. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 334 Table 150. System SNMP Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no snmpserver host <trap host IP address> Removes the trap host server. Command mode: Global configuration [no] snmpserver linktrap [port] <port alias or number> enable Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps for a specific system port. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver location <1‐64 characters> Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver location Deletes the name of the system location. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver name <1‐64 characters> Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver name Deletes the name of the system. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver readcommunity <1‐32 characters> Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is public. Command mode: Global configuration [no] snmpserver readcommunityadditional <1‐32 characters> Adds or removes an additional SNMP read community string. Up to 7 additional read community strings are supported. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver timeout <1‐30> Sets the timeout value for the SNMP state machine, in minutes.
Page 335 Table 150. System SNMP Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver trapsource {<IP interface number>|loopback <1‐5>} Configures the source interface for SNMP traps. To send traps through the management ports, specify interface 126. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver trapsource [loopback] Deletes all source interfaces for SNMP traps. The loopback option only removes the loopback source interfaces. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver writecommunity <1‐32 characters> Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private. Command mode: Global configuration [no] snmpserver writecommunityadditional <1‐32 characters> Adds or removes an additional SNMP write community string. Up to 7 additional write community strings are supported. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver Displays the current SNMP configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 336: Snmpv3 Configuration
SNMPv3 Configuration SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format   security for messages access control   remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC3411 to RFC3418. Table 151. SNMPv3 Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver access <1‐32> This command allows you to specify access rights. The View‐based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view command options, see page 340. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver community <1‐16> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version‐independent SNMP message parameters. To view command options, see page 342. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver group <1‐17> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. To view command options, see page 341. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver notify <1‐16>...
Page 337 Table 151. SNMPv3 Configuration Options (continued) snmpserver targetparameters <1‐16> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters, consisting of message processing model, security model, security level, and security name information. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters, or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. To view command options, see page 344. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver user <1‐17> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view command options, see page 338. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver view <1‐128> This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view command options, see page 339. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 338: User Security Model Configuration
User Security Model Configuration You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. These commands help you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry. Table 152. User Security Model Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver user <1‐17> authenticationprotocol {md5|sha|none} authenticationpassword This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol and password. The authentication protocol can be HMAC‐MD5‐96 or HMAC‐SHA‐96 for compatibility mode, HMAC‐SHA‐96 for security strict mode or none. The default algorithm is none. MD5 authentication protocol is not available in security strict mode if you do not select SNMPv3 account backward compatibility. When you configure an authentication algorithm, you must provide a password, otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters> This command allows you to configure a string that represents the name of the user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver user <1‐17> privacyprotocol {des|aes|none} privacypassword This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol and the privacy password. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. The options are: des (CBC‐DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol)  aes (AES‐128 Advanced Encryption Standard Protocol) ...
Page 339: Snmpv3 View Configuration
Note that the first five default vacmViewTreeFamily entries cannot be removed, and their names cannot be changed. Table 153. SNMPv3 View Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver view <1‐128> mask <1‐32 characters> This command defines the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver view <1‐128> name <1‐32 characters> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver view <1‐128> tree <1‐63 characters> This command defines MIB tree, which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver view <1‐128> type {included|excluded} This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask that define a family of view subtrees are included in or excluded from the MIB view. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver view <1‐128> Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 view <1‐128> Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 340: View‐Based Access Control Model Configuration
View-based Access Control Model Configuration The view‐based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. Table 154. View‐based Access Control Model Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver access <1‐32> level {noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv| |authPriv} Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without  authentication and without using a privacy protocol. authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with  authentication but without using a privacy protocol. authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with  authentication and using a privacy protocol. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver access <1‐32> name <1‐32 characters> Defines the name of the group. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver access <1‐32> notifyview <1‐32 characters> Defines a notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver access <1‐32> readview <1‐32 characters> Defines a read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver access <1‐32> security {usm|snmpv1|snmpv2} Allows you to select the security model to be used.
Page 341: Snmpv3 Group Configuration
Displays the View‐based Access Control configuration. Command mode: All SNMPv3 Group Configuration The following table describes the SNMPv3 Group commands. Table 155. SNMPv3 Group Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver group <1‐17> groupname <1‐32 characters> The name for the access group as defined in the following command: snmpserver access <1‐32> name <1‐32 characters> on page 338. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver group <1‐17> security {usm|snmpv1|snmpv2} Defines the security model. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver group <1‐17> username <1‐32 characters> Sets the user name as defined in the following command: snmpserver user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters> on page 338. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver group <1‐17> Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 group <1‐17> Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 342: Snmpv3 Community Table Configuration
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration These commands are used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. Table 156. SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver community <1‐16> index <1‐32 characters> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table. Command string: Global configuration snmpserver community <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters> Defines the user name as defined in the following command: snmpserver user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters> on page 338. Command string: Global configuration snmpserver community <1‐16> tag <1‐255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver community <1‐16> username <1‐32 characters> Defines a readable string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver community <1‐16> Deletes the community table entry. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 community <1‐16> Displays the community table configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 343: Snmpv3 Target Address Table Configuration
Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> address6 <IPv6 address> name <1‐32 characters> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target IPv6 address name associated with this entry. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters> address <transport IP address> Configures a transport IPv4 address that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters> address6 <transport IPv6 address> Configures a transport IPv6 address that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. IPv6 addresses are not displayed in the configuration, but they do receive traps. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> parametersname <1‐32 characters> Defines the name as defined in the following command: snmpserver targetparameters <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters> on page 344. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> port <TCP port range (1‐65535)> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> taglist <1‐255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 344: Snmpv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration
Table 157. Target Address Table Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no snmpserver targetaddress <1‐16> Deletes the Target Address Table entry. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 targetaddress <1‐16> Displays the current Target Address Table configuration. Command mode: All SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the security name and the security level (noAuthnoPriv, authNoPriv or authPriv). Table 158. Target Parameters Table Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver targetparameters <1‐16> level {noAuthNoPriv| |authNoPriv|authPriv} Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without  authentication and without using a privacy protocol. authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with  authentication but without using a privacy protocol.
Page 345: Snmpv3 Notify Table Configuration
Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration. Command mode: All SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions and generates Notification‐Class messages based on these events or conditions. Table 159. Notify Table Options Command Syntax and Usage snmpserver notify <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters> Defines a locally arbitrary, but unique, identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. Command mode: Global configuration snmpserver notify <1‐16> tag <1‐255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable, that matches the value of this tag, is selected. Command mode: Global configuration no snmpserver notify <1‐16> Deletes the notify table entry. Command mode: Global configuration show snmpserver v3 notify <1‐16> Displays the current notify table configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 346: System Access Configuration
System Access Configuration The following table describes the System Access commands. Table 160. System Access Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] access http enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser‐Based Interface. The default settings is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration access http port <TCP port number (1‐65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. Command mode: Global configuration default access http port Resets the HTTP port to the default port number ‐ 80. Command mode: Global configuration access snmp {readonly|readwrite} Enables read‐only/write‐read SNMP access. Command mode: Global configuration no access snmp Disables SNMP access. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access telnet enable Enables or disables Telnet access. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration access telnet port <TCP port number (1‐65535)> Sets an optional Telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for Telnet sessions on a non‐standard port. Command mode: Global configuration default access telnet port Resets the Telnet server port to the default port number ‐ 23. Command mode: Global configuration access tftpport <TCP port number (1‐65535)> Sets the TFTP port for the switch.
Page 347: Management Network Configuration
Command mode: Global configuration show access Displays the current system access parameters. Command mode: All Management Network Configuration These commands are used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. Table 161. Management Network Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] access managementnetwork <mgmt network IPv4 address> <mgmt network IPv4 netmask> Adds or removes a defined network through which switch access is allowed via Telnet, SNMP or the Lenovo N/OS browser‐based interface. A range of IPv4 addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IPv4 address and mask address in dotted‐decimal notation. Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, the configuration causes the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and creates a “Network Down” state on the network. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access managementnetwork <mgmt network IPv4 address> <mgmt network IPv4 netmask> {snmpro|snmprw} Adds or removes a defined IPv4 network through which SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write switch access is allowed. Specify an IPv4 address and mask address in dotted‐decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 348 Table 161. Management Network Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no access managementnetwork {snmpro|snmprw} Clears the IPv4 SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write access control list for management purposes. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access managementnetwork6 <mgmt network IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length> Adds or removes a defined network through which switch access is allowed via Telnet, SNMP or the Lenovo N/OS browser‐based interface. A range of IPv6 addresses is produced when used with a prefix length. Specify an IPv6 address in hexadecimal format with colons. Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, the configuration causes the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and creates a “Network Down” state on the network. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access managementnetwork6 <mgmt network IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length> {snmpro|snmprw} Adds or removes a defined IPv6 network through which SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write switch access is allowed. Command mode: Global configuration no access managementnetwork6 {snmpro|snmprw} Clears the IPv6 SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write access control list for management purposes. Command mode: Global configuration show access managementnetwork Displays the current management network configuration. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear access managementnetwork Removes all defined management networks. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 349: User Access Control Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage access user <1‐20> Configures the User ID. For more command options, see page 350. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access user administratorenable Enables or disables the default administrator account. Command mode: Global configuration access user administratorpassword Sets the administrator (admin) password. The administrator has complete access to all menus, information and configuration commands on the G8264CS, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. This command will prompt for required information: current admin password, new password (up to 64 characters) and confirmation of the new password. Access includes “oper” functions. Note: You cannot disable the administrator password. Command Mode: Global configuration access user eject {<user name>|sessionid <session ID>} Ejects the specified user from the G8264CS. Command mode: Global configuration access user operatorpassword Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator manages all functions of the switch. The operator can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports. This command will prompt for required information: current admin password, new password (up to 64 characters) and confirmation of the new password. Note: To disable the operator account, set the password to null (no password). The default setting is disabled (no password). Command Mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 350: System User Id Configuration
Displays the current user status. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear line <1‐12> Ejects the user with the corresponding session ID from the G8264CS. Command mode: Privileged EXEC System User ID Configuration The following table describes the System User ID commands. Table 163. User ID Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] access user <1‐20> enable Enables or disables the user ID. Command mode: Global configuration access user <1‐20> level {user|operator|administrator} Sets the Class‐of‐Service to define the user’s authority level. Lenovo N/OS defines these levels as: User, Operator and Administrator, with User being the most restricted level. Command mode: Global configuration access user <1‐20> name <1‐64 characters> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. Command mode: Global configuration access user <1‐20> password Sets the user (user) password. This command will prompt for required information: current admin password, new password (up to 64 characters) and confirmation of the new password. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 351: Strong Password Configuration
Strong Password Configuration The following table describes the Strong Password commands. Table 164. Strong Password Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage access user strongpassword clear local user {lockout|failattempts} {<username>|all} Enables locked out accounts or resets failed login counters for all users or for a specific user. Command mode: Global configuration [no] access user strongpassword enable Enables or disables Strong Password requirement. Command mode: Global configuration access user strongpassword expiry <1‐365> Configures the number of days allowed before the password must be changed. The default value is 60 days. Command mode: Global configuration access user strongpassword faillock <1‐10> Configures the number of failed login attempts that trigger the account lockout. The default value is 6 attempts. Command mode: Global configuration access user strongpassword faillog <1‐255> Configures the number of failed login attempts allowed before a security notification is logged. The default value is 3 login attempts. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 352: Https Access Configuration
The following table describes the HTTP Access commands. Table 165. HTTPS Access Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] access https enable Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. Command mode: Global configuration access https generatecertificate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. For example: Country Name (2 letter code): CA  State or Province Name (full name): Ontario  Locality Name (for example, city): Ottawa  Organization Name (for example, company): Lenovo  Organizational Unit Name (for example, section): Operations  Common Name (for example, user’s name): Mr Smith  Email (for example, email address): info@lenovo.com  You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 353  Organizational Unit Name (for example, section): Operations  Common Name (for example, user’s name): Mr Smith  Email (for example, email address): info@lenovo.com  Unlike the generatecertificate command, this command will generate a certificate request that needs to be signed by a certificate authority (CA) recognized by both parties. Command mode: Global configuration access https savecertificate Allows the client or the Web browser to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. Command mode: Global configuration access https deletecertificate Deletes the current certificate from the flash memory. Command mode: Global configuration access https port <TCP port number (1‐65535)> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. The default port is 443. Command mode: Global configuration default access https port Resets the HTTPS port to the default port number ‐ 443. Command mode: Global configuration copy {tftp|sftp} cacert [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a certificate authority root certificate using TFTP/SFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy tftp cacert address <hostname or server IP address> filename <server‐filename> [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a certificate authority root certificate using TFTP. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 354 Table 165. HTTPS Access Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage copy {tftp|sftp} hostcert [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a host certificate using TFTP/SFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy tftp hostcert address <hostname or server IP address> filename <server‐filename> [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a host certificate using TFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy {tftp|sftp} hostkey [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a host private key using TFTP/SFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy tftp hostkey address <hostname or server IP address> filename <server‐filename> [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a host private key using TFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy {tftp|sftp} publickey [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a client public key using TFTP/SFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy tftp publickey address <hostname or server IP address> filename <server‐filename> [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to import a client public key using TFTP. Command mode: Global configuration copy certrequest {tftp|ftp|sftp} address <hostname or server IP address> filename <server‐filename> [dataport|mgtport] Enables you to export a CSR to an external server using TFTP/SFTP/FTP. Command mode: Global configuration show https hostcsr pemformat Displays the generated CSR in PEM format. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show https hostcsr txtformat Displays the generated CSR in TXT format. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show access Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 355: Custom Daylight Saving Time Configuration
0070901 = September 7, at 1:00 a.m. Table 166. Custom DST Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] system customdst enable Enables or disables the Custom Daylight Saving Time settings. Command mode: Global configuration system customdst startrule <WDDMMhh> Configures the start date for custom DST, as follows: WDMMhh W = week (0‐5, where 0 means use the calendar date) D = day of the week (01‐07, where 01 is Monday) MM = month (1‐12) hh = hour (0‐23) Note: Week 5 is always considered to be the last week of the month. Command mode: Global configuration system customdst endrule <WDDMMhh> Configures the end date for custom DST, as follows: WDMMhh W = week (0‐5, where 0 means use the calendar date) D = day of the week (01‐07, where 01 is Monday) MM = month (1‐12) hh = hour (0‐23) Note: Week 5 is always considered to be the last week of the month. Command mode: Global configuration show customdst Displays the current Custom DST configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 356: Sflow Configuration
Configuration Lenovo N/OS supports sFlow version 5. sFlow is a sampling method used for monitoring high speed switched networks. Use these commands to configure the sFlow agent on the switch. Table 167. sFlow Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] sflow enable Enables or disables the sFlow agent. Command mode: Global configuration sflow port <UDP port number (1‐65000)> Configures the UDP port for the sFlow server. The default value is 6343. Command mode: Global configuration default sflow port Resets the sFlow server port to the default port number ‐ 6343. Command mode: Global configuration sflow server <IP address> [dataport|mgtport] Defines the sFlow server address and interface port. Command mode: Global configuration no sflow server Deletes the sFlow server address. Command mode: Global configuration. show sflow Displays sFlow configuration parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 357: Sflow Port Configuration
Port Configuration Use the following commands to configure the sFlow port on the switch. Table 168. sFlow Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage sflow polling <5‐60> Configures the sFlow polling interval, in seconds. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface port no sflow polling Disables sFlow polling interval. Command mode: Interface port sflow sampling <256‐65536> Configures the sFlow sampling rate, in packets per sample. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface port no sflow sampling Disables sFlow sampling rate. Command mode: Interface port © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 358: Server Port Configuration
Server Port Configuration Use these commands to define a list of server ports. Ports that are not configured as server ports are considered to be uplink ports. VMready learns Virtual Machine information only from server ports. Table 169. Server Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] system serverports port <port alias or number> Adds or removes one or more ports to the list of server ports. Command mode: Global configuration show system serverports Displays the current server port configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 359: Port Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage interface port <port alias or number> Enter Interface port mode. Command mode: Global configuration interface portchannel {<1‐64>|<65‐128>|lacp <1‐65535>} Enter Interface portchannel mode. These commands allow you to configure port parameters for all port members in the selected Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Command mode: Global configuration [no] bpduguard Enables or disables BPDU guard, to avoid Spanning‐Tree loops on ports configured as edge ports. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel description <1‐64 characters> Sets a description for the port. The assigned port description appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to the port number. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no description Removes the interface description. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel dot1p <0‐7> Configures the port’s 802.1p priority level. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel dot1x Configures 802.1X port‐based authentication. For more command options, see page 409. Command mode: Interface port [no] dscpmarking Enables or disables DSCP re‐marking on a port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 360 Table 170. Port Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] floodblocking Enables or disables port Flood Blocking. When enabled, unicast and multicast packets with unknown destination MAC addresses are blocked from the port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel ip dhcp snooping limit rate <1‐2048> Configures the maximum number of DHCP packets allowed per second. Command mode: Interface port no ip dhcp snooping limit rate Unlimits the maximum number of DHCP packets allowed per second. Command mode: Interface port [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Configures this port as a trusted port for DHCP packets from the server. Command mode: Interface port [no] learning Enables or disables FDB learning on the port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] macaddresstable macnotification Enables or disables MAC Address Notification. With MAC Address Notification enabled, the switch generates a syslog message when a MAC address is added or removed from the MAC address table. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel portchannel minlinks <1‐16> Set the minimum number of links for the LACP LAG to which this port belongs. If the specified minimum number of ports are not available, the Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is placed in the down state. Command mode: Interface port [no] reflectiverelay force Enables or disables constraint to always keep reflective relay active. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface port [no] rmon Enables or disables Remote Monitoring (RMON) on the current port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel shutdown Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its ...
Page 361 Sets the port to forward all broadcast, multicast or unicast packets. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel switchport access vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the associated VLAN used in access mode. Default value is 1 for data ports and 4095 for the management port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no switchport access vlan Resets the access VLAN to its default value. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel switchport mode {access|trunk|privatevlan} Configures the port’s trunking mode: access allows association to a single VLAN  trunk automatically adds the port to all created VLANs. To configure a  specific allowed VLAN range for the port use the command: switchport trunk allowed vlan privatevlan allows association to a private VLAN  Default mode is access. Note: When switching from access to trunk mode, the port inherits the access VLAN as the trunk Native‐VLAN. Note: When switching from trunk to access mode, the port inherits the trunk Native‐VLAN as the access VLAN. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no switchport mode privatevlan Removes private‐VLAN mode from the port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] switchport privatevlan hostassociation <primary VLAN ID (2‐4094)> <secondary VLAN ID (2‐4094)> Enables or disables the private VLAN association on a secondary port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 362 Table 170. Port Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] switchport privatevlan mapping <primary VLAN ID (2‐4094)> Enables or disables private VLAN mapping on a port in promiscuous mode. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel switchport trunk allowed vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the allowed VLANs in trunk mode for the current port or portchannel. If the allowed range does not have any existing VLANs, the lowest‐numbered VLAN is created and becomes the Native‐VLAN. If the allowed range contains an existing VLAN(s), but the Native‐VLAN is not in the allowed range, the Native‐VLAN is changed to the lowest‐numbered existing VLAN. If a new VLAN is created and it is part of the allowed VLAN range, the port will also be added to that VLAN. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel switchport trunk allowed vlan {add|remove} <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Updates the associated VLANs in trunk mode. add enables the VLAN range in addition to the current configuration. If any  VLAN in the range does not exist, it will not be created and enabled automatically. If a new VLAN is created and it is part of the allowed VLAN range, the port will also be added to that VLAN. remove eliminates the VLAN range from the current configuration. If the  Native‐VLAN is in the specified range, the smallest available VLAN from the remaining range will become the new Native‐VLAN. If the remaining range does not have any existing VLANs, the lowest‐numbered VLAN is created and becomes the Native‐VLAN. Note: The remaining VLAN range must contain at least one VLAN. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel switchport trunk allowed vlan {all|none} Updates the associated VLANs in trunk mode. all associates the port to all existing regular VLANs and to any other  VLAN that gets created afterwards. none removes the port from all currently associated VLANs and assigns the ...
Page 363 Table 170. Port Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage switchport trunk native vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the Port VLAN ID (PVID) or Native‐VLAN used to carry untagged traffic in trunk mode. If the VLAN does not exist, it is automatically created. The VLAN must be present in the port’s allowed VLAN range. The default value is 1 for data ports and 4095 for the management port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] tagpvidingress Enables or disables tagging the ingress frames with the port’s VLAN ID. When enabled, the Native VLAN (PVID) tag is inserted into untagged and 802.1Q single‐tagged ingress frames as outer VLAN ID. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] vlan dot1q tag native Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. When disabled, the VLAN tag is removed at egress from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID/Native‐vlan. The default setting is disabled. Note: In global configuration mode, this is an operational command used to set the VLAN tag persistence on all ports currently tagged at the moment of execution. VLAN tag persistence will not be set automatically for ports tagged afterwords. Also, as an operational command, it will not be dumped into the configuration file. Command mode: Global configuration/Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> Displays the specified port’s parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 364: Port Error Disable And Recovery Configuration
Port Error Disable and Recovery Configuration The Error Disable and Recovery feature allows the switch to automatically disable a port if an error condition is detected on the port. The port remains in the error‐disabled state until it is re‐enabled manually, or re‐enabled automatically by the switch after a timeout period has elapsed. The error‐disabled state of a port does not persist across a system reboot. Table 171. Port Error Disable Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] errdisable recovery Enables or disables automatic error‐recovery for the port. The default setting is enabled. Note: Error‐recovery must be enabled globally before port‐level commands become active. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> errdisable Displays the specified port’s Error Disable parameters. Command mode: All Port Link Flap Dampening Configuration The following table describes the Port Link Flap Dampening commands. Table 172. Port Link Flap Dampening Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] errdisable linkflap enable Enables or disables Link Flap Dampening on the port. For more information, ...
Page 365: Port Link Configuration
Use these commands to configure link‐level parameters for the port/portchannel. Table 173. Port Link Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] auto Enables or disables auto‐negotiation. Note: Data ports are fixed at 10000 Mbps, and cannot be set to auto‐negotiate, unless a 1 Gb SFP transceiver is used. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel duplex {full|half|auto} Sets the operating mode. The choices include: Auto negotiation (default)  Half‐duplex  Full‐duplex  Note: Data ports are fixed at full duplex. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel flowcontrol {receive|send} {on|off} Turns flow control receiving or transmiting on or off. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no flowcontrol Disables flow control on the current port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> Displays the specified port’s parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 366: Temporarily Disabling A Port
Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the following command at any prompt: RS G8264CS(config)# interface port <port alias or number> shutdown Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use a save operation. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the RackSwitch G8264CS is rebooted. See the “Operations Commands” on page 613 for other operations‐level commands. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 367: Unidirectional Link Detection Configuration
UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration UDLD commands are described in the following table. Table 174. Port UDLD Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] udld Enables or disables UDLD on the port. Command mode: Interface port [no] udld aggressive Configures the UDLD mode for the selected port, as follows: Normal: Detect unidirectional links that have mis‐connected interfaces. The  port is disabled if UDLD determines that the port is mis‐connected. Use the “no” form to select normal operation. Aggressive: In addition to the normal mode, the aggressive mode disables  the port if the neighbor stops sending UDLD probes for 7 seconds. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> udld Displays the specified port’s UDLD parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 368: Port Oam Configuration
Port OAM Configuration Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol allows the switch to detect faults on the physical port links. OAM is described in the IEEE 802.3ah standard. OAM Discovery commands are described in the following table. Table 175. Port OAM Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] oam Enables or disables OAM discovery on the current port. Command mode: Interface port [no] oam passive Enables or disables OAM discovery passive mode. In passive mode, the current port allows its peer link to initiate OAM discovery. If OAM determines that the port is in an anomalous condition, the port is disabled. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> oam Displays the specified port’s OAM parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 369: Port Acl Configuration
Port ACL Configuration The following table describes the Port ACL commands. Table 176. Port ACL Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] accesscontrol group <1‐256> Adds or removes the specified ACL group to the port. You can add multiple ACL groups to a port, but the total number of precedence levels allowed is two. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] accesscontrol list <1‐256> Adds or removes the specified ACL to the port. You can add multiple ACLs to a port, but the total number of precedence levels allowed is two. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> Adds or removes the specified IPv6 ACL to the port. You can add multiple ACLs to a port, but the total number of precedence levels allowed is two. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> accesscontrol Displays current ACL QoS parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 370: Port Wred Configuration
Port WRED Configuration These commands allow you to configure Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) parameters for a selected port. For global WRED configuration, see “Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration” on page 377. Table 177. Port WRED Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] randomdetect enable Enables or disables Random Detection and avoidance. Command mode: Interface port [no] randomdetect ecn enable Enables or disables Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN). When ECN is on, the switch marks the ECN bit of the packet (if applicable) instead of dropping the packet. ECN‐aware devices are notified of the congestion and those devices can take corrective actions. Note: ECN functions only on TCP traffic. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> randomdetect Displays current Random Detection and avoidance parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 371: Port Wred Transmit Queue Configuration
Port WRED Transmit Queue Configuration Use this menu to define WRED thresholds for the port’s transmit queues. Set each threshold between 1% and 100%. When the average queue size grows beyond the minimum threshold, packets begin to be dropped. When the average queue size reaches the maximum threshold, all packets are dropped. The probability of packet‐drop between the thresholds is defined by the drop rate. Table 178. Port WRED Transmit Queue Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> enable Enables or disables the WRED transmit queue configuration. Command mode: Interface port randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> tcp minthreshold <1‐100> maxthreshold <1‐100> droprate <1‐100> Configures the WRED thresholds for TCP traffic. Command mode: Interface port no randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> tcp Clears the WRED configuration for TCP traffic. Command mode: Interface port randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> nontcp minthreshold <1‐100> maxthreshold <1‐100> droprate <1‐100> Configures the WRED thresholds for non‐TCP traffic. Command mode: Interface port no randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> nontcp Clears the WRED configuration for non‐TCP traffic. Command mode: Interface port © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 372: Quality Of Service Configuration
Quality of Service Configuration Quality of Service (QoS) commands configure the 802.1p priority value and DiffServ Code Point value of incoming packets. This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic, and provide different priority levels. 802.1p Configuration This feature provides the G8264CS the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p bits in the packetʹs VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non‐zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value. Table 179. 802.1p Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage qos transmitqueue mapping <priority (0‐7)> <COSq number (0‐7)> Maps the 802.1p priority to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. Enter the 802.1p priority value, followed by the Class of Service queue that handles the matching traffic. Command mode: Global configuration default qos transmitqueue mapping Resets the 802.1p packet priority mapping to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration qos transmitqueue multicastmapping <priority (0‐7)> <COSq number (8‐11)> Maps the 802.1p priority to the multicast Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. Enter the 802.1p priority value, followed by the multicast Class of Service queue that handles the matching traffic. Command mode: Global configuration default qos transmitqueue multicastmapping Resets the 802.1p packet priority multicast mapping to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration qos transmitqueue weightcos <COSq number (0‐7)> <weight (0‐15)> Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the queue number, followed by the scheduling weight.
Page 373 Table 179. 802.1p Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage qos transmitqueue multicastweightcos <COSq number (8‐11)> <weight (0‐15)> Configures the weight of the selected multicast Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the multicast queue number, followed by the scheduling weight. Command mode: Global configuration default qos transmitqueue multicastweight Resets the weights of multicast Class of Service queues to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show qos transmitqueue Displays the current 802.1p parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 374: Dscp Configuration
DSCP Configuration These commands map the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets to a new value or to an 802.1p priority value. Table 180. DSCP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage qos dscp dot1pmapping <DSCP (0‐63)> <priority (0‐7)> Maps the DiffServ Code point value to an 802.1p priority value. Enter the DSCP value, followed by the corresponding 802.1p value. Command mode: Global configuration qos dscp dscpmapping <DSCP (0‐63)> <new DSCP (0‐63)> Maps the initial DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value to a new value. Enter the DSCP value of incoming packets, followed by the new value. Command mode: Global configuration [no] qos dscp remarking Globally enables or disables DSCP re‐marking. Command mode: Global configuration show qos dscp Displays the current DSCP parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 375: Control Plane Protection
 igmp (IGMP packets)  ipv4miscellaneous (IPv4 packets with IP options and TTL exception)  ipv6nd (IPv6 Neighbor Discovery packets)  lacp (LACP/Link Aggregation protocol packets)  lldp (LLDP packets)  ospf (OSPF packets)  ospf3 (OSPF3 Packets)  pim (PIM packets)  rip (RIP packets)  system (system protocols, such as tftp, ftp, telnet, ssh)  udld (UDLD packets)  vlag (VLAG packets)  vrrp (VRRP packets)  Command mode: Global configuration no qos protocolpacketcontrol packetqueuemap <packet type> Clears the selected packet type from its associated packet queue. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 376 Table 181. Control Plane Protection Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage qos protocolpacketcontrol ratelimitpacketqueue <packet queue number (0‐47)> <1‐10000> Configures the number of packets per second allowed for each packet queue. Command mode: Global configuration no qos protocolpacketcontrol ratelimitpacketqueue <packet queue number (0‐47)> Clears the packet rate configured for the selected packet queue. Command mode: Global configuration show qos protocolpacketcontrol information protocol Displays of mapping of protocol packet types to each packet queue number. The status indicates whether the protocol is running or not running. Command mode: All show qos protocolpacketcontrol information queue Displays the packet rate configured for each packet queue. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 377: Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration
Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) provides congestion avoidance by pre‐emptively dropping packets before a queue becomes full. The G8264CS implementation of WRED defines TCP and non‐TCP traffic profiles on a per‐port, per COS queue basis. For each port, you can define a transmit‐queue profile with thresholds that define packet‐drop probability. These commands allow you to configure global WRED parameters. For port WRED commands, see “Port WRED Configuration” on page 370. Table 182. WRED Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] qos randomdetect ecn enable Enables or disables Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN). When ECN is on, the switch marks the ECN bit of the packet (if applicable) instead of dropping the packet. ECN‐aware devices are notified of the congestion and those devices can take corrective actions. Note: ECN functions only on TCP traffic. Command mode: Global configuration [no] qos randomdetect enable Enables or disables Random Detection and avoidance. Command mode: Global configuration show qos randomdetect Displays current Random Detection and avoidance parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 378: Wred Transmit Queue Configuration
WRED Transmit Queue Configuration The following table describes the WRED Transmit Queue commands. Table 183. WRED Transmit Queue Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] qos randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> enable Enables or disables the WRED transmit queue configuration. Command mode: Global configuration qos randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> nontcp minthreshold <min. threshold (1‐100)> maxthreshold <max. threshold (1‐100)> droprate <drop rate (1‐100)> Configures the WRED thresholds for non‐TCP traffic. Command mode: Global configuration qos randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> tcp minthreshold <min. threshold (1‐100)> maxthreshold <max. threshold (1‐100)> droprate <drop rate (1‐100)> Configures the WRED thresholds for TCP traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no qos randomdetect transmitqueue <0‐7> {nontcp|tcp} Deletes the WRED configuration for non‐TCP or TCP traffic. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 379: Access Control Configuration
Use these commands to create Access Control Lists. ACLs define matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions. For information about assigning ACLs to ports, see “Port ACL Configuration” on page 369. Table 184. General ACL Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol group <1‐256> Configures an ACL Group. To view command options, see page 398. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> Configures an Access Control List. To view command options, see page 380. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> Configures an IPv6 Access Control List. To view command options, see page 390. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> Configures an ACL VLAN map. To view command options, see page 402. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol Displays the current ACL parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 380: Access Control List Configuration
Access Control List Configuration These commands allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL). Table 185. ACL Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> action {permit|deny| |setpriority <0‐7>} Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets or set the 802.1p priority level. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> egressport port <port alias or number> Configures the ACL to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> egressport Disables the ACL to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list <1‐256> log Enables or disables logging for the Access Control List. Note: Enabling the LOG feature neutralizes ACL deny filter actions for Telnet and SSH traffic that is addressed to the switchʹs Layer 3 interfaces. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list <1‐256> statistics Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> Resets the ACL parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> Displays the current ACL parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 381: Acl Mirroring Configuration
Displays the current port mirroring parameters for the ACL. Command mode: All Ethernet Filtering Configuration These commands allow you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL. Table 187. Ethernet Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet destinationmacaddress <MAC address> [<MAC mask>] Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet destinationmacaddress Removes the destination MAC address for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet ethernettype {arp|ip|ipv6|mpls|rarp|any|<other (0x600‐0xFFFF)>} Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet ethernettype Removes the Ethernet type for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet priority <0‐7> Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 382 Table 187. Ethernet Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet priority Removes the Ethernet priority value for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet sourcemacaddress <MAC address> [<MAC mask>] Defines the source MAC address for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet sourcemacaddress Removes the source MAC address for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> [<VLAN mask>] Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet vlan Removes VLAN number and mask for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet Removes Ethernet parameters for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> ethernet Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 383: Ipv4 Filtering Configuration
Defines a destination IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 destinationipaddress Deletes the configured destination IP address for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 protocol <0‐255> Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. If defined, traffic from the specified protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well‐known protocols. Number Name icmp igmp ospf vrrp Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 protocol Deletes the configured IP protocol for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 sourceipaddress <IP address> [<IP mask>] Defines a source IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source IP address will match this ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 sourceipaddress Deletes the configured source IP address for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 typeofservice <0‐255> Defines a Type of Service (ToS) value for the ACL. For more information on ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 384: Tcp/Udp Filtering Configuration
Table 188. IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 typeofservice Deletes the configured Type of Service (ToS) value for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> ipv4 Displays the current IPv4 parameters. Command mode: All TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration These commands allow you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL. Table 189. TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp sourceport <1‐65535> [<mask (0xFFFF)>] Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed here are some of the well‐known ports: Number Name ftpdata telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher...
Page 385 Table 189. TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp destinationport <1‐65535> [<mask (0xFFFF)>] Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number, just as with sourceport. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp destinationport Disables the configured destination port for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp flags <value (0x0‐0x3f)> [<mask (0x0‐0x3f)>] Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp flags Disables the configured TCP/UDP flag for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> tcpudp Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 386: Packet Format Filtering Configuration
Packet Format Filtering Configuration These commands allow you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL. Table 190. Packet Format Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat ethernet {ethertype2|snap|llc} Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat ip {ipv4|ipv6} Defines the IP format for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat tagging {any|none| |tagged} Defines the tagging format for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat {ethernet|ip| |tagging} Deletes the selected format for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> packetformat Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 387: Acl Metering Configuration
ACL Metering Configuration These commands define the Access Control profile for the selected ACL. Table 191. ACL Metering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter action {drop|pass} Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter committedrate <64‐10000000> Configures the committed rate, in kilobits per second. The committed rate must be a multiple of 64. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter enable Enables or disables ACL Metering. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter maximumburstsize <32‐4096> Configures the maximum burst size, in kilobits. Enter one of the following values for mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter Sets the ACL meter configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter Disables the selected ACL meter. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> meter Displays current ACL Metering parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 388 ACL Re-Mark Configuration You can choose to re‐mark IP header data for the selected ACL. You can configure different re‐mark values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile, or out of the ACL Metering profile. Table 192. ACL Re‐Marking Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage default accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark Sets the ACL re‐mark parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark Displays current re‐mark parameters. Command mode: All Re-Marking In-Profile Configuration The following table displays Re‐Marking In‐Profile configuration commands: Table 193. ACL Re‐Marking In‐Profile Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark dot1p <0‐7> Re‐marks the 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark dot1p Disables the use of 802.1p priority for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark inprofile dscp <0‐63> Re‐marks the DSCP value for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark inprofile [dscp] Deletes the re‐mark in‐profile configuration. The dscp option only disables ...
Page 389 Re-Marking Out-Profile Configuration The following table displays Re‐Marking Out‐Profile configuration commands: Table 194. ACL Re‐Marking Out‐of‐Profile Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark outprofile dscp <0‐63> Re‐marks the DSCP value on out‐of‐profile packets for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list <1‐256> remark outprofile Disables re‐marking on out‐of‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 390 ACL IPv6 Configuration These commands allow you to define filtering criteria for each IPv6 Access Control List (ACL). Table 195. IPv6 ACL Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> action {permit|deny| |setpriority <0‐7>} Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets or set the 802.1p priority level. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> egressport port <port alias or number> Configures the ACL to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> egressport port Disables the ACL to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> log Enables or disables Access Control List logging. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> statistics Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> Resets the ACL parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> Displays the current ACL parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 391 Defines a destination IPv6 address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this destination address will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 destinationaddress Deletes the configured destination IPv6 address for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 flowlabel <0‐1048575> Defines the flow label for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this flow label will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 flowlabel Deletes the configured flow label for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 nextheader <0‐255> Defines the next header value for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this next header value will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 nextheader Deletes the configured next header for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 sourceaddress <IPv6 address> [<prefix length (1‐128)>] Defines a source IPv6 address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source address will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 sourceaddress Deletes the configured source IPv6 address for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 trafficclass <0‐255> Defines the traffic class for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this traffic class will match this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 392 Table 196. IP version 6 Filtering Options Command Syntax and Usage no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 trafficclass Deletes the configured traffic class for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 Resets the IPv6 parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> ipv6 Displays the current IPv6 parameters. Command mode: All IPv6 TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration These commands allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL. Table 197. IPv6 ACL TCP/UDP Filtering Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp sourceport <source port number (1‐65535)> [<mask (0xFFFF)>] Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed here are some of the well‐known ports: Number Name ftpdata telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp...
Page 393 Table 197. IPv6 ACL TCP/UDP Filtering Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp destinationport <destination port number (1‐65535)> [<mask (0xFFFF)>] Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number, just as with sourceport above. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp destinationport Deletes the configured IPv6 destination‐port for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp flags <value (0x0‐0x3f)> [<mask (0x0‐0x3f)>] Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp flags Deletes the configured TCP/UDP flag for the specified ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> tcpudp Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 394 IPv6 Re-Mark Configuration You can choose to re‐mark IP header data for the selected ACL. You can configure different re‐mark values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL metering profile, or out of the ACL metering profile. Table 198. IPv6 Re‐Marking In‐Profile Options Command Syntax and Usage default accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark Sets the ACL re‐mark parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark Displays current re‐mark parameters. Command mode: All IPv6 Re-Marking In-Profile Configuration The following table displays IPv6 Re‐Marking In‐Profile configuration commands: Table 199. IPv6 ACL Re‐Marking In‐Profile Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark dot1p <0‐7> Re‐marks the 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol6 list6 <1‐128> remark dot1p Disables the use of 802.1p priority for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark inprofile dscp <0‐63> Re‐marks the DSCP value for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark inprofile [dscp] Deletes the re‐mark in‐profile configuration. The dscp option only disables ...
Page 395 IPv6 Re-Marking Out-Profile Configuration The following table displays IPv6 Re‐Marking Out‐Profile configuration commands: Table 200. IPv6 ACL Re‐Marking Out‐of‐Profile Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark outprofile dscp <0‐63> Re‐marks the DSCP value on out‐of‐profile packets for the ACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark outprofile Disables re‐marking on out‐of‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> remark Displays current re‐mark parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 396 IPv6 Metering Configuration These commands define the Access Control profile for the selected ACL. Table 201. IPv6 Metering Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter action {drop|pass} Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter committedrate <64‐10000000> Configures the committed rate, in kilobits per second. The committed rate must be a multiple of 64. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter enable Enables or disables ACL Metering. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter maximumburstsize <32‐4096> Configures the maximum burst size, in kilobits. Enter one of the following values for mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter Sets the ACL meter configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> meter Displays current ACL Metering parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 397 ACL Log Configuration These commands allow you to define filtering criteria for each IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) log. Table 202. ACL Log Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] accesscontrol list <1‐256> log Enables or disables Access Control List logging. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol list6 <1‐128> log Enables or disables IPv6 Access Control List logging. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol log interval <5‐600> Sets the filter log displaying interval in seconds. The default setting is 300 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol log ratelimit <1‐1000> Sets the filter log queue rate limit in packets per second (pps). The default settings is 10 pps. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol log [interval|ratelimit] Resets the specified filter log parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol log Displays the current ACL log parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 398: Acl Group Configuration
ACL Group Configuration These commands allow you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL group. Once you create an ACL group, you can assign the ACL group to one or more ports. Table 203. ACL Group Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] accesscontrol group <1‐256> list <1‐256> Adds or removes the selected IPv4 ACL to the ACL group. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol group <1‐256> list6 <1‐128> Adds or removes the selected IPv6 ACL to the ACL group. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol group <1‐256> Displays the current ACL group parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 399 Configures a filter action for packets that match the MACL definitions. You can choose to permit (pass) deny (drop) packets. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol macl <1‐128> enable Enables or disables the management ACL. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol macl <1‐128> statistics Enables or disables the statistics collection for the MACL. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol macl <1‐128> Displays the current MACL parameters. Command mode: All MACL IPv4 Filtering Configuration These commands allow you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an MACL. Table 205. IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 destinationipaddress <IP address> [<IP mask>] Defines a destination IP address for the MACL. If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will match this MACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 destinationipaddress Deletes the configured destination IP address for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 400 Table 205. IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 protocol <0‐255> Defines an IP protocol for the MACL. If defined, traffic from the specified protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well‐known protocols. Number Name icmp igmp ospf vrrp Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 protocol Deletes the configured IP protocol for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 sourceipaddress <IP address> [<IP mask>] Defines a source IP address for the MACL. If defined, traffic with this source IP address will match this MACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 sourceipaddress Deletes the configured source IP address for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 Removes all the IPv4 parameters for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol macl <1‐128> ipv4 Displays the current IPv4 parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 401 Number Name ftpdata telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> tcpudp sourceport Deletes the configured source port for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol macl <1‐128> tcpudp destinationport <1‐65535> [<mask (0xFFFF)>] Defines a destination port for the MACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this MACL. Specify the port number, just as with sourceport above. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol macl <1‐128> tcpudp destinationport Deletes the configured destination port for the specified MACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol macl <1‐128> tcpudp Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the MACL to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol macl <1‐128> tcpudp Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 402 VMAP Configuration A VLAN Map is an Access Control List (ACL) that can be assigned to a VLAN or a VM group instead of a port. In a virtualized environment where Virtual Machines move between physical servers, VLAN Maps allow you to create traffic filtering and metering policies associated with a VM’s VLAN. For more information about VLAN Map configuration commands, see “Access Control List Configuration” on page 380. For more information about assigning VLAN Maps to a VLAN, see “VLAN Configuration” on page 455. For more information about assigning VLAN Maps to a VM group, see “VM Group Configuration” on page 593. The following table lists the general VMAP configuration commands. Table 207. VMAP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> action {permit|deny|setpriority <0‐7>} Configures a filter action for packets that match the VMAP definitions. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets or set the 802.1p priority level. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> egressport <port alias or number> Configures the VMAP to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> egressport Disables the VMAP to function on egress packets. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet destinationmacaddress <MAC address> [<MAC mask>] Defines the destination MAC address for the VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet destinationmacaddress Removes the destination MAC address for the specified VMAP.
Page 403 Removes the Ethernet type for the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet priority <0‐7> Defines the Ethernet priority value for the VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet priority Removes the Ethernet priority for the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet sourcemacaddress <MAC address> [<MAC mask>] Defines the source MAC address for the VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet sourcemacaddress Removes the source MAC address for the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> [<VLAN mask>] Defines a VLAN number and mask for the VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet vlan Removes the VLAN number and mask for the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet Resets Ethernet parameters for the VMAP to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ethernet Resets Ethernet header parameters for the VMAP to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 destinationipaddress <IPv4 address> [<IPv4 mask>] Enables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on destination IP address. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 404 Table 207. VMAP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 destinationipaddress Disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on destiantion IP address. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 protocol <0‐255> Enables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on protocol. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 protocol Disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on protocol. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 sourceipaddress <IPv4 address> [<IPv4 mask>] Enables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on source IP address. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 sourceipaddress Disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on source IP address. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 typeofservice <0‐255> Enables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on type of service. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 typeofservice Disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on type of service. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> ipv4 Resets the IPv4 parameters for the VMAP to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> meter action {drop|pass} Sets VMAP port metering to drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> meter committedrate <64‐10000000> Sets the VMAP port metering control rate in kilobits per second. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> meter enable Enables or disables VMAP port metering. ...
Page 405 Resets the VMAP meter configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> mirror port <port alias or number> Sets the specified port as the mirror target. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> mirror Disables VMAP mirroring. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> packetformat ethernet {ethernettype2|llc|snap} Sets to filter the specified ethernet packet format type. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> packetformat ip {ipv4|ipv6} Sets to filter the specified IP packet format type. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> packetformat tagging {any|none| |tagged} Sets to filter the based on packet tagging. The options are: any: Filter tagged & untagged packets  none: Filter only untagged packets  tagged: Filter only tagged packets  Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> packetformat {ethernet|ip| |tagging} Disables filtering based on the specified packet format. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> packetformat Resets the VMAP packet‐format configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 406 Table 207. VMAP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark dot1p <0‐7> Sets the VMAP re‐mark configuration user update priority. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark dot1p Disables the use of dot1p for in‐profile traffic VMAP re‐mark configuration. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark {inprofile|outprofile} dscp <0‐63> Sets the VMAP re‐mark configuration user update priority for in‐profile or out‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark {inprofile| |outprofile} Removes all re‐mark in‐profile or out‐profile settings. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark inprofile dscp Disables the use of DSCP for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark usetosprecedence Enables or disables the use of the TOS precedence for in‐profile traffic. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark Resets the VMAP re‐mark parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> remark Disables re‐marking for the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration [no] accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> statistics Enables or disables statistics for this access control list. Command mode: Global configuration accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> tcpudp {sourceport| |destinationport} <1‐65535> [<port mask (0x0001 ‐ 0xFFFF)>] Sets the TCP/UDP filtering source port or destination port and port mask for this ACL.
Page 407 Table 207. VMAP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> tcpudp flags <0x0‐0x3F> [<flags mask (0x0‐0x3F)>] Sets the TCP flags for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> tcpudp Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the VMAP to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> tcpudp Removes TCP/UDP filtering for this ACL. Command mode: Global configuration default accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> Resets the VMAP parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration no accesscontrol vmap <1‐128> Deletes the specified VMAP. Command mode: Global configuration show accesscontrol vmap [<1‐128>] Displays the current VMAP parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 408: Port Mirroring
Port Mirroring Port Mirroring is disabled by default. For more information about port mirroring on the G8264CS, see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Application Guide for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4. Port Mirroring commands are used to configure, enable and disable the monitor port. When enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. Table 208. Port Mirroring Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] portmirroring enable Enables or disables port mirroring. Command mode: Global configuration show portmirroring Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. Command mode: All Port-Mirroring Configuration The following table describes the Port Mirroring commands. Table 209. Port‐Based Port‐Mirroring Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage portmirroring monitorport <port alias or number> mirroringport <port alias or number> {in|out|both} Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the monitoring port.
Page 409: Layer 2 Configuration
455. Command mode: Global configuration show layer2 Displays current Layer 2 parameters. Command mode: All 802.1X Configuration These commands allow you to configure the G8264CS as an IEEE 802.1X Authenticator, to provide port‐based network access control. Table 211. 802.1x Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] dot1x enable Globally enables or disables 802.1X. Command mode: Global configuration show dot1x Displays current 802.1X parameters. Command mode: All The following sections describe the 802.1x configuration options: “802.1X Global Configuration” on page 410   “802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration” on page 412  “802.1X Port Configuration” on page 413 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 410: X Global Configuration
802.1X Global Configuration The global 802.1X commands allow you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the switch. Table 212. 802.1X Global Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage dot1x maxrequest <1‐10> Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP‐Request packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration dot1x mode {forceunauthorized|auto|forceauthorized} Sets the type of access control for all ports: forceunauthorized ‐ the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  auto ‐ the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  RADIUS server. forceauthorized ‐ the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all  traffic. The default value is forceauthorized. Command mode: Global configuration dot1x quiettime <0‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP‐Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration [no] dot1x reauthenticate Sets the re‐authentication status to on or off. The default value is off. Command mode: Global configuration dot1x reauthenticationinterval <1‐604800> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re‐authenticating a ...
Page 411 Command Syntax and Usage dot1x servertimeout <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access‐Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP‐Response packet is determined by the current setting of radiusserver timeout <1‐10> (default is 3 seconds). Command mode: Global configuration dot1x supplicanttimeout <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP‐Request packet from the authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration dot1x transmitinterval <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP‐Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration [no] dot1x vlanassign Sets the dynamic VLAN assignment status to on or off. The default value is off. Command mode: Global configuration default dot1x Resets the global 802.1X parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show dot1x Displays current global 802.1X parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 412: X Guest Vlan Configuration
802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration The 802.1X Guest VLAN commands allow you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated ports. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions. Table 213. 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] dot1x guestvlan enable Enables or disables the 802.1X Guest VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration dot1x guestvlan vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the Guest VLAN number. Command mode: Global configuration no dot1x guestvlan vlan Removes the Guest VLAN number. Command mode: Global configuration show dot1x Displays current 802.1X parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 413: X Port Configuration
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP‐Request packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2. Command mode: Interface port dot1x mode {auto|forceauthorized|forceunauthorized} Sets the type of access control for the port: auto ‐ the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  RADIUS server. forceauthorized ‐ the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all  traffic. forceunauthorized ‐ the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  The default value is forceauthorized. Command mode: Interface port dot1x quiettime <0‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP‐Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Interface port [no] dot1x reauthenticate Sets the re‐authentication status to on or off. The default value is off. Command mode: Interface port dot1x reauthenticationinterval <1‐604800> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re‐authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re‐authentication is enabled. The default value is 3600 seconds. Command mode: Interface port © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 414 Table 214. 802.1X Port Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dot1x servertimeout <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access‐Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP‐Response packet is determined by the current setting of the radiusserver timeout <1‐10> command. Command mode: Interface port dot1x supplicanttimeout <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP‐Request packet from the authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface port dot1x transmitinterval <1‐65535> Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP‐Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface port [no] dot1x vlanassign Sets the dynamic VLAN assignment status to on or off. The default value is off. Command mode: Interface port default dot1x Resets the 802.1X port parameters to their default values. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> dot1x Displays current 802.1X port parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 415: Spanning Tree Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree loopguard Enables STP loop guard. STP loop guard prevents ports from forwarding traffic if no BPDUs are received. Ports are placed into a loop‐inconsistent blocking state until a BPDU is received. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree mode [disable|mst|pvrst|rstp] Selects and enables Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mst), Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree mode (pvrst) or Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp). The default mode is PVRST. When you select the disable option, the switch globally turns Spanning Tree off. All ports are placed into forwarding state. Any BPDU’s received are flooded. Command mode: Global configuration [no] spanningtree pvstcompatibility Enables or disables VLAN tagging of Spanning Tree BPDUs. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] spanningtree stgauto Enables or disables VLAN Automatic STG Assignment (VASA). When enabled, each time a new VLAN is configured, the switch will automatically assign the new VLAN its own STG. Conversely, when a VLAN is deleted, if its STG is not associated with any other VLAN, the STG is returned to the available pool. Notes: When using VASA, a maximum number of 255 automatically assigned  STGs is supported. VASA applies only to PVRST mode.  Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 416 Table 215. Spanning Tree Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree guard loop Enables STP loop guard. STP loop guard prevents the port from forwarding traffic if no BPDUs are received. The port is placed into a loop‐inconsistent blocking state until a BPDU is received. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel spanningtree guard root Enables STP root guard. STP root guard enforces the position of the root bridge. If the bridge receives a superior BPDU, the port is placed into a root‐inconsistent state (listening). Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel spanningtree guard none Disables STP loop guard and root guard. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no spanningtree guard Sets the Spanning Tree guard parameters to their default values. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] spanningtree linktype {p2p|shared|auto} Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match  its settings. p2p: Configures the port for Point‐To‐Point protocol.  shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a  hub). The default link type is auto. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] spanningtree portfast Enables or disables this port as portfast or edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Configures server ports as edge ports (enabled). Note: After you configure the port as an edge port, you must disable the port and then re‐enable the port for the change to take effect.
Page 417 Displays Spanning Tree information, including the status (on or off), Spanning Tree mode (RSTP, PVRST or MSTP) and VLAN membership. In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information: Priority  Hello interval  Maximum age value  Forwarding delay  Aging time  You can also see the following port‐specific STG information: Port alias and priority  Cost  State  Command mode: All show spanningtree root Displays the Spanning Tree configuration on the root bridge for each STP instance. For details, see page Command mode: All show spanningtree blockedports Lists the ports blocked by each STP instance. Command mode: All show spanningtree [vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] bridge Displays Spanning Tree bridge information. For details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 418: Mstp Configuration
MSTP Configuration Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in MSTP mode. MSTP is turned off by default and the default STP mode is PVRST. Note: When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on, VLAN 4095 is moved from Spanning Tree Group 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off, VLAN 4095 is moved back to Spanning Tree Group 128. Table 216. Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree mst configuration Enables MSTP configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] spanningtree mst <0‐32> enable Enables or disables the specified MSTP instance. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree mst <0‐32> priority <0‐65535> Configures the bridge priority for the specified MSTP instance. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096, 8192, 12288 ...) and the default value is 32768. Command mode: Global configuration no spanningtree mst <0‐32> priority Resets the bridge priority for the specified MSTP instance to the default value of 32768. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree mst forwardtime <4‐30> Configures the forward delay time in seconds. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the discarding and learning states to the forwarding state. The default value is 15. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree mst maxage <6‐40>...
Page 419 Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may traverse before it is dropped. The default value is 20 hops. Command mode: Global configuration instance <0‐32> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Map the specified VLANs to the Spanning Tree instance. If a VLAN does not exist, it is not created automatically. Note: This command becomes visible only when the spanning tree mode is MSTP. Command mode: MST configuration no instance <0‐32> vlan {<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>|all} Remove the specified VLANs or all VLANs from the Spanning Tree instance. Command mode: MST configuration name <1‐32 characters> Configures a name for the MSTP region. All devices within an MSTP region must have the same region name. Command mode: MST configuration no name Clears the name of the MSTP region. Command mode: MST configuration revision <0‐65535> Configures a revision number for the MSTP region. The revision is used as a numerical identifier for the region. All devices within an MSTP region must have the same revision number. Command mode: MST configuration no revision Resets the revision number for the MSTP region. Command mode: MST configuration default spanningtree mst <0‐32> Restores a Spanning Tree instance or range of instances to default configuration. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 420 Table 216. Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show spanningtree mst configuration Displays the current MSTP settings. Command mode: All show spanningtree mst <0‐32> information Displays current MST information for the specified instance. Command mode: All MSTP Port Configuration MSTP port parameters are used to modify MSTP operation on an individual port basis. MSTP parameters do not affect operation of RSTP/PVRST. For each port, RSTP/PVRST/MSTP is turned on by default. Table 217. MSTP Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree mst <0‐32> cost <0‐200000000> Configures the port path cost for the specified MSTP instance. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Port path cost is based on the port speed, and is calculated as follows: 1Gbps = 20000  10Gbps = 2000  The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel [no] spanningtree mst <0‐32> enable Enables or disables the specified MSTP instance on the port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel spanningtree mst <0‐32> portpriority <0‐240>...
Page 421 Table 217. MSTP Port Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree mst hellotime <1‐10> Configures the port Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds and the default is 2 seconds. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> spanningtree mstp cist Displays the current CIST port configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 422 RSTP/PVRST Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) and Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST) protocols. Table 218. RSTP/PVRST Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage boot spanningtree maxinstances {128|256} Configures the maximum number of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) that can be used on the switch. The default value is 128. Note: The switch needs to be reloaded for the configuration to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration no boot spanningtree maxinstances Reset the maximum number of STGs available on the switch to the default value of 128. Note: The switch needs to be reloaded for the configuration to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration [no] spanningtree stp <1‐256> enable Globally enables or disables Spanning Tree Protocol. STG is turned on by default. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree stp <1‐256> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Associates a VLAN with a Spanning Tree Group and requires a VLAN ID as a parameter. If the VLAN does not exist, it will be created automatically, but it will not be enabled by default. Command mode: Global configuration no spanningtree stp <1‐256> vlan {<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>|all} Breaks the association between a specified VLAN or all VLANs and a Spanning Tree Group and requires a VLAN ID as a parameter. Command mode: Global configuration default spanningtree stp <1‐256> Restores a Spanning Tree instance to its default configuration. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 423 Table 218. RSTP/PVRST Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage show boot spanningtree Displays the maximum number of currently available STGs on the switch and the maximum number of available STGs after the switch reloads. For a sample output, see page 626. Command mode: All show spanningtree stp <1‐256> Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters for the specified Spanning Tree Group. See page 71 for details about the information parameter. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 424 Bridge RSTP/PVRST Configuration Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch. STG bridge parameters include:  Bridge priority  Bridge hello time  Bridge maximum age  Forwarding delay When configuring STG bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:  2 × (forwarding delay ‐ 1) > bridge maximum age  2 × (bridge hello time + 1) < bridge maximum age Table 219. Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge forwarddelay <4‐30> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the discarding and learning states to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds and the default is 15 seconds. Note: This command does not apply to MSTP. Command mode: Global configuration no spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge forwarddelay Resets the bridge forward delay parameter to its default value of 15 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge hellotime <1‐10> Configures the bridge Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds and the default is 2 seconds. Note: This command does not apply to MSTP.
Page 425 Table 219. Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge maximumage Resets the bridge maximum age to its default value of 20 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge priority <0‐65535> Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. Enter the value in multiples of 4096. Non‐multiples are automatically rounded up to the closest valid priority. The default value is 32768. Command mode: Global configuration no spanningtree stp <1‐256> bridge priority Resets the bridge priority to its default value of 32768. Command mode: Global configuration show spanningtree [vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] bridge Displays the current Spanning Tree parameters either globally or for a specific VLAN. See page 76 for sample output. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 426 RSTP/PVRST Port Configuration By default, Spanning Tree is turned off for management ports, and turned on for data ports. STG port parameters include:  Port priority  Port path cost Table 220. Spanning Tree Port Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] spanningtree stp <1‐256> enable Enables or disables STG on the port. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel spanningtree stp <1‐256> pathcost <1‐200000000, 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Port path cost is based on the port speed, and is calculated as follows: 1Gbps = 20000  10Gbps = 2000  The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel spanningtree stp <1‐256> priority <0‐240> Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The default value is 128. RSTP/PVRST: The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...). Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default spanningtree stp <1‐256> Resets the STG configuration to its default settings. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> spanningtree stp <1‐256>...
Page 427: Forwarding Database Configuration
Forwarding Database Configuration Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB). Table 221. FDB Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage macaddresstable aging <0‐65535> Configures the aging value for FDB entries, in seconds. The default value is 300 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration macaddresstable multicast Configures multicast FDB entries. For command options, see page 428. Command mode: Global configuration macaddresstable static Configures static FDB entries. For command options, see page 429. Command mode: Global configuration show macaddresstable Display current FDB configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 428 Static Multicast MAC Configuration The following options are available to control the forwarding of known and unknown multicast packets:  All multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. This is the default switch behavior.  Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified. Unknown multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. To configure this option, define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to receive multicast packets (macaddresstable multicast).  Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified. Unknown multicast packets are dropped. To configure this option: Define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to  receive multicast packets (macaddresstable multicast). Enable Flood Blocking on ports that are not to receive multicast packets  (interface port <port alias or number>) (floodblocking). Use the following commands to configure static Multicast MAC entries in the Forwarding Database (FDB). Table 222. Static Multicast MAC Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] macaddresstable multicast <MAC address> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> <port alias or number> Adds or removes a static multicast entry. You can list ports separated by a comma ( , ) or enter a range of ports separated by a hyphen ( ). For example: macaddresstable multicast 01:00:00:23:3f:01 200 14 Command mode: Global configuration [no] macaddresstable multicast <MAC address> port <port alias or number> Adds or removes a static multicast entry for Network Load Balancing (NLB). ...
Page 429: Static Fdb Configuration
Command mode: All Static FDB Configuration Use the following commands to configure static entries in the Forwarding Database (FDB). Table 223. FDB Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] macaddresstable static <MAC address> port <port alias or number> Adds or removes a permanent FDB entry. Enter the MAC address using the following format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxx. For example, 080020123456. Command mode: Global configuration macaddresstable static <MAC address> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> {port <port alias or number>|portchannel <1‐64>|adminkey <1‐65535>} Adds a permanent FDB entry. Enter the MAC address using the following format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxx. For example, 080020123456. Command mode: Global configuration no macaddresstable static <MAC address> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Deletes permanent FDB entries. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 430 Table 223. FDB Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no macaddresstable static all [mac <MAC address>| vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Deletes all permanent FBD entries. mac deletes all permanent entries that use the specified MAC address  vlan deletes all permanent entries that use the specified vlan  Command mode: Global configuration no macaddresstable static all interface {port <port alias or number>|portchannel <1‐64>|adminkey <1‐65535>} Deletes all permanent FBD entries that use the specified port, Link Aggregation Group (LAG) or LACP admin key. Command mode: Global configuration show macaddresstable Display current FDB configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 431 ECP Configuration Use the following commands to configure Edge Control Protocol (ECP). Table 224. ECP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ecp retransmitinterval <100‐9000> Configures ECP retransmit interval in milliseconds. The default value is 1000 miliseconds. Command mode: Global configuration default ecp retransmitinterval Resets the ECP retransmit interval to the default 1000 milliseconds. Command mode: Global configuration show ecp [channels|retransmitinterval| upperlayerprotocols] Displays settings for the ECP retransmit interval or for all ECP channels or registered ULPs. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 432: Lldp Configuration
LLDP Configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP). Table 225. LLDP Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] lldp enable Globally enables or disables LLDP. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration lldp holdtimemultiplier <2‐10> Configures the message hold time multiplier. The hold time is configured as a multiple of the message transmission interval. The default value is 4. Command mode: Global configuration no lldp holdtimemultiplier Resets the message hold time multiplier to its default value of 4. Command mode: Global configuration lldp refreshinterval <5‐32768> Configures the message transmission interval, in seconds. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no lldp refreshinterval Resets the message transmission interval to its default value of 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration lldp reinitdelay <1‐10> Configures the re‐initialization delay interval, in seconds. The re‐initialization delay allows the port LLDP information to stabilize before transmitting LLDP messages. The default value is 2 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no lldp reinitdelay Resets the re‐initialization delay interval to its default value of 2 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration lldp transmissiondelay <1‐8192> Configures the transmission delay interval, in seconds. The transmit delay timer represents the minimum time permitted between successive LLDP ...
Page 433: Lldp Port Configuration
Display current LLDP configuration. Command mode: All LLDP Port Configuration Use the following commands to configure LLDP port options. Table 226. LLDP Port Options Command Syntax and Usage lldp adminstatus {tx_only|rx_only|tx_rx} Configures the LLDP transmission type for the port, as follows: Transmit only  Receive only  Transmit and receive  The default setting is tx_rx. Command mode: Interface port no lldp adminstatus Disables the LLDP transmission type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp trapnotification Enables or disables SNMP trap notification for LLDP messages. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> lldp Display current LLDP port configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 434 LLDP Optional TLV configuration Use the following commands to configure LLDP port TLV (Type, Length, Value) options for the selected port. Table 227. Optional TLV Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] lldp tlv all Enables or disables all optional TLV information types. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv dcbx Enables or disables the DCBX information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv framesz Enables or disables the Maximum Frame Size information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv linkaggr Enables or disables the Link Aggregation information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv macphy Enables or disables the MAC/Phy Configuration information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv mgmtaddr Enables or disables the Management Address information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv portdesc Enables or disables the Port Description information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv portprot Enables or disables the Port and VLAN Protocol ID information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv portvid Enables or disables the Port VLAN ID information type. Command mode: Interface port G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 435 Table 227. Optional TLV Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] lldp tlv powermdi Enables or disables the Power via MDI information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv protid Enables or disables the Protocol ID information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv syscap Enables or disables the System Capabilities information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv sysdescr Enables or disables the System Description information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv sysname Enables or disables the System Name information type. Command mode: Interface port [no] lldp tlv vlanname Enables or disables the VLAN Name information type. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> lldp Display current LLDP port configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 436 The two types of aggregation can be configured using the following portchannel ranges:  static LAGs: 1‐64  LACP LAGs: 65‐128 Up to 64 static LAGs can be configured on the G8264CS, with the following restrictions:  Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one LAG. Up to 16 ports can belong to the same LAG.   You must configure all ports in a LAG with the same properties (speed, duplex, flow control, STG, VLAN and so on). ®  Aggregation from non‐Lenovo devices must comply with Cisco ® EtherChannel technology. By default, each LAG is empty and disabled. Table 228. LAG Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] portchannel <1‐64> enable Enables or disables the current LAG. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel <1‐64> port <port alias or number> [enable] Adds a physical port or ports to the current LAG. You can add several ports, with each port separated by a comma ( , ) or a range of ports, separated by a dash ( ‐ ). The enable option also enables the current LAG. Command mode: Global configuration no portchannel <1‐64> port <port alias or number>...
Page 437 230 and Table 231. Table 229. LAG Hash Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] portchannel thash fcoe cntagid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the cntag id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash fcoe destinationid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the destination id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash fcoe fabricid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the fabric id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash fcoe originatorid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the originator id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash fcoe responderid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the responder id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash fcoe sourceid Enables or disables FCoE LAG hashing on the source id. Command mode: Global configuration [no] portchannel thash ingress Enables or disables LAG hash computation based on the ingress port. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 438 Table 229. LAG Hash Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] portchannel thash L4port Enables or disables use of Layer 4 service ports (TCP, UDP and so on) to compute the hash value. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration show portchannel hash Display current LAG hash configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 439 Layer 2 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Hash Layer 2 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) hash parameters are set globally. You can enable one or both parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:  SMAC (source MAC only)  DMAC (destination MAC only)  SMAC and DMAC Use the following commands to configure Layer 2 LAG hash parameters for the switch. Table 230. Layer 2 LAG Hash Options Command Syntax and Usage portchannel thash l2thash l2destinationmacaddress Enables Layer 2 LAG hashing on the destination MAC. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel thash l2thash l2sourcemacaddress Enables Layer 2 LAG hashing on the source MAC. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel thash l2thash l2sourcedestinationmac Enables Layer 2 LAG hashing on both the source and destination MAC. Command mode: Global configuration show portchannel hash Displays the current LAG hash settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 440 Layer 3 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Hash Layer 3 Link Aggregation Group (LAG) hash parameters are set globally. You can enable one or both parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:  SIP (source IP only)  DIP (destination IP only)  SIP and DIP Use the following commands to configure Layer 3 LAG hash parameters for the switch. Table 231. Layer 3 LAG Hash Options Command Syntax and Usage portchannel thash l3thash l3destinationipaddress Enables Layer 3 LAG hashing on the destination IP address. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel thash l3thash l3sourceipaddress Enables Layer 3 LAG hashing on the source IP address. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel thash l3thash l3sourcedestinationip Enables Layer 3 LAG hashing on both the source and the destination IP address. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel thash l3thash l3usel2hash Enables use of Layer 2 hash parameters only. When enabled, Layer 3 hashing parameters are cleared. Command mode: Global configuration show portchannel hash Displays the current LAG hash settings.
Page 441 Command mode: Global configuration vlag autorecovery <240‐3600> Sets the duration in seconds of the auto‐recovery timer. This timer configures how log after boot‐up configuration load, the switch can assume the Primary role from an unresponsive ISL peer and bring up the vLAG ports. The default value is 300 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag autorecovery Sets the auto‐recovery timer to the default 300 seconds duration. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vlag enable Enables or disables vLAG globally. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vlag peergateway Enables or disables the forwarding of packets intended for the switch’s vLAG peer. If a packet is received by the switch, but has the MAC address of its vLAG peer, it will be locally forwarded without crossing the vLAG inter‐switch link (ISL), thus avoiding the loss of traffic. If the vLAG peer gateway is disabled, packets addressed to the vLAG peer are sent across the ISL and then dropped by the vLAG peer. The default settings is disabled. Note: The vLAG peer gateway must be configured on both vLAG peers. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vlag portchannel <1‐64> enable Enables or disables vLAG on the selected LAG. Command mode: Global configuration vlag priority <0‐65535> Configures the vLAG priority for the switch, used for election of Primary and Secondary vLAG switches. The switch with lower priority is elected to the role of Primary vLAG switch. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 442 Table 232. vLAG Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no vlag priority Resets the vLAG priority of the switch to its default value of 0. Command mode: Global configuration vlag startupdelay <0‐3600> Sets, in seconds, the vLAG startup delay interval. The default value is 120 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag startupdelay Sets the vLAG startup‐delay timer to the default 120 seconds duration. Command mode: Global configuration vlag tierid <1‐512> Sets the vLAG peer ID. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag tierid Resets the vLAG peer ID to its default value of 0. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vlag vrrp active Enables or disables vLAG VRRP active mode. Note: If active mode is disabled, the switch will be in passive mode. In active mode, Layer 3 traffic is forwarded in all vLAG related VRRP domains. In passive mode, Layer 3 traffic is forwarded in a vLAG related VRRP domain only if either the switch or its peer virtual router is the VRRP master. Command mode: Global configuration show vlag Displays current vLAG parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 443 The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag hlthchk connectretryinterval Resets the vLAG health check connect retry interval to its default value of 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration vlag hlthchk keepaliveattempts <1‐24> Sets the number of vLAG keep alive attempts. The default value is 3. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag hlthchk keepaliveattempts Resets the number of vLAG keep alive attempts to the default value of 3. Command mode: Global configuration vlag hlthchk keepaliveinterval <2‐300> Sets, in seconds, the time between vLAG keep alive attempts. The default value is 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag hlthchk keepaliveinterval Resets the time between vLAG keep alive attempts to the default value of 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration vlag hlthchk peerip {<IPv4 address>|<IPv6 address>} Configures the IP address of the peer switch, used for health checks. Use the management IP address of the peer switch. For example:  IPv4 address: 100.20.0.103  IPv6 address: 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234 Command mode: Global configuration no vlag hlthchk peerip Deletes the IP address of the peer switch, used for health checks. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 444 vLAG ISL Configuration These commands allow you to configure a dedicated inter‐switch link (ISL) for synchronization between vLAG peers. Table 234. vLAG ISL Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage vlag isl adminkey <1‐65535> Enables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) on the selected LACP admin key. LACP Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) formed with this admin key will be included in the ISL. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag isl adminkey Disables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) for LACP admin keys. Command mode: Global configuration vlag isl portchannel <1‐64> Enables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) on the selected LAG. Command mode: Global configuration no vlag isl portchannel Disables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) for LAGs. Command mode: Global configuration show vlag isl Displays current vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 445: Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration
The default value is 32768. Command mode: Global configuration default lacp systempriority Resets the priority value for the switch to its default value of 32768. Command mode: Global configuration lacp timeout {short|long} Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. Choose short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds). The default value is long. Note: To reduce LACPDU processing, use a timeout value of long. If your G8264CS’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or more, consider using static Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) instead of LACP. Command mode: Global configuration default lacp timeout Resets the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner to its default value of long. Command mode: Global configuration default lacp Resets the LACP system configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration portchannel <65‐128> lacp key <1‐65535> Enables a static LACP LAG. In this mode, ports sharing the same LACP admin key can form a single LAG, with the specified LAG ID. The active LAG is picked based on the ports which occupy first the LAG ID. Member ports that cannot join this LAG are prohibited from forming secondary LACP groups. Instead, they are set in a suspended state where they discard all non‐LACP traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no portchannel <65‐128> Deletes a static LACP LAG. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 446: Lacp Port Configuration
Table 235. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage no lacp <1‐65535> Deletes a selected LACP LAG, based on its admin key. This command is equivalent to disabling LACP on each of the ports configured with the same admin key. Command mode: Global configuration show lacp Display current LACP configuration. Command mode: All LACP Port Configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the selected port. Table 236. LACP Port Options Command Syntax and Usage lacp key <1‐65535> Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form a LACP LAG group. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default lacp key Resets the LACP admin key of the port to the default value. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel lacp mode {off|active|passive} Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows: off turns LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually  configure a static LAG. active turns LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate ...
Page 447 The default value is 32768. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default lacp priority Resets the priority value for the port to its default value of 32768. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel lacp suspendindividual Sets the port in LACP suspended state if it does not receive LACPDUs anymore. Note: The default value is suspended for all switch ports. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel no lacp suspendindividual Sets the port in LACP individual state if it does not receive LACPDUs anymore. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default lacp suspendindividual Resets the LACP state of the port to its default value. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default lacp Resets the LACP port configuration to its default values. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel portchannel minlinks <1‐16> Set the minimum number of links for the LACP LAG to which this port belongs. If the specified minimum number of ports are not available, the LAG is placed in the down state. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel default portchannel minlinks Restores the minimum number of links for this port to its default value. Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel show interface port <port alias or number> lacp Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 448: Layer 2 Failover Configuration
Layer 2 Failover Configuration Use these commands to configure Layer 2 Failover. For more information about Layer 2 Failover, see “High Availability” in the Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Application Guide for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4. Table 237. Layer 2 Failover Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] failover enable Globally enables or disables Layer 2 Failover. Command mode: Global configuration show failover trigger Displays current Layer 2 Failover parameters. Command mode: All Failover Trigger Configuration The following table describes the Failover Trigger commands. Table 238. Failover Trigger Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] failover trigger <1‐8> enable Enables or disables the Failover trigger. Command mode: Global configuration failover trigger <1‐8> limit <0‐1024> Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event. If you enter a value of zero (0), the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational. Command mode: Global configuration no failover trigger <1‐8>...
Page 449 Failover Manual Monitor Port Configuration Use these commands to define the port link(s) to monitor. The Manual Monitor Port configuration accepts any non‐management port. Table 239. Failover Manual Monitor Port Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor adminkey <1‐65535> Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor Port configuration. LACP Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor Port configuration. Command mode: Global configuration [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor member <port alias or number> Adds or removes the selected port to the Manual Monitor Port configuration. Command mode: Global configuration [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor portchannel <1‐64> Adds or removes the selected LAG to the Manual Monitor Port configuration. Command mode: Global configuration show failover trigger <1‐8> Displays the current Failover settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 450 Failover Manual Monitor Control Configuration Use these commands to define the port link(s) to control. The Manual Monitor Control configuration accepts any non‐management port. Table 240. Failover Manual Monitor Control Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control adminkey <1‐65535> Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor Control configuration. LACP Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor Control configuration. Command mode: Global configuration [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control member <port alias or number> Adds or removes the selected port to the Manual Monitor Control configuration. Command mode: Global configuration [no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control portchannel <1‐64> Adds or removes the selected LAG to the Manual Monitor Control configuration. Command mode: Global configuration show failover trigger <1‐8> Displays the current Failover settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 451: Hot Links Configuration
Hot Links Configuration Use these commands to configure Hot Links. For more information about Hot Links, see “Hot Links” in the Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS Application Guide for Lenovo Enterprise Network Operating System 8.4. Table 241. Hot Links Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] hotlinks bpdu Enables or disables flooding of Spanning‐Tree BPDUs on the active Hot Links interface when the interface belongs to a Spanning Tree group that is globally turned off. This feature can prevent unintentional loop scenarios (for example, if two uplinks come up at the same time). The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] hotlinks enable Globally enables or disables Hot Links. Command mode: Global configuration [no] hotlinks fdbupdate Enables or disables FDB Update, which allows the switch to send FDB and MAC update packets over the active interface. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks fdbupdaterate <10‐1000> Configures the FDB Update rate in packets per second. Command mode: Global configuration show hotlinks Displays current Hot Links parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 452 Hot Links Trigger Configuration The following table describes the Hot Links Trigger commands. Table 242. Hot Links Trigger Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] hotlinks trigger <1‐25> enable Enables or disables the Hot Links trigger. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> forwarddelay <0‐3600> Configures the Forward Delay interval, in seconds. The default value is 1 second. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> name <1‐32 characters> Defines a name for the Hot Links trigger. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> name Removes the name of the specified Hot Links trigger. Command mode: Global configuration [no] hotlinks trigger <1‐25> preemption Enables or disables pre‐emption, which allows the Master interface to transition to the Active state whenever it becomes available. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> Deletes the Hot Links trigger. Command mode: Global configuration show hotlinks trigger <1‐25> Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 453 Hot Links Master Configuration Use the following commands to configure the Hot Links Master interface. Table 243. Hot Links Master Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master adminkey <1‐65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the Master interface. LACP Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) formed with this admin key will be included in the Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master adminkey Clears all LACP admin keys on the Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master port <port alias or number> Adds the selected port to the Hot Links Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master port Clears all ports added to the Hot Links Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master portchannel <1‐64> Adds the selected LAG to the Hot Links Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> master portchannel Clears all LAGs added to the Hot Links Master interface. Command mode: Global configuration show hotlinks trigger <1‐25> Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 454 Hot Links Backup Configuration Use the following commands to configure the Hot Links Backup interface. Table 244. Hot Links Backup Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup adminkey <1‐65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the Hot Links Backup interface. LACP Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) formed with this admin key will be included in the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup adminkey Clears all LACP admin keys on the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup port <port alias or number> Adds the selected port to the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup port Clears all ports added to the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup portchannel <1‐64> Adds the selected LAG to the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration no hotlinks trigger <1‐25> backup portchannel Clears all LAGs added to the Hot Links Backup interface. Command mode: Global configuration show hotlinks trigger <1‐25> Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 455: Vlan Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Enter VLAN configuration mode. If the specified VLAN(s) doesn’t exist, it will be created. Command mode: Global configuration name <1‐32 characters> Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default VLAN name is the first one. Command mode: VLAN no name Removes the assigned name from the current VLAN. Command mode: VLAN protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> Configures the Protocol‐based VLAN (PVLAN). For command options, see page 456. Command mode: VLAN shutdown Disables local traffic on the specified VLAN. The default setting is enabled (no shutdown). Command mode: VLAN no shutdown Enables local traffic on the specified VLAN. This is the default setting. Command mode: VLAN stg <1‐256> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. Note: For MST no VLAN assignation is required. VLANs are mapped from CIST. Command mode: VLAN © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 456 Table 245. VLAN Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] vmap <1‐128> [serverports|nonserverports] Adds or removes a VLAN Map to the VLAN membership. You can choose to limit operation of the VLAN Map to server ports only or non‐server ports only. If you do not select a port type, the VMAP is applied to the entire VLAN. Command mode: VLAN no vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Deletes the specified VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration show vlan information Displays the current VLAN configuration. Command mode: All Note: All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1. You cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. Also, you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on. Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Use the following commands to configure Protocol‐based VLAN for the selected VLAN. Table 246. Protocol VLAN Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> enable Enables or disables the selected protocol on the VLAN. Command mode: VLAN protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> frametype {ether2|llc|snap} <ethernet type>...
Page 457 Novell IPX SNAP  netbios: NetBIOS 802.2  rarpEther2: Reverse ARP  sna802.2: SNA 802.2  snaEther2: IBM SNA Service on Ethernet  vinesEther2: Banyan VINES  xnsEther2: XNS Compatibility  Command mode: VLAN [no] protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> tagpvlan <port alias or number> Adds or removes a port that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN. Command mode: VLAN no protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN. Command mode: VLAN show protocolvlan <protocol number (1‐8)> Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 458: Private Vlan Configuration
Private VLAN Configuration Use the following commands to configure Private VLANs. Table 247. Private VLAN Options Command Syntax and Usage privatevlan association [add|remove] <secondary VLAN list> Configures Private VLAN mapping between a primary VLAN and secondary VLANs. If no optional parameter is specified, the list of secondary VLANs, replaces the currently associated secondary VLANs. Otherwise: add appends the secondary VLANs to the ones currently associated  remove excludes the secondary VLANs from the ones currently associated  Command mode: VLAN [no] privatevlan community Enables or disables the VLAN type as a community VLAN. Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN may have multiple community VLANs. Command mode: VLAN [no] privatevlan isolated Enables or disables the VLAN type as an isolated VLAN. The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN. Command mode: VLAN [no] privatevlan primary Enables or disables the VLAN type as a Primary VLAN. A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN. Command mode: VLAN show vlan privatevlan [type] Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN(s). type lists only the VLAN type for each private VLAN: community, isolated,  or primary Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 459 Command Syntax and Usage [no] flood Enables or disables the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast traffic to all ports. The default setting is enabled. Note: If none of the IGMP hosts reside on the VLAN of the streaming server for a IPMC group, you must enable IGMP flooding to ensure that multicast data is forwarded across the VLANs for that IPMC group. Command mode: VLAN [no] cpu Enables or disables the switch to forward unregistered IP multicast traffic to the MP, which adds an entry in the IPMC table, as follows: If no Mrouter is present, drop subsequent packets with same IPMC.  If a Mrouter is present, forward subsequent packets to the Mrouter(s) on the  ingress VLAN. The default setting is enabled. Note: If both flood and cpu are disabled, the switch drops all unregistered IPMC traffic. Command mode: VLAN [no] optflood Enables or disables optimized flooding. When enabled, optimized flooding avoids packet loss during the learning period. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: VLAN show vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> information Displays the current flooding parameters for the selected VLAN. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 460: Layer 3 Configuration
Layer 3 Configuration The following table describes basic Layer 3 Configuration commands. The following sections provide more detailed information and commands Table 249. Layer 3 Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage interface ip <1‐128> Configures the IP Interface. The G8264CS supports up to 128 IP interfaces. To view command options, see page 462. Command mode: Global configuration ip pim component <1‐2> Enters Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) component configuration mode. To view command options, see page 562. Command mode: Global configuration ip routerid <IP address> Sets the router ID. Command mode: Global configuration no ip routerid Removes the router ID. Command mode: Global configuration routemap <1‐64> Enters IP Route Map mode. To view command options, see page 476. Command mode: Global configuration router bgp Enters Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) configuration mode. To view command options, see page 512. Command mode: Global configuration router ospf Enters OSPF configuration mode. To view command options, see page 485.
Page 461 Table 249. Layer 3 Configuration Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage router vrrp Enters Virtual Router Redundancy (VRRP) configuration mode. To view command options, see page 551. Command mode: Global configuration show ip information Displays all IP information. Command mode: All show layer3 Dumps all Layer 3 switch information available (10K or more, depending on your configuration). If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data before issuing the dump commands. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 462: Ip Interface Configuration
IP Interface Configuration The G8264CS supports up to 128 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the switch on an IP subnet on your network. Interface 127 and interface 128 are reserved for switch management. The interface option is disabled by default. Table 250. IP Interface Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage interface ip <1‐128> Enter IP interface mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] enable Enables or disables this IP interface. Command mode: Interface IP ip address <IP address> [<IP netmask>] [enable] Configures the IP address of the switch interface, using dotted decimal notation. The enable option also enables the IP interface. Command mode: Interface IP ip netmask <IP netmask> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface, using dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 address <IPv6 address> [<IPv6 prefix length> [anycast]] [enable] Configures the IPv6 address of the switch interface, using hexadecimal format with colons. The anycast option configures the IPv6 address as an IPv6 anycast address. The enable option also enables the IP interface. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 prefixlen <IPv6 prefix length (1‐128)> Configures the subnet IPv6 prefix length. The default value is 0 (zero). Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 secaddr6 address <IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length> [anycast] Configures the secondary IPv6 address of the switch interface, using hexadecimal format with colons. The anycast option configures the secondary IPv6 address as an IPv6 anycast address. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 secaddr6 address Removes the secondary IPv6 address.
Page 463 IP Interface Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] ipv6 unreachables Enables or disables sending of ICMP Unreachable messages. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip6host Enables or disables the IPv6 Host Mode on this interface. The default setting is disabled for data interfaces, and enabled for the management interface. Command mode: Interface IP [no] relay Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. IPv4: Each VLAN can contain multiple IPv4 interfaces. IPv6: Each VLAN can contain only one IPv6 interface. Note: Assigning VLANs only applies to in‐band management IP interfaces 1 and 2. Default is VLAN 1 if not configured. Command mode: Interface IP no interface ip <1‐128> Removes this IP interface. Command mode: Global configuration show interface ip [<1‐128>] Displays the current interface settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 464: Ipv6 Neighbor Discovery Configuration
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Configuration The following table describes the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery configuration commands. Table 251. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ipv6 nd advmtu Enables or disables the MTU option in Router Advertisements. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd dadattempts <1‐10> Configures the maximum number of duplicate address detection attempts. The default value is 1. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd dadattempts Resets the maximum number of duplicate address detection attempts to the default value of 1. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd hopslimit <0‐255> Configures the Router Advertisement hop limit. The default value is 64 hops. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd hopslimit Resets the IPv6 Router Advertisement hop limit to its default value of 64 hops. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 nd managedconfig Enables or disables the managed address configuration flag of the interface. When enabled, the host IP address can be set automatically through DHCP. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 nd otherconfig Enables or disables the other stateful configuration flag, which allows the interface to use DHCP for other stateful configuration. The default setting is disabled.
Page 465 Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd rainterval Resets the IPv6 Router Advertisement maximum interval to its default value of 600 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd raintervalmin <3‐1800> Configures the Router Advertisement minimum interval. The default value is 198 seconds. Note: Set the minimum RA interval to a value less than or equal to 0.75 of the maximum RA interval. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd raintervalmin Resets the IPv6 Router Advertisement minimum interval to its default value of 198 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd ralifetime <0‐9000> Configures the IPv6 Router Advertisement lifetime interval. The RA lifetime interval must be greater than or equal to the RA maximum interval (advint). The default value is 1800 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd ralifetime Resets the IPv6 Router Advertisement lifetime interval to its default value of 1800 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd reachabletime <1‐3600> ipv6 nd reachabletime <1‐3600000> ms Configures the advertised reachability time, in seconds or milliseconds (ms). The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd reachabletime Resets the advertised reachability time to its default value of 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 466 Table 251. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 nd retransmittime <0‐4294967> ipv6 nd retransmittime <0‐4294967295> ms Configures the Router Advertisement re‐transmit timer, in seconds or milliseconds (ms). The default value is 1 second. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 nd retransmittime Resets the Router Advertisement re‐transmit timer to its default value of 1 second. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 nd suppressra Enables or disables IPv6 Router Advertisements on the interface. The default setting is disabled (suppress Router Advertisements). Command mode: Interface IP G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 467: Default Gateway Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage ip gateway <1‐4> address <IP address> [enable] Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. The enable option also enables the IP gateway. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip gateway <1‐4> arphealthcheck Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. The default setting is disabled. Note: The arp option does not apply to management gateways. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip gateway <1‐4> enable Enables or disables the gateway for use. Command mode: Global configuration ip gateway <1‐4> interval <0‐60> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. This command sets the time between health checks. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds and the default is 2 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration ip gateway <1‐4> retry <1‐120> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts and the default is 8 attempts. Command mode: Global configuration no ip gateway <1‐4> Deletes the gateway from the configuration. Command mode: Global configuration show ip gateway <1‐4> Displays the current gateway settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 468: Ipv4 Static Route Configuration
IPv4 Static Route Configuration Up to 128 IPv4 static routes can be configured. Table 253. IPv4 Static Route Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip route <IP subnet> <IP netmask> <IP nexthop> [<IP interface number>| |port <port alias or number>] Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address, destination subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration no ip route <IP subnet> <IP netmask> [<IP interface number>|<IP nexthop> [<IP interface number>]|port <port alias or number>] Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration ip route ecmphash [dipsip|sip] Configures ECMP hashing parameters. You may choose one or more of the following parameters: dipsip: Destination IP and source IP address  sip: Source IP address  Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip route healthcheck Enables or disables static route health checks. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration ip route interval <1‐60> Configures the ECMP health‐check ping interval, in seconds. The default value is 1 second. Command mode: Global configuration ip route retries <1‐60>...
Page 469 Table 253. IPv4 Static Route Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no ip route destinationaddress <IP address> Clears all IP static routes with this destination. Command mode: Global configuration no ip route gateway <IP address> Clears all IP static routes that use this gateway. Command mode: Global configuration no ip route interface <IP interface number> Clears all IP static routes that use the specified IP interface. Command mode: Global configuration no ip route port <port alias or number> Clears all IP static routes that use the specified port. Command mode: Global configuration show ip route static Displays the current IP static routes. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 470: Ip Multicast Route Configuration
IP Multicast Route Configuration The following table describes the IP Multicast (IPMC) route commands. Note: Before you can add an IPMC route, IGMP must be turned on, IGMP Snooping/Relay must be enabled, and the required VLANs must be added to IGMP Snooping/Relay. Table 254. IP Multicast Route Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip mroute <IPMC destination> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> <port alias or number> [{primary|backup|host} [<virtual router ID>]] Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN and member port of the route must be specified. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip mroute <IP address> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> portchannel <1‐64> [{primary|backup|host} [<virtual router ID>]] Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN, and member Link Aggregation Group (LAG) of the route must be specified. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip mroute <IP address> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> adminkey <1‐65535> [{primary|backup|host} [<virtual router ID>]] Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN, and LACP admin key of the route must be specified. Command mode: Global configuration no ip mroute all Removes all the static multicast routes configured. Command mode: Global configuration show ip mroute Displays the current IP multicast routes. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 471: Arp Configuration
Command mode: Global configuration show [ip] arp Displays the current ARP configurations. Command mode: All ARP Static Configuration Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learned dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. Table 256. ARP Static Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip arp <IP address> <MAC address> [vlan < VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] [port <port alias or number>] Adds a permanent ARP entry. To enable ARP on a LAG, add the port number of a member of the LAG. Command mode: Global configuration ip arp <destination unicast IP address> <destination multicast MAC address> vlan <cluster vlan number> Adds a static multicast ARP entry for Network Load Balancing (NLB). Command mode: Global configuration no ip arp <IP address> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 472 Table 256. ARP Static Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no ip arp all [ip <IP interface number>|interface port <port alias or number>|vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Deletes all static ARP entries or just the ARP entries that use a specific IP interface, port or vlan. Command mode: Global configuration show [ip] arp static Displays current static ARP configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 473: Dynamic Arp Inspection Configuration
Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a security feature that enables the device to intercept and examine all ARP request and response packets in a subnet and discard those packets with invalid IP to MAC address bindings. DAI uses information gathered by DHCP Snooping to validate ARP information that travels through ports marked as being not trusted. Table 257. Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip arp inspection vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Enables or disables DAI on the selected VLANs. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip arp inspection trust Configures the current port to be a DAI trusted port. On a DAI trusted port, all ARP packets skip the security check. The default settings is untrusted. Note: Configuring trusted interfaces as being untrusted can result in a loss of connectivity. Command mode: Interface port [no] logging log arpinspection Enables or disables logging for DAI. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration show ip arp inspection Displays the current DAI configuration settings. For mode details, see page Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 474: Ip Forwarding Configuration
IP Forwarding Configuration The following table describes the IP Forwarding commands. Table 258. IP Forwarding Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip routing Enables or disables IP forwarding (routing) on the G8264CS. Forwarding is turned on by default. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip routing directedbroadcasts Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip routing icmp6redirect Enables or disables IPv6 ICMP re‐directs. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip routing noicmpredirect Enables or disables ICMP re‐directs. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration show ip routing Displays the current IP forwarding settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 475: Network Filter Configuration
Network Filter Configuration The following table describes the Network Filter commands. Table 259. IP Network Filter Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip matchaddress <1‐256> <IP address> <IP netmask> Sets the starting IP address and IP Netmask for this filter to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default address is 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Global configuration. [no] ip matchaddress <1‐256> enable Enables or disables the Network Filter configuration. Command mode: Global configuration no ip matchaddress <1‐256> Deletes the Network Filter configuration. Command mode: Global configuration show ip matchaddress [<1‐256>] Displays the current the Network Filter configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 476: Routing Map Configuration
Routing Map Configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information. Note: The map number (1‐64) represents the routing map you wish to configure. Table 260. Routing Map Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage routemap <1‐64> Enter route map configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration accesslist <1‐32> Configures the Access List. For more information, see page 479. Command mode: Route map aspathlist <1‐8> Configures the Autonomous System (AS) Filter. For more information, see page 480. Command mode: Route map aspathpreference <1‐65535> Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. You can configure up to 32 path preferences. Command mode: Route map no aspathpreference Removes the AS path preference of the current route map. Command mode: Route map [no] enable Enables or disables the route map. Command mode: Route map localpreference <0‐4294967294> Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred. Command mode: Route map no localpreference Removes the local preference of the current route map.
Page 477 Assigns the type of OSPF metric. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external  metrics. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics.  Type 1 routes are preffered over Type 2. The default is Type 1. Command mode: Route map no metrictype Removes the OSPF metric of the current route map. Command mode: Route map precedence <1‐255> Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the precedence. The default value is 10. Command mode: Route map set community [<community string>|none] Sets the BGP community attribute. Enter up to 32 communities strings using the format, aa:nn. For example, 12:34. Valid strings are from 0:0 to 65535:65535. The none option removes the community attribute from prefix that passed the route‐map. Command mode: Route map no set community Removes the BGP community attribute from the route map configuration. Command mode: Route map weight <0‐65534> Sets the weight of the route map. Command mode: Route map no weight Deletes the weight of the current route map. Command mode: Route map © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 478 Table 260. Routing Map Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no routemap <1‐64> Deletes the route map. Command mode: Global configuration show routemap [<1‐64>] Displays the current route configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 479: Ip Access List Configuration
Note: The access list number (1‐32) represents the IP access list you wish to configure. Table 261. IP Access List Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage accesslist <1‐32> action {permit|deny} Permits or denies action for the access list. Command mode: Route map [no] accesslist <1‐32> enable Enables or disables the access list. Command mode: Route map [no] accesslist <1‐32> matchaddress <1‐256> Sets the network filter number. See “Network Filter Configuration” on page 475 for details. Command mode: Route map accesslist <1‐32> metric <1‐4294967294> Sets the metric value in the AS‐External (ASE) LSA. Command mode: Route map no accesslist <1‐32> metric Removes the current metric value for the specified access list. Command mode: Route map no accesslist <1‐32> Deletes the access list. Command mode: Route map show routemap <1‐64> accesslist <1‐32> Displays the current Access List configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 480: Autonomous System Filter Path Configuration
Autonomous System Filter Path Configuration Note: The path number represents the AS path you wish to configure. Table 262. AS Filter Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage aspathlist <1‐8> action {permit|deny} Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. Command mode: Route map aspathlist <1‐8> aspath <1‐65535> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. Command mode: Route map [no] aspathlist <1‐8> enable Enables or disables the Autonomous System filter. Command mode: Route map no aspathlist <1‐8> Deletes the Autonomous System filter. Command mode: Route map show routemap <1‐64> aspathlist <1‐8> Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 481: Routing Information Protocol Configuration
Routing Information Protocol Configuration RIP commands are used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is turned off by default. Table 263. Routing Information Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage router rip Enter Router RIP configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] enable Globally enables or disables RIP. Command mode: Router RIP [no] redistribute {ebgp|eospf|fixed|ibgp|ospf|static} Configures RIP route distribution. To view command options, see page 484. Command mode: Router RIP timers update <1‐120> Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates, in seconds. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Router RIP show ip rip Displays the current RIP configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 482: Rip Interface Configuration
RIP Interface Configuration The RIP Interface commands are used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters for the selected interface. Note: Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. Table 264. RIP Interface Options Command Syntax and Usage ip rip authentication key <password> Configures the authentication key password. Command mode: Interface IP no ip rip authentication key Removes the authentication key password. Command mode: Interface IP ip rip authentication type password <password> Configures the authentication type. The default is none. Command mode: Interface IP no ip rip authentication type Removes the authentication type. Command mode: Interface IP ip rip defaultaction {listen|supply|both} When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but gives them lower priority than configured default gateways. The default value is none. Command mode: Interface IP no ip rip defaultaction Configures the switch to reject RIP default routes. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip enable Enables or disables RIP on the current interface. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip listen When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers.
Page 483 Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip multicastupdates Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address 224.0.0.9). The default value is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip poison When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When disabled, the switch uses only split horizon. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip splithorizon Enables or disables split horizon. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip supply When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip rip triggered Enables or disables Triggered Updates. Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence. When enabled, Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately, even if it is not yet time for the update message. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP ip rip version {1|2|both} Configures the RIP version used by this IP interface. The default value is version 2. Command mode: Interface IP show interface ip <1‐128> rip Displays the current settings for the RIP interface. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 484: Rip Route Redistribution Configuration
RIP Route Redistribution Configuration The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribution commands. Table 265. RIP Redistribution Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp} {<1‐64>|all} Adds or removes selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list. To add specific route maps, enter routing map numbers, separated by a comma(,). To add or remove all 64 route maps, type all. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. Command mode: Router RIP redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp} export <metric number (1‐15)> Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type are specified. Command mode: Router RIP no redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp} export Stops exporting the routes of the specified protocol. Command mode: Router RIP show ip rip redistribute Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 485: Open Shortest Path First Configuration
486 to view command options. Command mode: Router OSPF arearange <1‐16> Configures summary routes for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 488 to view command options. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> Configures the Virtual Links used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 491 to view command options. Command mode: Router OSPF defaultinformation <1‐16777214> <AS external metric type (1‐2)> Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Command mode: Router OSPF no defaultinformation Removes the default route information. Command mode: Router OSPF [no] enable Enables or disables OSPF on the G8264CS. Command mode: Router OSPF host <1‐128> Configures OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. See page 493 to view command options. Command mode: Router OSPF lsdblimit <LSDB limit (0‐16384, 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. Command mode: Router OSPF © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 486: Area Index Configuration
Table 266. OSPF Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage messagedigestkey <key ID (1‐255)> md5key <text string> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. Command mode: Router OSPF no messagedigestkey <key ID (1‐255)> Removes the MD5 authentication key. Command mode: Router OSPF redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} Configures OSPF route redistribution. See page 494 to view command options. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. Command mode: All Area Index Configuration The following table describes the Area Index commands. Table 267. Area Index Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage area <0‐5> areaid <IP address> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. Command mode: Router OSPF area <0‐5> authenticationtype {password|md5} Sets the authentication type. password authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing  devices can participate. md5 is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required. ...
Page 487 Configures the minimum time interval, in seconds, between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. The default value is 10 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF area <0‐5> stubmetric <1‐65535> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Command mode: Router OSPF area <0‐5> type {transit|stub|nssa} Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit. transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged  between routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. stub area: is an area where external routing information is not  distributed. Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area. nssa: Not‐So‐Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional  capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. Command mode: Router OSPF no area <0‐5> Deletes the OSPF area. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf area <0‐5> Displays the current OSPF configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 488: Ospf Summary Range Configuration
OSPF Summary Range Configuration The following table describes the OSPF Summary Range commands. Table 268. OSPF Summary Range Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage arearange <1‐16> address <IP address> [<IP netmask>] Displays the base IP address or the IP address mask for the range. Command mode: Router OSPF arearange <1‐16> area <0‐5> Displays the area index used by the G8264CS. Command mode: Router OSPF [no] arearange <1‐16> enable Enables or disables the OSPF summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF [no] arearange <1‐16> hide Hides or shows the OSPF summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF no arearange <1‐16> Deletes the OSPF summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf arearange <1‐16> Displays the current OSPF summary range. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 489: Ospf Interface Configuration
Configures the OSPF area index. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf cost <1‐65535> Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf deadinterval <1‐65535> ip ospf deadinterval <1000‐65535 ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or milliseconds, before declaring a silent router to be down. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip ospf enable Enables or disables the OSPF interface. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf hellointerval <1‐65535> ip ospf hellointerval <50‐65535 ms> Configures the interval, in seconds or milliseconds, between the hello packets for the interfaces. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf key <key string> Sets the authentication key to clear the password. Command mode: Interface IP no ip ospf key Removes the authentification key to clear the password. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf messagedigestkey <1‐255> Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ip ospf messagedigestkey Removes the MD5 key form the interface. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 490 Table 269. OSPF Interface Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip ospf passiveinterface Sets the interface as passive. On a passive interface, you can disable OSPF protocol exchanges, but the router advertises the interface in its LSAs so that IP connectivity to the attached network segment will be established. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip ospf pointtopoint Sets the interface as point‐to‐point. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf priority <0‐255> Configures the priority value for the G8264CS’s OSPF interfaces. A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf retransmitinterval <1‐3600> Configures the retransmit interval in seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ip ospf transitdelay <1‐3600> Configures the transit delay in seconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ip ospf Deletes the OSPF interface. Command mode: Interface IP show interface ip <1‐128> ospf Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 491: Ospf Virtual Link Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage areavirtuallink <1‐3> area <0‐5> Configures the OSPF area index for the virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> deadinterval <1‐65535> areavirtuallink <1‐3> deadinterval <1000‐65535 ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or milliseconds. The default value is 40 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF [no] areavirtuallink <1‐3> enable Enables or disables OSPF virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> hellointerval <1‐65535> areavirtuallink <1‐3> hellointerval <50‐65535 ms> Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or milliseconds. The default value is 10 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> key <password> Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. The default setting is none. Command mode: Router OSPF no areavirtuallink <1‐3> key Removes the authentification key. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> messagedigestkey <1‐255> Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. The default setting is none. Command mode: Router OSPF no areavirtuallink <1‐3> messagedigestkey Removes the MD5 key ID for the specified virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 492 Table 270. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage areavirtuallink <1‐3> neighborrouter <IP address> Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. The default value is 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> retransmitinterval <1‐3600> Configures the retransmit interval, in seconds. The default value is 5 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF areavirtuallink <1‐3> transitdelay <1‐3600> Configures the delay in transit, in seconds. The default value is 1 second. Command mode: Router OSPF no areavirtuallink <1‐3> Deletes OSPF virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf areavirtuallink <1‐3> Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 493: Ospf Host Entry Configuration
OSPF Host Entry Configuration The following table describes the OSPF Host Entry commands. Table 271. OSPF Host Entry Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage host <1‐128> address <IP address> Configures the base IP address for the host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF host <1‐128> area <0‐5> Configures the area index of the host. Command mode: Router OSPF host <1‐128> cost <1‐65535> Configures the cost value of the host. Command mode: Router OSPF [no] host <1‐128> enable Enables or disables the OSPF host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF no host <1‐128> Deletes OSPF host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf host <1‐128> Displays the current OSPF host entries. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 494: Ospf Route Redistribution Configuration
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration The following table describes the OSPF Route Redistribution commands. Table 272. OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} <1‐64> Adds or removes selected routing map to the rmap list. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. Command mode: Router OSPF redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} export <metric (1‐16777214)> <AS external metric type (1‐2)> Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS‐external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. Command mode: Router OSPF no redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} export Stops exporting the routes of the protocol. Command mode: Router OSPF show ip ospf redistribute Displays the current route map settings. Command mode: All OSPF MD5 Key Configuration The following table describes the OSPF MD5 Key commands. Table 273. OSPF MD5 Key Options Command Syntax and Usage messagedigestkey <1‐255> md5key <1‐16 characters>...
Page 495: Open Shortest Path First Version 3 Configuration
Table 274. OSPFv3 Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ipv6 router ospf Enter OSPFv3 configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration abrtype [standard|cisco|ibm] Configures the Area Border Router (ABR) type, as follows: Standard  Cisco   The default setting is standard. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no abrtype Resets the Area Border Router (ABR) type to its default value ‐ standard. Command mode: Router OSPF3 asexternal lsdblimit <LSDB limit (0‐2147483647, ‐1 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. The default value is 1. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] enable Enables or disables OSPFv3 on the switch. Command mode: Router OSPF3 exitoverflowinterval <0‐4294967295> Configures the number of seconds that a router takes to exit Overflow State. The default value is 0. Command mode: Router OSPF3 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 496 Table 274. OSPFv3 Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage neighbor <1‐256> {address <IPv6 address>|interface <1‐126>| |priority <0‐255>} Configures directly reachable routers over non‐broadcast networks.This is required for non‐broadcast multiple access (NBMA) networks and optional for Point‐to‐Multipoint networks. address configures the neighbor’s IPv6 address.  interface configures the OSPFv3 interface used for the neighbor entry.  priority configures the priority value used for the neighbor entry. A  priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the neighbor cannot be used as Designated Router or Backup Designated Router. The default value is 1. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] neighbor <1‐256> enable Enables or disables the specified neighbor. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no neighbor <1‐256> Deletes the neighbor entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] nssaAsbrDfRtTrans Enables or disables setting of the P‐bit in the default Type 7 LSA generated by an NSSA internal ASBR. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Router OSPF3 referencebandwidth <0‐4294967295> Configures the reference bandwidth, in kilobits per second, used to calculate the default interface metric. The default value is 100,000. Command mode: Router OSPF3 routerid <IPv4 address> Defines the router ID.
Page 497: Ospfv3 Area Index Configuration
Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. Command mode: All OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Area Index commands. Table 275. OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage area <0‐2> areaid <IP address> Defines the IP address of the OSPFv3 area number. Command mode: Router OSPF3 area <0‐2> defaultmetric <metric value (1‐16777215)> Configures the cost for the default summary route in a stub area or NSSA. Command mode: Router OSPF3 area <0‐2> defaultmetric type <1‐3> Configures the default metric type applied to the route. Note: This command applies only to area type of Stub/NSSA. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no area <0‐2> defaultmetric Resets the cost for the default summary route to its default value of 1. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] area <0‐2> enable Enables or disables the OSPF area. Command mode: Router OSPF3 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 498 Table 275. OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage area <0‐2> stabilityinterval <1‐255> Configures the stability interval for an NSSA, in seconds. When the interval expires, an elected translator determines that its services are no longer required. The default value is 40 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no area <0‐2> stabilityinterval Resets the stability interval for the NSSA to its default value of 40 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF3 area <0‐2> translationrole {always|candidate} Configures the translation role for an NSSA area, as follows: always: Type 7 LSAs are always translated into Type 5 LSAs.  candidate: An NSSA border router participates in the translator election  process. The default setting is candidate. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no area <0‐2> translationrole Resets the translation role for the NSSA to its default value ‐ candidate. Command mode: Router OSPF3 area <0‐2> type {transit|stub|nssa} [nosummary] Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit. transit allows area summary information to be exchanged between  routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. stub is an area where external routing information is not distributed.  Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area. nssa (Not‐So‐Stubby Area) is similar to stub area with additional  capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be ...
Page 499 Table 275. OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no area <0‐2> Deletes the OSPF area. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf {areas|area <0‐2>} Displays the current OSPFv3 area configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 500: Ospfv3 Summary Range Configuration
OSPFv3 Summary Range Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Summary Range commands. Table 276. OSPFv3 Summary Range Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage arearange <1‐16> address <IPv6 address> <prefix length (1‐128)> Configures the base IPv6 address and subnet prefix length for the range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 arearange <1‐16> area <area index (0‐2)> Configures the area index used by the switch. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] arearange <1‐16> enable Enables or disables the OSPFv3 summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] arearange <1‐16> hide Hides or shows the OSPFv3 summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 arearange <1‐16> lsatype {summary|Type7} Configures the LSA type, as follows: Summary LSA  Type7 LSA  Command mode: Router OSPF3 arearange <1‐16> tag <0‐4294967295> Configures the route tag. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no arearange <1‐16> Deletes the OSPFv3 summary range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf arearange Displays the current OSPFv3 summary range.
Page 501: Ospfv3 As‐External Range Configuration
Configures the aggregation effect, as follows: allowAll: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, aggregated Type‐5 LSAs are generated.  Aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are generated in all the attached NSSAs for the range. denyAll: Type‐5 and Type‐7 LSAs are not generated.  advertise: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, aggregated Type‐5 LSAs are generated.  For other area IDs, aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are generated in the NSSA area. notadvertise: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, Type‐5 LSAs are not generated,  while all NSSA LSAs within the range are cleared and aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are generated for all NSSAs. For other area IDs, aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are not generated in the NSSA area. Command mode: Router OSPF3 summaryprefix <1‐16> area <area index (0‐2)> Configures the area index used by the switch. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] summaryprefix <1‐16> translation When enabled, the P‐bit is set in the generated Type‐7 LSA. When disabled, the P‐bit is cleared. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] summaryprefix <1‐16> enable Enables or disables the OSPFv3 AS‐external range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no summaryprefix <1‐16> Deletes the OSPFv3 AS‐external range. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf summaryprefix <1‐16> Displays the current OSPFv3 AS‐external range. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 502: Ospfv3 Interface Configuration
OSPFv3 Interface Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Interface commands. Table 278. OSPFv3 Interface Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage interface ip <1‐128> Enter Interface IP mode, from Global Configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration ipv6 ospf area <0‐2> Configures the OSPFv3 area index. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf area <0‐2> instance <0‐255> Configures the instance ID for the interface. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf cost <1‐65535> Configures the metric value for sending a packet on the interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf cost Removes the metric value for sending a packet on the interface. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf deadinterval <1‐65535> Configures the time period, in seconds, for which the router waits for hello packet from the neighbor before declaring this neighbor down. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf deadinterval Resets the dead interval for hello packets to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 ospf enable Enables or disables OSPFv3 on the interface. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf hellointerval <1‐65535> Configures the indicated interval, in seconds, between the hello packets, that the router sends on the interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf hellointerval Resets the hello interval for hello packets to its default value.
Page 503  supporting pseudo‐broadcast (multicast and broadcast traffic is configured manually) pointtomultipoint: network where multiple point‐to‐point links are  set up on the same interface pointtopoint: network that joins a single pair of routers  The default value is broadcast. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 ospf passiveinterface Enables or disables the passive setting on the interface. On a passive interface, OSPFv3 protocol packets are suppressed. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf pollinterval <0‐4294967295> Configures the poll interval in seconds for neighbors in NBMA networks. The default value is 120 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf pollinterval Configures the poll interval in seconds for neighbors in NBMA and point‐to‐multipoint networks to its default 120 seconds value. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf priority <priority value (0‐255)> Configures the priority value for the switch’s OSPFv3 interface. A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf priority Resets the priority value for the switch’s OSPFv3 interface to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 504 Table 278. OSPFv3 Interface Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 ospf retransmitinterval <1‐1800> Configures the interval in seconds, between LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf retransmitinterval Resets the interval between LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the current interface to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf transmitdelay <1‐1800> Configures the estimated time, in seconds, taken to transmit LS update packet over this interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf transmitdelay Resets the estimated time taken to transmit LS update packet over the current interface to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf Deletes OSPFv3 from interface. Command mode: Interface IP show ipv6 ospf interface Displays the current settings for OSPFv3 interface. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 505: Ospfv3 Over Ipsec Configuration
OSPFv3 over IPSec Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 over IPsec Configuration commands. Table 279. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec enable Enables IPsec. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> {md5|sha1} <authentication key (hexadecimal)> Configures the Security Parameters Index (SPI), algorithm, and authentication key for the Authentication Header (AH). The algorithms supported are: MD5 (hexadecimal key length is 32)  SHA1 (hexadecimal key length is 40)  Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> Disables the specified Authentication Header (AH) SPI. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec default Resets the Authentication Header (AH) configuration to default values. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec enable Enables OSPFv3 encryption for this interface. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 506 Table 279. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> esp {3des|aescbc|null} <encryption key (hexadecimal)> {md5|sha1|none} <authentication key (hexadecimal)> Configures the Security Parameters Index (SPI), encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and authentication key for the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). The ESP algorithms supported are: 3des (hexadecimal key length is 48)  aescbc (hexadecimal key length is 32)  null means ESP with no encryption.  The authentication algorithms supported are: md5 (hexadecimal key length is 32)  sha1 (hexadecimal key length is 40)  none means ESP with no authentication.  Note: If the encryption algorithm is null, the authentication algorithm must be either MD5 or SHA1. If an encryption algorithm is specified (3DES or AES‐CBC), the authentication algorithm can be none. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> Disables the specified Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) SPI. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec default Resets the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) configuration to default values. Command mode: Interface IP G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 507: Ospfv3 Virtual Link Configuration
Configures the OSPF area index. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> deadinterval <1‐65535> Configures the time period, in seconds, for which the router waits for hello packet from the neighbor before declaring this neighbor down. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] areavirtuallink <1‐3> enable Enables or disables OSPF virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> hellointerval <1‐65535)> Configures the indicated interval, in seconds, between the hello packets, that the router sends on the interface. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> neighborrouter <NBR router ID (IP address)> Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> retransmitinterval <1‐1800> Configures the interval, in seconds, between link‐state advertisement (LSA) retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the OSPFv3 virtual link interface. The default value is 5 seconds. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> transmitdelay <1‐1800> Configures the estimated time, in seconds, taken to transmit LS update packet over this interface. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no areavirtuallink <1‐3> Deletes OSPF virtual link. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf areavirtuallink Displays the current OSPFv3 virtual link settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 508: Ospfv3 Over Ipsec For Virtual Link Configuration
OSPFv3 over IPSec for Virtual Link Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 over IPsec for Virtual Link Configuration commands. Table 281. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage areavirtuallink <1‐3> authentication ipsec enable Enables OSPFv3 IPsec authentication . Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> {md5 <md5 key>|sha1 <sha1 key>} Configures the OSPFv3 security parameter index authentication. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no areavirtuallink <1‐3> authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> Removes the specified OSPFv3 Security Parameters Index (SPI). Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> authentication ipsec default Resets the IPsec Authentication Header (AH) to its default values. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> encryption ipsec enable Enables OSPFv3 IPsec encryption. Command mode: Router OSPF3 areavirtuallink <1‐3> encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> esp {3des|aescbc|null} <encryption key (hexadecimal)> {md5|sha1|none} <authentication key (hexadecimal)> Configures the Security Parameters Index (SPI), encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and authentication key for the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). The ESP algorithms supported are: 3des (hexadecimal key length is 48) ...
Page 509: Ospfv3 Host Entry Configuration
OSPFv3 Host Entry Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Host Entry commands. Table 282. OSPFv3 Host Entry Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage host <1‐128> address <IPv6 address> <prefix length (1‐128)> Configures the base IPv6 address and the subnet prefix length for the host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 host <1‐128> area <0‐2> Configures the area index of the host. Command mode: Router OSPF3 host <1‐128> cost <1‐65535> Configures the cost value of the host. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] host <1‐128> enable Enables or disables the host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no host <1‐128> Deletes the host entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf host [<1‐128>] Displays the current OSPFv3 host entries. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 510: Ospfv3 Redistribute Entry Configuration
OSPFv3 Redistribute Entry Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Redistribute Entry commands. Table 283. OSPFv3 Redist Entry Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage redistconfig <1‐128> address <IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length (1‐128)> Configures the base IPv6 address and the subnet prefix length for the redistribution entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 [no] redistconfig <1‐128> enable Enables or disables the OSPFv3 redistribution entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 redistconfig <1‐128> metrictype {asExttype1|asExttype2} Configures the metric type applied to the route before it is advertised into the OSPFv3 domain. Command mode: Router OSPF3 redistconfig <1‐128> metricvalue <1‐16777215> Configures the route metric value applied to the route before it is advertised into the OSPFv3 domain. Command mode: Router OSPF3 redistconfig <1‐128> tag <0‐4294967295> Configures the route tag. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no redistconfig <1‐128> tag Removes the route tag. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no redistconfig <1‐128> Deletes the OSPFv3 redistribution entry. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf redistconfig <1‐128> Displays the current OSPFv3 redistribution configuration for the specified entry. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 511: Ospfv3 Redistribute Configuration
OSPFv3 Redistribute Configuration The following table describes the OSPFv3 Redistribute commands. Table 284. OSPFv3 Redistribute Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage redistribute {connected|static} export <metric value (1‐16777215)> <metric type (1‐2)> [<tag (0‐4294967295)>] Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPFv3 AS‐external LSAs in which the metric, metric type, and route tag are specified. Command mode: Router OSPF3 no redistribute {connected|static} export Stops exporting the routes of the protocol. Command mode: Router OSPF3 show ipv6 ospf Displays the current OSPFv3 route redistribution settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 512: Border Gateway Protocol Configuration
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network, rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system, itʹs called internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems, itʹs called external BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771. BGP commands enable you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. BGP is turned off by default. Note: Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface. Table 285. Border Gateway Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage router bgp Enter Router BGP configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration aggregateaddress <1‐16> Configures aggregation IP address. To view command options, see page 517. Command mode: Router BGP as <0‐65535> Set Autonomous System number. Command mode: Router BGP [no] asn4comp Enables or disables ASN4 to ASN2 compatibility. Command mode: Router BGP [no] bestpath aspath multipathrelax Changes the default best path selection configuration by allowing load sharing ...
Page 513 Specifies the router’s Cluster ID used when operating as a route reflector. Route reflectors that are part of the same cluster (assigned to the same group of clients) must use identical Cluster IDs. Command mode: Router BGP no clusterid Removes the router’s Cluster ID. Command mode: Router BGP [no] enable Globally enables or disables BGP. Command mode: Router BGP localpreference <0‐4294967294> Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred. When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local preference if you are using iBGP. Command mode: Router BGP maximumpaths [ibgp] <1‐32> Set maximum paths allowed for an external route. ibgp will set the maximum paths allowed for an internal route. By default, BGP will install only one path to the IP routing table. Command mode: Router BGP no maximumpaths [ibgp] Resets the maximum paths allowed for an external route to its default value of 1. The ibgp option resets the maximum paths allowed for an internal route. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor {<peer number (1‐96)>|group <1‐8>} Configures each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous system, exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. To view command options, see page 514. Command mode: Router BGP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 514: Bgp Peer Configuration
Table 285. Border Gateway Protocol Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] set ip nexthop peeraddress Applied on output, sets the next‐hop of the advertised matching routes to the current peer address of the local router. Applied on input, sets the next‐hop of the received matching routes to the neighbor address, overriding other existing next‐hops. Use the no form of the command to remove the entry. Command mode: Route map show ip bgp Displays the current BGP configuration. Command mode: All BGP Peer Configuration Use these commands to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. The peer option is disabled by default. Table 286. BGP Peer Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage neighbor <1‐96> advertisementinterval <1‐65535> Sets time, in seconds, between advertisements. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor <1‐96> nexthopself Enables or disables enforcing the use the router’s own IP address as next‐hop attribute when sending BGP updates to the peer. Note: Applicable only for EBGP routes. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor <1‐96> passive Enables or disables BGP passive mode, which prevents the switch from ...
Page 515 518. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> remoteaddress <IP address> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> remoteas <1‐65535> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> retryinterval <1‐65535> Sets connection retry interval, in seconds. The default value is 120 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> routemap {in|out} <1‐64> Adds route map into in‐route or out‐route map list. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor <1‐96> routemap {in|out} {<1‐64>|all} Removes all route maps or a specific route map from in‐route or out‐route map list. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> routeoriginationinterval <1‐65535> Sets the minimum time between route originations, in seconds. The default value is 15 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor <1‐96> routereflectorclient Enables or disables the peer as a route reflector client. Configuring route reflector clients, implicitly sets up the local router as a route reflector. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor <1‐96> sendcommunity Enables or disables sending a community attribute to a BGP neighbor. Command mode: Router BGP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 516 Table 286. BGP Peer Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage neighbor <1‐96> shutdown Disables this peer configuration. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor <1‐96> shutdown Enables this peer configuration. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> timetolive <1‐255> Time‐to‐live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that, when exhausted, would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. It is also used to support multi‐hops, which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. The default number is set at 1. Note: The TTL value is significant only to eBGP peers, for iBGP peers the TTL value in the IP packets is always 255 (regardless of the configured value). Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor <1‐96> timetolive Disables the TTL feature. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> timers holdtime <0, 3‐65535> Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. The default value is 180 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> timers keepalive <0‐21845> Sets the keep‐alive time for the specified peer, in seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> ttlsecurity hops <1‐254>...
Page 517: Bgp Aggregation Configuration
Command mode: Router BGP show ip bgp neighbor [<1‐96>] Displays the current BGP peer configuration. Command mode: All BGP Aggregation Configuration These commands enable you to configure BGP aggregation to specify the routes/range of IP destinations a peer router accepts from other peers. All matched routes are aggregated to one route, in order to reduce the size of the routing table. By default, the first aggregation number is enabled and the rest are disabled. Table 287. BGP Aggregation Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage aggregateaddress <1‐16> <IP address> <IP netmask> Defines the starting subnet IP address for this aggregation, using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Router BGP [no] aggregateaddress <1‐16> enable Enables or disables this BGP aggregation. Command mode: Router BGP no aggregateaddress <1‐16> Deletes this BGP aggregation. Command mode: Router BGP show ip bgp aggregateaddress [<1‐16>] Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 518: Bgp Neighbor Redistribution Configuration
BGP Neighbor Redistribution Configuration This menu enables you to redistribute routes learned from various routing information sources into BGP. Table 288. BGP Neighbor Redistribution Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage neighbor <1‐96> redistribute defaultaction {import| |originate|redistribute} Sets default route action. Defaults routes can be configured as follows: import: Import these routes.  originate: The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have  any default routes in its routing table. redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default  gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor <1‐96> redistribute defaultaction Disables the default route action configuration. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor <1‐96> redistribute defaultmetric <1‐4294967294> Sets default metric of advertised routes. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor <1‐96> redistribute defaultmetric Disables the default metric configuration of advertised routes. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor <1‐96> redistribute {fixed|ospf|rip|static} Enables or disables advertising fixed, OSPF, RIP or static routes. Command mode: Router BGP show ip bgp neighbor <1‐96> redistribute Displays current redistribution configuration.
Page 519: Bgp Peering Group Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage neighbor group <1‐8> advertisementinterval <minimum advertisement time (1‐65535)> Sets time, in seconds, between advertisements. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> listen limit <group limit (1‐96)> Sets the maximum number of BGP dynamic peers. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> listen range <IPv4 address> <IPv4 subnet mask> Defines the range of IP addresses that will be accepted for the group. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> name <1‐32 characters> Sets the name for the group. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> name Deletes the name for the group. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor group <1‐8> nexthopself Enables or disables enforcing the use the router’s own IP address as next‐hop attribute when sending BGP updates to the peering group. Applicable only for EBGP routes. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> password <1‐16 characters> Configures the BGP peer group password. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> password Deletes the BGP peer group password. Command mode: Router BGP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 520 Table 289. BGP Peering Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute Configures BGP neighbor group redistribution. To view command options, see page 523. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> remoteas <AS number (1‐65535)> [alternateas <AS number (1‐65535)>] Adds a remote access server (RAS) into the RAS list. Using the alternateas option you can add up to 5 alternate access servers. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> routemap {in|out} <route map ID (1‐64)> Adds route map into in‐route or out‐route map list. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> routemap {in|out} {<route map ID (1‐64)>|all} Removes route map from in‐route map list. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> routeoriginationinterval <min orig time (1‐65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations, in seconds. The default value is 15 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor group <1‐8> routereflectorclient Enables or disables the group as a route reflector client. Configuring route reflector clients, implicitly sets up the local router as a route reflector. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor group <1‐8> sendcommunity Enables or disables sending a community attribute to a BGP neighbor group. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> shutdown Enables this peering group configuration. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> shutdown Disables this peering group configuration.
Page 521 The default number is set at 1. Note: The TTL value is significant only to eBGP peering groups; for iBGP peering groups the TTL value in the IP packets is always 255 (regardless of the configured value). Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> timetolive <1‐255> Disables the TTL feature. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> timers holdtime <hold time (0, 3‐65535)> Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peering group session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. The default value is 180 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> timers keepalive <keepalive time (0‐21845)> Sets the keep‐alive time for the specified peering group in seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> ttlsecurity hops <1‐254> Sets the minimum number of time‐to‐live (TTL) router hops an IP packet must have to not be discarded. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> ttlsecurity hops Disables the TTL security feature. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> updatesource {<interface number (1‐126)>| |loopback <interface number (1‐5)>} Sets the local IP interface or loopback interface for this peering group. Command mode: Router BGP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 522 Table 289. BGP Peering Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no neighbor group <1‐8> Deletes this peering group configuration. Command mode: Router BGP show ip bgp neighbor group [<1‐8>] Displays the current peering group configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 523: Bgp Neighbor Group Redistribution Configuration
{import|originate|redistribute} Sets default route action. Defaults routes can be configured as follows: import: Import these routes.  originate: The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have  any default routes in its routing table. redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default  gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute defaultaction Disables the default route action configuration. Command mode: Router BGP neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute defaultmetric <1‐4294967294> Sets default metric of advertised routes. Command mode: Router BGP no neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute defaultmetric Disables the default metric configuration for advertised routes. Command mode: Router BGP [no] neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute {fixed|ospf|rip| |static} Enables or disables advertising fixed, OSPF, RIP or static routes. Command mode: Router BGP show ip bgp neighbor group <1‐8> redistribute Displays current redistribution configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 524: Mld Global Configuration
MLD Global Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure global MLD parameters. Table 291. MLD Global Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 mld Enter MLD global configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] enable Globally enables or disables MLD. Command mode: MLD Configuration default Resets MLD parameters to their default values. Command mode: MLD Configuration show ipv6 mld Displays the current MLD configuration parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 525 Command Syntax and Usage [no] ipv6 mld dmrtr enable Enables or disables dynamic Mrouter learning on the interface. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ipv6 mld enable Enables or disables the selected MLD interface. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 mld llistnr <1‐32> Configures the Last Listener query interval, in seconds. The default value is 1 second. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 mld llistnr Resets the Last Listener query interval to its default value of 1 second. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 mld qintrval <2‐65535> Configures the interval for MLD Query Reports, in seconds. The default value is 125 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 mld qintrval Resets the interval for MLD Query Reports to its default value of 125 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 mld qri <1000‐65535> Configures the interval for MLD Query Response Reports, in miliseconds. The default value is 10,000 milliseconds. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 mld qri Resets the interval for MLD Query Response Reports to its default value of 10,000 milliseconds. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 526 Table 292. MLD Interface Configuration Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ipv6 mld robust <1‐10> Configures the MLD Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss), increase the value. The default value is 2. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 mld robust Resets the MLD Robustness variable to its default value of 2. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 mld version <1‐2> Defines the MLD protocol version number. The default value is 1. Command mode: Interface IP no ipv6 mld version Resets the MLD protocol version number to its default value of 1. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 mld default Resets MLD parameters for the selected interface to their default values. Command mode: Interface IP G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 527: Igmp Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp aggregate Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp enable Globally enables or disables IGMP. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters. Command mode: All The following sections describe the IGMP configuration options.  “IGMP Snooping Configuration” on page 528  “IGMP Relay Configuration” on page 530  “IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration” on page 531  “IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration” on page 532  “IGMP Filtering Configuration” on page 533  “IGMP Advanced Configuration” on page 535  “IGMP Querier Configuration” on page 536 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 528: Igmp Snooping Configuration
IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it. IGMP Snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic, and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers. The following table describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping. Table 294. IGMP Snooping Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp snoop aggregate Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp snoop enable Enables or disables IGMP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp snoop mroutertimeout <1‐600> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter). Once the timeout value is reached, the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table, if the proper conditions are met. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 255 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp snoop sourceip <IP address> Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp snoop vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Adds the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp snoop vlan {<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>|all} Removes all VLANs or just the specified VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration default ip igmp snoop Resets IGMP Snooping parameters to their default values. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp snoop Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.
Page 529: Igmpv3 Configuration
IGMP Version 3 Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 enable Enables or disables IGMP version 3. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 exclude Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. When disabled, the switch ignores Exclude Reports. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources <1‐64> Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control. The default value is 8. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources Resets the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record to its default value of 8. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 v1v2 Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports. When disabled, the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp snoop igmpv3 Displays the current IGMP v3 Snooping configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 530: Igmp Relay Configuration
IGMP Relay Configuration When you configure IGMP Relay, also configure the IGMP Relay multicast routers. The following table describes the commands used to configure IGMP Relay. Table 296. IGMP Relay Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp relay enable Enables or disables IGMP Relay. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay report <0‐150> Configures the interval between unsolicited Join reports sent by the switch, in seconds. The default value is 10. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Adds the VLAN or range of VLANs to the list of IGMP Relay VLANs. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp relay vlan {<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>|all} Removes all VLANs or just the specified VLAN from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp relay Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 531: Igmp Relay Multicast Router Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> address <IP address> Configures the IP address of the IGMP multicast router used for IGMP Relay. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> attempt <1‐128> Configures the number of successful ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is up. The default value is 5. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> enable Enables or disables the multicast router. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> interval <1‐60> Configures the time interval between ping attempts to the upstream Mrouters, in seconds. The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> retry <1‐120> Configures the number of failed ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is down. The default value is 4. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> version <1‐2> Configures the IGMP version (1 or 2) of the multicast router. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> Deletes the multicast router from IGMP Relay. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp relay Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 532: Igmp Static Multicast Router Configuration
IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router. Note: When static Mrouters are used, the switch continues learning dynamic Mrouters via IGMP snooping. However, dynamic Mrouters may not replace static Mrouters. If a dynamic Mrouter has the same port and VLAN combination as a static Mrouter, the dynamic Mrouter is not learned. Table 298. IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip igmp mrouter port <port alias or number> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> <version (1‐3)> Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected, and configures the IGMP version of the multicast router. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp mrouter {port <port alias or number> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> <version (1‐3)>|all} Removes all static multicast routers or a specific static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination. Command mode: Global configuration clear ip igmp mrouter Clears the dynamic multicast router port table. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show ip igmp mrouter Displays the current IGMP Multicast Router parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 533: Igmp Filtering Configuration
Enables or disables IGMP filtering globally. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp filtering Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters. Command mode: All IGMP Filter Definition The following table describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter. Table 300. IGMP Filter Definition Options Command Syntax and Usage ip igmp profile <1‐16> action {allow|deny} Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified. The default action is deny. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp profile <1‐16> enable Enables or disables this IGMP filter. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp profile <1‐16> range <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp profile <1‐16> Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp profile <1‐16> Displays the current IGMP filter. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 534 IGMP Filtering Port Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering. Table 301. IGMP Filter Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp filtering Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port. Command mode: Interface port [no] ip igmp profile <1‐16> Adds or removes an IGMP filter to this port. Command mode: Interface port show interface port <port alias or number> igmpfiltering Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 535: Igmp Advanced Configuration
IGMP Advanced Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp fastleave {<VLAN ID (1‐4094)>|port <port alias or number>} Enables or disables Fastleave processing. Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a VLAN from the IGMP VLAN list or a port from the IGMP port list, if the host sends a Leave message, and the proper conditions are met. This command is disabled by default. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp queryinterval <1‐600> Sets the IGMP router query interval, in seconds. The default value is 125 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp queryinterval Resets the IGMP router query interval to its default value of 125 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp robust <1‐10> Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss), increase the value. The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp robust Resets the IGMP Robustness variable to its default value of 2. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp rtralert Enables or disables the Router Alert option in IGMP messages. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 536: Igmp Querier Configuration
Table 302. IGMP Advanced Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ip igmp timeout <1‐255> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host). Once the timeout value is reached, the switch removes the host from its IGMP table, if the conditions are met. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp timeout Resets the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host) to its default value of 10 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration IGMP Querier Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure IGMP Querier. Table 303. IGMP Querier Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip igmp querier enable Enables or disables IGMP Querier. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> electiontype {ipv4|mac} Sets the IGMP Querier election criteria as IP address or Mac address. The default setting is ipv4. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> electiontype Resets the IGMP Querier election criteria to its default value ‐ ipv4. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> enable Enables or disables IGMP Querier for the selected VLANs.
Page 537 Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> queryinterval <1‐608> Configures the interval between IGMP Query broadcasts. The default value is 125 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> queryinterval Resets the interval between IGMP Query broadcasts to its default value of 125 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> robustness <1‐10> Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which is the number of times that the switch sends each IGMP message. The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> robustness Resets the IGMP Robustness variable to its default value of 2. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> sourceip <IP address> Configures the IGMP source IP address for the selected VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> sourceip Removes the configured IGMP source IP address for the specified VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> startupcount <1‐10> Configures the Startup Query Count, which is the number of IGMP Queries sent out at startup. Each Query is separated by the Startup Query Interval. The default value is 2. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> startupcount Resets the Startup Query Count to its default value of 2. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 538 Table 303. IGMP Querier Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> startupinterval <1‐608> Configures the Startup Query Interval, which is the interval between General Queries sent out at startup. The default value is 31 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> startupinterval Resets the Startup Query Interval to its default value of 31 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> version {v1|v2|v3} Configures the IGMP version. The default version is v3. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> version Resets the IGMP version to its default value of v3. Command mode: Global configuration no ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Deletes the IGMP Querier configuration for the specified VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration show ip igmp querier Displays the current IGMP Querier parameters. Command mode: All show ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IGMP Querier information for the selected VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 539: Ikev2 Configuration
Command mode: Global configuration ikev2 retransmitinterval <1‐20> Sets the interval, in seconds, the timeout value in case a packet is not received by the peer and needs to be retransmitted. The default value is 20 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration show ikev2 Displays the current IKEv2 settings. Command mode: All IKEv2 Preshare Key Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure IKEv2 preshare keys. Table 305. IKEv2 Preshare Key Options Command Syntax and Usage ikev2 presharekey local <1‐256 characters> Configures the local preshare key. The default value is ibm123. Command mode: Global configuration ikev2 presharekey remote <1‐256 characters> <IPv6 address> Configures the remote preshare key for the IPv6 address. Command mode: Global configuration show ikev2 presharekey Displays the current IKEv2 Preshare key settings. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 540 IKEv2 Proposal Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure an IKEv2 proposal. IKEv2 proposal includes an encryption algorithm (cipher), an authentication algorithm type and a Diffie‐Hellman (DH) group, which determines the strength of the key used in the key exchange process. Higher DH group numbers are more secure but require additional time to compute the key. Table 306. IKEv2 Proposal Options Command Syntax and Usage ikev2 proposal Enter IKEv2 proposal mode. Command mode: Global configuration encryption {3des|aescbc} Configures IKEv2 encryption mode. The default value is 3des. Command mode: IKEv2 proposal group 24 Configures the DH group. The default group is 2. Command mode: IKEv2 proposal integrity sha1 Configures the IKEv2 authentication algorithm type. The default value is sha1. Command mode: IKEv2 proposal show ikev2 proposal Displays the current IKEv2 Proposal configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 541 IKEv2 Identification Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure IKEv2 identification. Table 307. IKEv2 Identification Options Command Syntax and Usage ikev2 identity local address Configures the switch to use the supplied IPv6 address as identification. Command mode: Global configuration ikev2 identity local fqdn <1‐32 characters> Configures the switch to use the fully‐qualified domain name (such as “example.com”) as identification. Command mode: Global configuration ikev2 identity local email <1‐32 characters> Configures the switch to use the supplied email address (such as “xyz@example.com”) as identification. Command mode: Global configuration show ikev2 identity Displays the current IKEv2 identification settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 542: Ipsec Configuration
IPsec Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure IPsec. Table 308. IPsec Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ipsec enable Enables or disables IPsec. Command mode: Global configuration show ipsec Displays the current IPsec settings. Command mode: All IPsec Transform Set Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure IPsec transforms. Table 309. IPsec Transform Set Options Command Syntax and Usage ipsec transformset <1‐10> {ahsha1|esp3des|espaescbc| |espnull|espsha1} Sets the AH or ESP authentication, encryption, or integrity algorithm. The available algorithms are as follows: ahsha1  esp3des  espaescbc  espnull  espsha1 ...
Page 543 Command Syntax and Usage no ipsec transform <1‐10> Deletes the transform set. Command mode: Global configuration show ipsec transformset <1‐10> Displays the current IPsec Transform Set settings. Command mode: All IPsec Traffic Selector Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure an IPsec traffic selector. Table 310. IPsec Traffic Selector Options Command Syntax and Usage ipsec trafficselector <1‐10> {permit|deny} {any|icmp [<ICMPv6 type (0‐255)>]|tcp} {<IPV6 address>|any} Sets the traffic‐selector to permit or deny the specified type of traffic. Command mode: Global configuration no ipsec trafficselector <1‐10> Resets the specified traffic selector to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration show ipsec trafficselector [<1‐10>] Displays IPsec traffic selector information. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 544 IPsec Dynamic Policy Configuration The following table describes the commands used to configure an IPsec dynamic policy. Table 311. IPsec Dynamic Policy Options Command Syntax and Usage ipsec dynamicpolicy <1‐10> Enter IPsec dynamic policy mode. Command mode: Global configuration peer <IPv6 address> Sets the remote peer IP address. Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy pfs {enable|disable} Enables or disables perfect forward security. Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy salifetime <120‐86400> Sets the IPsec SA lifetime in seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy trafficselector <1‐10> Sets the traffic selector for the IPsec policy. Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy transformset <1‐10> Sets the transform set for the IPsec policy. Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy show ipsec dynamicpolicy <1‐10> Displays the current IPsec dynamic policy settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 545 Command Syntax and Usage ipsec manualpolicy <1‐10> Enter IPsec manual policy mode. Command mode: Global configuration inah authkey <key code (hexadecimal)> Sets inbound Authentication Header (AH) authenticator key. Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy inah spi <256‐4294967295> Sets the inbound Authentication Header (AH) Security Parameter Index (SPI). Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy inesp {authkey|cipherkey} <key code (hexadecimal)> Sets the inbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) authenticator key or cipher key. Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and AES‐CBC encryption. Command mode: IPsec manual policy inesp spi <256‐4294967295> Sets the inbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) Security Parameter Index (SPI). Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy outah authkey <key code (hexadecimal)> Sets the outbound Authentication Header (AH) authenticator key. Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 546 Table 312. IPsec Manual Policy Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage outah spi <256‐4294967295> Sets the outbound Authentication Header (AH) Security Parameter Index (SPI). Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy outesp {authkey|cipherkey} <key code (hexadecimal)> Sets the outbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) authenticator key or cipher key. Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and AES‐CBC encryption. Command mode: IPsec manual policy outesp spi <256‐4294967295> Sets the outbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) Security Parameter Index (SPI). Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1. Command mode: IPsec manual policy peer <IPv6 address> Sets the remote peer IP address. Command mode: IPsec manual policy trafficselector <1‐10> Sets the traffic selector for the IPsec policy. Command mode: IPsec manual policy transformset <1‐10> Sets the transform set for the IPsec policy. Command mode: IPsec manual policy show ipsec manualpolicy <1‐10> Displays the current IPsec manual policy settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 547: Domain Name System Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage ip dns domainname <1‐191 characters> Sets the default domain name used by the switch. For example: mycompany.com Command mode: Global configuration no ip dns domainname Removes the domain name used by the switch. Command mode: Global configuration ip dns primaryserver <IPv4 address> [dataport|mgtport] You are prompted to set the IPv4 address for your primary DNS server, using dotted decimal notation. Command mode: Global configuration no ip dns primaryserver Removes the IPv4 primary DNS server. Command mode: Global configuration ip dns secondaryserver <IPv4 address> [dataport|mgtport] You are prompted to set the IPv4 address for your secondary DNS server, using dotted decimal notation. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Command mode: Global configuration no ip dns secondaryserver Removes the IPv4 secondary DNS server. Command mode: Global configuration ip dns ipv6 primaryserver [<IPv6 address>] [dataport| |mgtport] You are prompted to set the IPv6 address for your primary DNS server, using hexadecimal format with colons. Command mode: Global configuration no ip dns ipv6 primaryserver Removes the IPv6 primary DNS server. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 548 Table 313. Domain Name Service Options Command Syntax and Usage ip dns ipv6 secondaryserver [<IPv6 address>] [dataport| |mgtport] You are prompted to set the IPv6 address for your secondary DNS server, using hexadecimal format with colons. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Command mode: Global configuration no ip dns ipv6 secondaryserver Removes the IPv6 secondary DNS server. Command mode: Global configuration ip dns ipv6 requestversion {ipv4|ipv6} Sets the protocol used for the first request to the DNS server, as follows: IPv4  IPv6  Command mode: Global configuration show ip dns Displays the current Domain Name System settings. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 549: Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration
Command mode: Global configuration no ip bootprelay server <1‐5> Removes the specified BOOTP server. Command mode: Global configuration BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration This menu allows you to configure a BOOTP server for a specific broadcast domain, based on its associated VLAN. Table 315. BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip bootprelay bcastdomain <1‐10> enable Enables or disables BOOTP Relay for the broadcast domain. Command mode: Global configuration ip bootprelay bcastdomain <1‐10> server <1‐5> address <IPv4 address> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. Command mode: Global configuration no ip bootprelay bcastdomain <1‐10> server <1‐5> Removes the broadcast domain BOOTP server. Command mode: Global configuration ip bootprelay bcastdomain <1‐10> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Configures the VLAN of the broadcast domain. Each broadcast domain must have a unique VLAN. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 550 Table 315. BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no ip bootprelay bcastdomain <1‐10> Deletes the selected broadcast domain configuration. Command mode: Global configuration show ip bootprelay Displays the current parameters for the BOOTP Relay broadcast domain. Command mode: All Option 82 Configuration These commands allow you to configure DHCP option 82 information. The switch can use the following DHCP option 82 sub‐options to allocate server addresses.  Circuit ID: Identifies the host name or MAC addresses of the switch making the DHCP request.  Remote ID: Identifies the port that receives the DHCP request. DHCP Relay Agent (Option 82) is defined in RFC 3046. Table 316. Option 82 Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip bootprelay information enable Enables or disables BOOTP Option 82. Command mode: Global configuration ip bootprelay information policy {keep|drop|replace} Configures the DHCP re‐forwarding policy, as follows: keep: Retains requests that contain relay information if the option 82  information is also present. drop: Discards requests that contain relay information if the option 82 ...
Page 551: Vrrp Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage router vrrp Enter Router VRRP configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] enable Globally enables or disables VRRP on this switch. Command mode: Router VRRP group Configures VRRP virtual routers groups. To view command options, see page 557. Command mode: Router VRRP holdoff <0‐255> Globally sets the time, in seconds, that VRRP waits from when the master switch goes down until elevating a new switch to be the master switch. To disable VRRP hold off set the time to 0. Note: Setting a new time value will take effect only when the switch is not in a hold off state. Command mode: Router VRRP interface <1‐126> Configures VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. To view command options, see page 560. Command mode: Router VRRP trackingpriorityincrement Configures weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. To view command options, see page 561. Command mode: Router VRRP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 552 Table 317. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage virtualrouter <1‐128> Configures virtual routers for the switch. To view command options, see page 553. Command mode: Router VRRP show ip vrrp Displays the current VRRP parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 553: Virtual Router Configuration
VRRP Virtual Router Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virtualrouter <1‐128> address <IP address> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the preceding VRID to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> enable Enables or disables this virtual router. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> fastadvertise Enables or disables Fast Advertisements. When enabled, the VRRP master advertisements interval is calculated in units of centiseconds, instead of seconds. For example, if adver is set to 1 and fadver is enabled, master advertisements are sent every 10 miliseconds. When you disable fast advertisement, the advertisement interval is set to the default value of 1 second. To support Fast Advertisements, set the interval between 20‐100 centiseconds. Command mode: Router VRRP virtualrouter <1‐128> interface <IP interface number> Selects a switch IP interface. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the address option, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must pre‐empt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This pre‐emption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1. Command mode: Router VRRP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 554 Table 318. VRRP Virtual Router Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> preemption Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preemption is disabled, this virtual router will always pre‐empt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. Command mode: Router VRRP virtualrouter <1‐128> priority <1‐254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used, this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. The priority value can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. Command mode: Router VRRP virtualrouter <1‐128> timers advertise <1‐255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1. Command mode: Router VRRP virtualrouter <1‐128> timers preemptdelaytime <0‐255> Configures the preempt delay interval (in seconds). This timer is configured on the virtual router and prevents the switch from transitioning back to Master state until the preempt delay interval has expired. Ensure that the interval is long enough for OSPF or other routing protocols to converge. The default is 0 seconds. Command mode: Router VRRP virtualrouter <1‐128> track Enables the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool ...
Page 555 Table 318. VRRP Virtual Router Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage virtualrouter <1‐128> virtualrouterid <1‐128> Defines the virtual router ID (VRID). This is used in conjunction with the [no] virtualrouter <VRID> address <IP address> command below to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP‐enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router. The VRID for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 128. The default value is 1. Note: All VRID values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs. Command mode: Router VRRP no virtualrouter <1‐128> Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. Command mode: Router VRRP show ip vrrp virtualrouter <1‐128> Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 556: Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration These commands are used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking commands. Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. Some tracking criteria apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Table 319. VRRP Priority Tracking Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> track interfaces When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> track ports When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] virtualrouter <1‐128> track virtualrouters When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure ...
Page 557: Virtual Router Group Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage group advertisement <1‐255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default is 1. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] group enable Enables or disables the virtual router group. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] group fastadvertise Enables or disables Fast Advertisements. When enabled, the VRRP master advertisements interval is calculated in units of centiseconds, instead of seconds. For example, if adver is set to 1 and fadver is enabled, master advertisements are sent every 10 miliseconds. When you disable fast advertisement, the advertisement interval is set to the default value of 1 second. To support Fast Advertisements, set the interval between 20‐100 centiseconds. Command mode: Router VRRP group interface <interface number (1‐126)> Selects a switch IP interface. The default switch IP interface number is 1. Command mode: Router VRRP group preemptdelaytime <0‐255> Configures the preempt delay interval (in seconds). This timer is configured on the virtual router group and prevents the switch from transitioning back to Master state until the preempt delay interval has expired. Ensure that the interval is long enough for OSPF or other routing protocols to converge. The default value is 0 seconds. Command mode: Router VRRP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 558 Table 320. VRRP Virtual Router Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] group preemption Enables or disables master pre‐emption. When enabled, if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will pre‐empt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preemption is disabled, this virtual router will always pre‐empt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router address are the same). The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Router VRRP group priority <1‐254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. When priority tracking is used, this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. Command mode: Router VRRP group track Enables the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual router groups. To view command options, see page 559. Command mode: Router VRRP group virtualrouterid <1‐255> Defines the virtual router ID (VRID). The VRID for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 128. All VRID values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see interface) belongs. The default virtual router ID is 1. Command mode: Router VRRP no group Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.
Page 559 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Note: If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, then the tracking option will be available only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. Table 321. Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] group track interfaces When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. Command mode: Router VRRP [no] group track ports When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. Command mode: Router VRRP show ip vrrp group track Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 560: Vrrp Interface Configuration
VRRP Interface Configuration These commands are used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. Note: The interface represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. Table 322. VRRP Interface Options Command Syntax and Usage interface <1‐126> authentication {password|none} Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication)  password (password authentication).  Command mode: Router VRRP interface <1‐126> password <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see interface authentication above). Command mode: Router VRRP no interface <1‐126> password Resets the configured password to its default value. Command mode: Router VRRP no interface <1‐126> Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP interface itself is not deleted. Command mode: Router VRRP show ip vrrp interface <1‐126> Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 561: Vrrp Tracking Configuration
556), the priority level for the virtual router is increased by a defined amount. Table 323. VRRP Tracking Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage trackingpriorityincrement interfaces <0‐254> Defines the priority increment value for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. The default value is 2. Command mode: Router VRRP trackingpriorityincrement ports <0‐254> Defines the priority increment value for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. The default value is 2. Command mode: Router VRRP trackingpriorityincrement virtualrouters <0‐254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. The default value is 2. Command mode: Router VRRP show ip vrrp trackingpriorityincrement Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. Command mode: All Note: These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Commands (see page 556) are enabled. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 562 Protocol Independent Multicast Configuration The following table describes the PIM commands. Table 324. PIM Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip pim component <1‐2> Enter PIM component mode. Command mode: Global configuration no ip pim component <2> Deletes the PIM component. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip pim enable Globally enables or disables PIM. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip pim pmbr enable Enables or disables PIM border router. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration ip pim regstopratelimitperiod <0‐2147483647> Configures the register stop rate limit, in seconds. The default value is 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration default ip pim regstopratelimitperiod Reset the register stop rate limit to its default value of 5 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration no ip pim regstopratelimitperiod Disables the register stop rate limit. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip pim staticrp enable Enables or disables static RP configuration. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 563 Table 324. PIM Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage default ip pim Resets the PIM configuration to its default values. Command mode: Global configuration clear ip pim mroute Clears PIM multicast router entries. Command mode: Privileged EXEC PIM Component Configuration Use these commands to configure PIM components. Table 325. PIM Component Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip pim component <1‐2> Enter PIM component mode. Command mode: Global configuration mode {dense|sparse} Configures the operational mode of the PIM router (dense or sparse). Command mode: PIM Component show ip pim component [<1‐2>] Displays the current PIM component configuration settings. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 564 RP Candidate Configuration Use these commands to configure a PIM router Rendezvous Point (RP) candidate. Table 326. RP Candidate Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage rpcandidate holdtime <0‐255> Configures the hold time of the RP candidate, in seconds. Command mode: PIM Component no rpcandidate holdtime Resets the hold time of the RP candidate to its default value of 0 seconds. Command mode: PIM Component [no] rpcandidate rpaddress <group multicast address> <group subnet mask> <IP address> Adds or removes an RP candidate. Command mode: PIM Component RP Static Configuration Use these commands to configure a static PIM router Rendezvous Point (RP). Table 327. RP Static Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage rpstatic rpaddress <group multicast address> <group subnet mask> <IP address> Adds a static RP. Command mode: PIM Component no rpstatic rpaddress <group multicast address> <group subnet mask> Removes the specified static RP. Command mode: PIM Component G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 565: Pim Interface Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage interface ip <1‐128> Enter Interface IP mode. Command mode: Global Configuration [no] ip pim borderbit Enables or disables the interface as a border router. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim cbsrpreference <0‐255> Configures the candidate bootstrap router preference. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim cbsrpreference Resets the canditate bootstrap router preference to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim componentid <1‐2> Defines the component ID for the interface. Command mode: Interface IP no ip pim componentid Removes the interface from the PIM component. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim drpriority <0‐4294967294> Configures the designated router priority. The default value is 1. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim drpriority Resets the designated router priority to its default value of 1. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip pim enable Enables or disables PIM on the interface. Command mode: Interface IP © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 566 Table 328. PIM Interface Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ip pim helloholdtime <1‐65535> Configures the time period in seconds for which a neighbor is to consider this switch to be operative (up). The default value is 105 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim helloholdtime Resets the PIM Hello packets hold time to its default value of 105 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim hellointerval <0‐65535> Configures the time interval, in seconds, between PIM Hello packets. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim hellointerval Resets the time interval between PIM Hello packets to its default value of 30 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim joinpruneinterval <0‐65535> Configures the interval between Join Prune messages, in seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim joinpruneinterval Resets the interval between Join Prune messages to its default value of 60 seconds. Command mode: Interface IP ip pim landelay <0‐32767> Configures the LAN delay value for the router interface, in seconds. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim landelay Resets the LAN delay for the router interface to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip pim lanprunedelay Enables or disables LAN delay advertisements on the interface. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Interface IP G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 567 PIM Interface Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ip pim neighboraddr <IP address> {allow|deny} Allows or denies PIM access to the specified neighbor. You can configure a list of up to 72 neighbors that bypass the neighbor filter. Once you configure the interface to allow a neighbor, you can configure the interface to deny the neighbor. Command mode: Interface IP [no] ip pim neighborfilter Enables or disables the PIM neighbor filter on the interface. When enabled, this interface does not accept any PIM neighbors, unless specifically permitted using the following command: ip pim neighboraddr <IP address> Command mode: Interface IP ip pim overrideinterval <0‐65535> Configures the override interval for the router interface, in seconds. Command mode: Interface IP [default|no] ip pim overrideinterval Resets the override interval for the router interface to its default value. Command mode: Interface IP default ip pim Resets the PIM configuration on the interface to its default values. Command mode: Interface IP show ip pim neighborfilters Displays the configured PIM neighbor filters. Command mode: All show ip pim interface [<1‐126>|detail|loopback <1‐5>|port <port alias or number>] Displays the current PIM interface parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 568 IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration The switch supports IPv6 default gateways, as follows:  Gateway 1: data traffic  Gateway 4: management port The following table describes the IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration commands. Table 329. IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip gateway6 {1|4} address <IPv6 address> [enable] Configures the IPv6 address of the default gateway, in hexadecimal format with colons (such as 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:12). The enable option also enables the gateway. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip gateway6 {1|4} enable Enables or disables the default gateway. Command mode: Global configuration no ip gateway6 {1|4} Deletes the default gateway. Command mode: Global configuration show ipv6 gateway6 {1|4} Displays the current IPv6 default gateway configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 569: Ipv6 Static Route Configuration
<default IPv6 gateway address>|interface <IP interface number>|all] Clears the selected IPv6 static routes. Command mode: Global configuration show ipv6 route static Displays the current static route configuration. Command mode: All IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Configuration The following table describes the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache configuration commands. Table 331. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage ip neighbors <IPv6 address> <MAC address> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> port <port number or alias> Adds a static entry to the Neighbor Discovery cache table. Command mode: Global configuration no ip neighbors <IPv6 address> Deletes the selected entry from the static Neighbor Discovery cache table. Command mode: Global configuration no ip neighbors all [ip <IP interface number>|interface port <port alias or number>|vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>] Clears the selected static entries in the Neighbor Discovery cache table. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 570 IPv6 Path MTU Configuration The following table describes the configuration options for Path MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit). The Path MTU cache can consume system memory and affect performance. These commands allow you to manage the Path MTU cache. Table 332. IPv6 Path MTU Options Command Syntax and Usage ip pmtu6 timeout {0|<10‐100>} Sets the timeout value for Path MTU cache entries, in minutes. Enter 0 (zero) to set the timeout to infinity (no timeout). The default value is 10 minutes. Command mode: Global configuration clear ipv6 pmtu Clears all entries in the Path MTU cache. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show ipv6 pmtu Displays the current Path MTU configuration. Command mode: All IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Configuration The following table describes the Neighbor Discovery prefix configuration options. These commands allow you to define a list of prefixes to be placed in Prefix Information options in Router Advertisement messages sent from an interface. Table 333. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Options Command Syntax and Usage interface ip <1‐128>...
Page 571 Disables the autonomous flag. When enabled, the autonomous flag indicates that the prefix can be used for stateless address configuration. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd prefix <IPv6 prefix> <IPv6 prefix length> offlink Disables the on‐link flag. When enabled, the on‐link flag indicates that this prefix can be used for on‐link determination. When disabled, the advertisement makes no statement about on‐link or off‐link properties of the prefix. The default setting is enabled. To clear the off‐link flag, omit the off‐link parameter when you issue this command. Command mode: Interface IP ipv6 nd prefix <IPv6 prefix> <IPv6 prefix length> validlifetime {<0‐4294967295>|infinite|variable <0‐4294967295>} [preferedlifetime {<0‐4294967295>|infinite|variable}] [noautoconfig] [offlink] Configures the Valid Lifetime and (optionally) the Preferred Lifetime of the prefix, in seconds. The Valid Lifetime is the length of time (relative to the time the packet is sent) that the prefix is valid for the purpose of on‐link determination. The default value is 2592000. The Preferred Lifetime is the length of time (relative to the time the packet is sent) that addresses generated from the prefix via stateless address autoconfiguration remain preferred. The default value is 604800. Note: The Preferred Lifetime value must not exceed the Valid Lifetime value. Command mode: Interface IP show ipv6 prefix <IP interface number> Displays current Neighbor Discovery prefix parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 572 IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Configuration The following table describes the configuration options for the IPv6 Prefix Policy Table. The Prefix Policy Table allows you to override the default address selection criteria. Table 334. IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip prefixpolicy <IPv6 prefix> <IPv6 prefix length> <precedence (0‐100)> <label (0‐100)> Adds or removes a Prefix Policy Table entry. Enter the following parameters: IPv6 address prefix  Prefix length  Precedence: The precedence is used to sort destination addresses. Prefixes  with a higher precedence are sorted before those with a lower precedence. Label: The label allows you to select prefixes based on matching labels.  Source prefixes are coupled with destination prefixes if their labels match. Command mode: Global configuration show ip prefixpolicy Displays the current Prefix Policy Table configuration. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 573 Command Syntax and Usage interface loopback <1‐5> Enter Interface loopback mode. Command mode: Global configuration no interface loopback <1‐5> Deletes the selected loopback interface. Command mode: Global configuration [no] enable Enables or disables the loopback interface. Command mode: Interface loopback ip address <IP address> [<subnet mask>] [enable] Defines the loopback interface IP address. You can also specify its subnet mask. The enable option also enables the loopback interface. Command mode: Interface loopback ip netmask <subnet mask> Defines the loopback interface subnet mask. Command mode: Interface loopback ip ospf area <0‐5> Configures the OSPF area index used by the loopback interface. Command mode: Interface loopback [no] ip ospf enable Enables or disables OSPF for the loopback interface. Command mode: Interface loopback no ip ospf Deletes the OSPF interface. Command mode: Interface loopback show interface loopback <1‐5> Displays the current IP loopback interface parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 574: Dhcp Snooping
DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP packets and by maintaining a binding table of trusted interfaces. Table 336. DHCP Snooping Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip dhcp snooping Enables or disables DHCP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration ip dhcp snooping binding <MAC address> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> <IP address> port <port alias or number> expiry <1‐4294967295> Adds a manual entry to the binding table. Command mode: Global configuration no ip dhcp snooping binding {<MAC address>|all [interface port <port alias or number>|vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>]} Removes an entry from the binding table. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip dhcp snooping information optioninsert Enables or disables option 82 support for DHCP Snooping. When enabled, DHCP Snooping performs the following functions: if a DHCP packet from a client contains option 82 information, the  information is retained. when DHCP Snooping forwards a DHCP packet from a client, option 82  information is added to the packet. when DHCP snooping forward a DHCP packet from a server, option 82  information is removed from the packet. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Adds or removes the selected VLAN to DHCP Snooping. Member ports participate in DHCP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration show ip dhcp snooping Displays the current DHCP Snooping parameters.
Page 575 Converged Enhanced Ethernet Configuration The following table describes the Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) configuration commands. Table 337. CEE Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] cee enable Globally enables or disables CEE. Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee iscsi enable Enables or disables ISCSI TLV advertisements. Command mode: Global configuration show cee iscsi Displays the current ISCSI TLV parameters. Command mode: All show cee Displays the current CEE parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 576 ETS Global Configuration Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) allows you to allocate bandwidth to different traffic types, based on 802.1p priority. Note: ETS configuration supersedes the QoS 802.1p menu and commands. When ETS is enabled, you cannot configure the 802.1p options. ETS Global Priority Group Configuration The following table describes the global ETS Priority Group configuration options. Table 338. Global ETS Priority Group Options Command Syntax and Usage cee global ets prioritygroup pgid <0‐7, 15> bandwidth <bandwidth percentage (0, 10‐100)> Allows you to configure the link bandwidth percentage allocated to the Priority Group. Note: Priority Group 15 is a strict priority group and does not need bandwidth assigned to it. Command mode: Global configuration cee global ets prioritygroup pgid <0‐7, 15> description <1‐31 characters> Enter text that describes this Priority Group. Command mode: Global configuration no cee global ets prioritygroup <0‐7, 15> description Deletes the Priority Group description. Command mode: Global configuration cee global ets prioritygroup pgid <0‐7, 15> priority <802.1p priority (0‐7)> Allows you to assign one or more 802.1p values to the Priority Group. Command mode: Global configuration show cee global ets Displays the current global ETS parameters.
Page 577 Priority‐based Flow Control (PFC) enhances flow control by allowing the switch to pause traffic based on its 802.1p priority value, while allowing traffic at other priority levels to continue. Global Priority Flow Control Configuration Table 339 describes the global PFC Priority Group configuration options. Table 339. Global PFC Prority Group Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] cee global pfc enable Globally enables or disables Priority Flow Control on all ports. Command mode: Global configuration cee global pfc priority <0‐7> description <1‐31 characters> Enter text that describes this Priority Group. Command mode: Global configuration no cee global pfc priority <0‐7> description Removes the description for the specified Priority Group. Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee global pfc priority <0‐7> enable Enables or disables Priority Flow Control for the specified priority level. Command mode: Global configuration show cee global pfc Displays the current Priority Flow Control global configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 578 802.1p PFC Configuration The following table describes the 802.1p Priority Flow Control (PFC) configuration options. Table 340. PFC 802.1p Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] cee port <port alias or number> pfc enable Enables or disables Priority Flow Control on the specified port. Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> pfc priority <0‐7> enable Enables or disables Priority Flow Control on the selected 802.1p priority. Note: PFC can be enabled on 802.1p priority 3 and one other priority only. Command mode: Global configuration cee port <port alias or number> pfc priority <0‐7> description <1‐31 characters> Enter text to describe the priority value. Command mode: Global configuration no cee port <port alias or number> pfc priority <0‐7> description Deletes the description for the specified priority value. Command mode: Global configuration show cee port <port alias or number> pfc Displays the current 802.1p Priority Flow Control configuration on the specified port or ports. Command mode: All show cee port <port alias or number> pfc priority <0‐7> Displays the current 802.1p Priority Flow Control parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 579 [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx app_proto advertise Enables or disables DCBX Application Protocol advertisements of configuration data. When enabled, the Advertisement flag is set to 1 (advertise data to the peer device). Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx app_proto willing Enables or disables Application Protocol willingness to accept configuration data from the peer device. When enabled, the Willing flag is set to 1 (willing to accept data). Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx enable Enables or disables DCBX on the port. Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx ets advertise Enables or disables DCBX ETS advertisements of configuration data. When enabled, the Advertisement flag is set to 1 (advertise data to the peer device). Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx ets willing Enables or disables ETS willingness to accept configuration data from the peer device. When enabled, the Willing flag is set to 1 (willing to accept data). Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx pfc advertise Enables or disables DCBX PFC advertisements of configuration data. When enabled, the Advertisement flag is set to 1 (advertise data to the peer device). Command mode: Global configuration [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx pfc willing Enables or disables PFC willingness to accept configuration data from the peer device. When enabled, the Willing flag is set to 1 (willing to accept data). Command mode: Global configuration show cee port <port alias or number> dcbx Displays the current port DCBX parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 580 Fibre Channel Configuration As a converged switch, the G8264CS provides combined support for Ethernet and Fibre Channel (FC) networks. Ports 53‐64 are hybrid, allowing them to operate in either Ethernet mode (the default), or in Fibre Channel mode for direct connection to Fibre Channel devices. The G8264CS can be used in the following Fibre Channel applications: As an FCoE gateway for bridging FCoE and Fibre Channel networks   As a Node Port Virtualized (NPV) Gateway for uplinking multiple Fibre Channel nodes to a full fabric switch  As a Full‐Fabric Switch — a central element of a Fibre Channel network The following table describes generic Fibre Channel configuration options. Table 342. Fibre Channel Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] system port <low port><high port> type fc Enables or disables Fibre Channel mode on the specified port range. Fibre Channel can be enabled only for port pairs, specifically for: 53‐54, 55‐56 and 57‐58. The default setting is disabled (ports are in Ethernet mode). Note: VLAN tagging is automatically enabled on any ports placed in Fibre Channel mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] fcalias <1‐64 characters> wwn <port World Wide Name> Configures or removes an FC alias name for the specified port World Wide Name. Command mode: Global configuration fcdomain domain <0‐239> {preferred|static} Configures the domain type for the specified FC domain ID: preferred allows the domain ID to be re‐assigned. If the switch does not get  its requested domain ID, it accepts any assigned domain ID. static does not allow the domain ID to be re‐assigned. If the switch does ...
Page 581 The default setting is enabled (no shutdown). Command mode: FC Port configuration fcspeed {4|8|auto} Configures the Fibre Channel port speed in Gbps or allows the port to negotiate its speed automatically. The default setting is auto. Command mode: FC Port configuration [no] type e Enable the FC port to type E or disable the E port. Command mode: FC Port configuration FC VLAN Configuration Use the following commands to configure the Fibre Channel Forwarding VLAN. Table 344. FCF VLAN Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Enter VLAN configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] fcf enable Enables or disables the VLAN as Fibre Channel Forwarding VLAN. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: VLAN configuration npv disruptiveloadbalance Triggers a disruptive load‐balance among the logged‐in nodes in the current NPV VLAN. Command mode: VLAN configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 582 Table 344. FCF VLAN Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] npv autodisruptiveloadbalance enable Automatically triggers a load‐balance if an imbalance is detected in the current NPV VLAN. Any new uplinks are monitored and the switch will assess the load on existing links. If necessary, the enodes will be redistributed to the new uplink. The no form of the command removes the automated option. Any new uplinks will not trigger a disruptive load balance. Note: A switch reboot will not affect the status of this command. Command mode: VLAN configuration [no] npv enable Enables or disables NPV gateway functionality for the VLAN. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: VLAN configuration [no] npv trafficmap externalinterface <FC port alias or number> Enables or disables the selected ports as NP (external uplink) ports. Command mode: VLAN configuration fcoe fcmap <fabric map ID> Configures the global FC‐map that identifies the FC fabric used by the switch. The switch will discard MAC addresses that are not part of the current fabric, which avoids cross‐fabric talk. The FC‐map is a 24‐bit hexadecimal value. The default value is 0x0efc00. Command mode: VLAN configuration no fcoe fcmap Resets the FC‐map to the default 0x0efc00 value. Command mode: VLAN configuration fcoe fcfpriority <0‐255> Configures the FCF priority. When an FC initiator sends login requests to multiple FCFs, it selects the one with the highest priority value. The default value is 128. Command mode: VLAN configuration no fcoe fcfpriority Resets the FCF priority to the default 128 value. Command mode: VLAN configuration fcoe fkaadvperiod <8‐90>...
Page 583 Table 345. Fibre Channel Zone Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage zone name <1‐64 characters> Enter FC Zone configuration mode for the specified zone. If the zone doesn’t exist, it is created. Command mode: Global configuration no zone name <1‐64 characters> Deletes the specified FC Zone. Command mode: Global configuration zone clone <selected zone name> <new zone name> Creates a new zone with the attributes of the selected zone. Command mode: Global configuration zone rename <current name> <new name> Renames the FC zone. Command mode: Global configuration [no] zone defaultzone permit Permits or denies traffic flow to default zone members. Command mode: Global configuration [no] member {pwwn <pwwn>|fcid <ID number>|fcalias <alias ID>} Adds or removes zone members based on: pwwn: Port World Wide Number  fcid: FC ID of the port, in hex format (for example, 0xce00d1).  fcalias: Alias name of the FC device.  Command mode: FC Zone configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 584 FC Zoneset Configuration Use the following commands to configure Fibre Channel zonesets. Table 346. Fibre Channel Zoneset Configuration Commands Command Syntax and Usage [no] zoneset name <1‐64 characters> Enter FC Zoneset configuration mode for the specified zone. If the zoneset doesn’t exist, it is created. Command mode: Global configuration no zoneset name <1‐64 characters> Deletes the specified FC Zoneset. Command mode: Global configuration [no] zoneset activate name <1‐64 characters> Activates or deactivates the zoneset. Only one zoneset can be active at any point in time. Activating a zoneset automatically deactivates any other zoneset currently active. Command mode: Global configuration zoneset clone <selected zoneset name> <new zoneset name> Creates a new zoneset with the attributes of the selected zoneset. Command mode: Global configuration zone copy activezoneset runningconfig Copies the active zoneset database to the running configuration. Command mode: Global configuration zoneset rename <current name> <new name> Renames the FC zoneset. Command mode: Global configuration [no] member <1‐64 characters> Adds or removes a zone from the zoneset. Command mode: FC Zoneset configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 585 FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping Configuration Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) transports Fibre Channel frames over an Ethernet fabric. The CEE features and FCoE features allow you to create a lossless Ethernet transport mechanism. The following table describes the FCoE configuration options. Table 347. FCoE Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] fcoe fips enable Globally enables or disables FIP Snooping. Command mode: Global configuration [no] fcoe optimizedforwarding enable Enables or disables QLFC optimized forwarding. The default value is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration [no] fcoe fips timeoutacl Enables or disables ACL time‐out removal. When enabled, ACLs associated with expired FCFs and FCoE connections are removed from the system. Command mode: Global configuration show fcoe information Displays the current FCoE parameters. Command mode: All show fcoe optimizedacl vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4095)> Displays optimized ACLs installed on a specific VLAN. Command mode: All show fcoe optimizedforwarding status Displays the current status of the QLFC optimized forwarding. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 586 FIPS Port Configuration FIP Snooping allows the switch to monitor FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) frames to gather discovery, initialization, and maintenance data. This data is used to automatically configure ACLs that provide FCoE connections and data security. The following table describes the port Fibre Channel over Ethernet Initialization Protocol (FIP) Snooping configuration options. Table 348. Port FIP Snooping Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] fcoe fips port <port alias or number> enable Enables or disables FIP Snooping on the port. The default setting is enabled. Command mode: Global configuration fcoe fips port <port alias or number> fcfmode [auto|on|off] Configures FCoE Forwarding (FCF) on the port, as follows: on: Configures the port as a Fibre Channel Forwarding (FCF) port.  off: Configures the port as an FCoE node (ENode port).  auto: Automatically detect the configuration of the connected device, and  configure this port to match. Command mode: Global configuration G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 587: Remote Monitoring Configuration
RMON History Configuration The following table describes the RMON History commands. Table 349. RMON History Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage rmon history <1‐65535> interfaceoid <1‐127 characters> Configures the interface MIB Object Identifier. The IFOID must correspond to the standard interface OID, as follows: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.X, where X is the ifIndex. Command mode: Global configuration rmon history <1‐65535> owner <1‐127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this History index. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon history <1‐65535> owner Deletes the identification information for the specified History index. Command mode: Global configuration rmon history <1‐65535> pollinginterval <1‐3600> Configures the time interval over which the data is sampled for each bucket. The default value is 1800. Command mode: Global configuration rmon history <1‐65535> requestedbuckets <1‐65535> Configures the requested number of buckets, which is the number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved. The default value is 30. The maximum number of buckets that can be granted is 50. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 588: Rmon Event Configuration
Table 349. RMON History Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage no rmon history <1‐65535> Deletes the selected History index. Command mode: Global configuration show rmon history Displays the current RMON History parameters. Command mode: All RMON Event Configuration The following table describes the RMON Event commands. Table 350. RMON Event Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage rmon event <1‐65535> description <1‐127 characters> Enter a text string to describe the event. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon event <1‐65535> description Deletes the description of the specified event index. Command mode: Global configuration rmon event <1‐65535> owner <1‐127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this Event index. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon event <1‐65535> owner Deletes the identification information for the specified Event index. Command mode: Global configuration rmon event <1‐65535> type {log|trap|both} Selects the type of notification provided for this event. For log events, an entry is made in the log table and sent to the configured syslog host. For trap events, an SNMP trap is sent to the management station. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon event <1‐65535> type Removes notification provided for this event.
Page 589: Rmon Alarm Configuration
RMON Alarm Configuration The alarm RMON group can track rising or falling values for a MIB object. The MIB object must be a counter, gauge, integer, or time interval. Each alarm index must correspond to an event index that triggers once the alarm threshold is crossed. The following table describes the RMON alarm commands. Table 351. RMON Alarm Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage rmon alarm <1‐65535> alarmtype {rising|falling|either} Configures the alarm type as rising, falling or either (rising or falling). Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> fallingcrossingindex <0‐65535> Configures the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> fallinglimit <‐2147483647 ‐ 2147483647> Configures the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single event is generated. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> interval <1‐65535> Configures the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. The default value is 1800. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> oid <1‐127 characters> Configures an alarm MIB Object Identifier. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 590 Table 351. RMON Alarm Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage rmon alarm <1‐65535> owner <1‐127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this alarm index. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon alarm <1‐65535> owner Deletes the identification information for the specified Alarm index. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> risingcrossingindex <0‐65535> Configures the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> risinglimit <‐2147483647 ‐ 2147483647> Configures the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single event is generated. Command mode: Global configuration rmon alarm <1‐65535> sample {abs|delta} Configures the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, as follows: abs ‐ absolute value, the value of the selected variable is compared directly  with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. delta ‐ delta value, the value of the selected variable at the last sample is  subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds. Command mode: Global configuration no rmon alarm <1‐65535> Deletes the selected RMON Alarm index. Command mode: Global configuration show rmon alarm Displays the current RMON Alarm parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 591: Vm Policy Bandwidth Management
358. Note: The no form of this command deletes all configured VM groups. Command mode: Global configuration show virt Displays the current virtualization parameters. Command mode: All VM Policy Bandwidth Management The following table describes the bandwidth management options for the selected VM. Use these commands to limit the bandwidth used by each VM. Table 353. VM Bandwidth Management Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] virt vmpolicy vmbwidth {<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>} bwctrl Enables or disables bandwidth control on the VM policy. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmpolicy vmbwidth {<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>} rxrate <0‐40000000> <max. burst (0‐4096)> The first value configures Committed Rate—the amount of bandwidth available to traffic transmitted from the switch to the VM, in kilobits per second. Enter the value in multiples of 64. The second values configures the maximum burst size, in kilobits. Enter one of the following values: 0, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 592 Table 353. VM Bandwidth Management Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage virt vmpolicy vmbwidth {<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>} txrate <0‐40000000> <max. burst (0‐4096)> [<ACL number>] The first value configures Committed Rate—the amount of bandwidth available to traffic transmitted from the VM to the switch, in kilobits per second. Enter the value in multiples of 64. The second values configures the maximum burst size, in kilobits. Enter one of the following values: 0, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096. The third value represents the ACL assigned to the transmission rate. The ACL is added automatically, in sequential order, if not specified by the user. If there are no available ACLs, the TXrate cannot be configured. Each TXrate configuration reduces the number of available ACLs by one. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmpolicy vmbwidth {<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>} Deletes the bandwidth management settings from this VM policy. Command mode: Global configuration show virt vmpolicy vmbwidth [<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>| |<IP address>|<index number>|<index range>] [|{include|exclude| |section|begin}] Displays the current VM bandwidth management parameters for all virtual machines or only for a certain VM by specifying its MAC address, UUID, name, IP address or index number. | displays the VM bandwidth management parameters matching one of the  following filters: • include displays parameters matching the specified expression • exclude displays parameters not matching the specified expression • section displays parameters matching the specified section • begin displays parameters beginning from the first parameter that matches the specified expression Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 593: Vm Group Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> cpu Enables or disables sending unregistered IPMC traffic to the CPU. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> flood Enables or disables the flooding of unregistered IPMC traffic. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> key <1‐65535> Adds or removes an LACP admin key to/from the VM group. LACP LAGs formed with this admin key will be included in the VM group. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> optflood Enables or disables Optimized Flooding on the VM group. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> port <port alias or number> Adds or removes the selected port to/from the VM group. Note: A port can be added to a VM group only if no VMs on that port are members of the VM group. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> portchannel <1‐64> Adds or removes the selected LAG to/from the VM group. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmgroup <1‐4096> profile <profile name (1‐39 characters)> Adds the selected VM profile to the VM group. Note: This command can only be used if the VM group is empty (that is, it only has a profile assigned). Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmgroup <1‐4096> profile Removes the VM profile assigned to the VM group. Note: This command can only be used if the VM group is empty (only has the profile assigned). Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 594 Table 354. VM Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage virt vmgroup <1‐4096> stg <1‐128> Assigns the VM group to a Spanning Tree Group (STG). Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> tag Enables or disables VLAN tagging on ports in this VM group. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmgroup <1‐4096> validate {basic|advanced} Enables MAC address spoof prevention for the specified VM group. basic validation ensures lightweight port‐based protection by  cross‐checking the VM MAC address, switch port and switch ID between the switch and the hypervisor. Applicable for “trusted” hypervisors, which are not susceptible to duplicating or reusing MAC addresses on virtual machines. advanced validation ensures heavyweight VM‐based protection by  cross‐checking the VM MAC address, VM UUID, switch port and switch ID between the switch and the hypervisor. Applicable for “untrusted” hypervisors, which are susceptible to duplicating or reusing MAC addresses on virtual machines. The default setting is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmgroup <1‐4096> validate Disables MAC address spoof prevention for the specified VM group. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmgroup <1‐4096> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Assigns a VLAN to this VM group. If you do not assign a VLAN to the VM group, the switch automatically assigns the first unused VLAN when adding a port or a VM to the VM Group. Note: If you add a VM profile to this group, the group will use the VLAN assigned to the profile. Command mode: Global configuration [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> vm {<VM MAC address index (0‐4095)>| |<MAC address>|<UUID>|<name>|<IP address>} Adds or removes a VM to/from the VM group. Enter a unique identifier to ...
Page 595 Table 354. VM Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] virt vmgroup <1‐4096> vmap <1‐128> [serverports| |nonserverports] Adds or removes the selected VLAN Map to/from this group. You can choose to limit operation of the VLAN Map to server ports only or non‐server ports only. If you do not select a port type, the VMAP is applied to the entire VM Group. For more information about configuring VLAN Maps, see “VMAP Configuration” on page 402. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmgroup <1‐4096> Deletes the VM group. Command mode: Global configuration show virt vmgroup <1‐4096> Displays the current VM group parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 596: Vm Check Configuration
VM Check Configuration The following table describes the VM Check validation options used for MAC address spoof prevention. Table 355. VM Check Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virt vmcheck acls max <1‐256> Configures the maximum number of ACLs that can be set up for MAC address spoofing prevention in advanced validation mode. The default value is 50. Command mode: Global configuration default virt vmcheck acls Sets to default maximum number of ACLs that can be set up for MAC address spoofing prevention in advanced validation mode. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmcheck acls Disables ACL‐based MAC address spoofing prevention in advanced validation mode. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmcheck action advanced {acl|link|log} Sets up action taken when detecting MAC address spoofing in advanced validation mode: acl registers a syslog entry and installs an ACL to drop traffic incoming on  the corresponding switch port originating from the spoofed MAC address link registers a syslog entry and disables the corresponding switch port  log registers a syslog entry  The default setting is acl. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmcheck action basic {link|log} Sets up action taken when detecting MAC address spoofing in basic validation mode: link registers a syslog entry and disables the corresponding switch port ...
Page 597: Vm Profile Configuration
VM Profile Configuration The following table describes the VM Profiles configuration options. Table 356. VM Profile Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virt vmprofile <profile name (1‐39 characters)> Defines a name for the VM profile. The switch supports up to 2048 VM profiles. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmprofile <profile name (1‐39 characters)> Deletes the selected VM profile. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmprofile edit <profile name (1‐39 characters)> eshaping <average (1‐1000000000)> <burst (1‐1000000000)> <peak (1‐1000000000)> Configures traffic egress shaping parameters implemented in the hypervisor, as follows: Average traffic, in kilobits per second.  Maximum burst size, in kilobits.  Peak traffic, in kilobits per second.  Delete traffic shaping parameters.  Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmprofile <profile name (1‐39 characters)> eshaping Deletes the traffic egress shaping parameters for the specified VM profile. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 598 Table 356. VM Profile Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virt vmprofile edit <profile name (1‐39 characters)> shaping <average (1‐1000000000)> <burst (1‐1000000000)> <peak (1‐1000000000)> Configures traffic shaping parameters implemented in the hypervisor, as follows: Average traffic, in kilobits per second.  Maximum burst size, in kilobits.  Peak traffic, in kilobits per second.  Delete traffic shaping parameters.  Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmprofile <profile name (1‐39 characters)> shaping Deletes the traffic shaping parameters for the specified VM profile. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmprofile edit <profile name (1‐39 characters)> vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Assigns a VLAN to the VM profile. Command mode: Global configuration show virt vmprofile [<profile name>] Displays the current VM Profile parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 599: Vmware Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage virt vmware hbport <1‐65535> Configures the UDP port number used for heartbeat communication from the VM host to the Virtual Center. The default value is port 902. Command mode: Global configuration default virt vmware hbport Sets to default esx/esxi server to vcenter heartbeat udp port. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmware hello {enable|haddr <IP address>|hport <port alias or number>|htimer <1‐60>} Configures CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) advertisements sent periodically to VMware ESX hypervisors. Exchanging CDP message with ESX hypervisors facilitates MAC address spoof prevention. Default setting is disabled. enable enables CDP advertisements transmission.  haddr advertises a specific IP address instead of the default 0.0.0.0 IP.  hport enables ports on which CDP advertisements are sent.  htimer sets the number of seconds between successive CDP  advertisements. The default value is 30 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration default virt vmware hello htimer Sets to default HELLO periodicity. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmware hello {enable|hport <port alias or number>} Disables CDP advertisement transmissions completely or only on specific ports. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 600: Miscellaneous Vmready Configuration
Virtual Center, VM Agent functionality is enabled across the system. You are prompted for the following information: IP address of the Virtual Center  User name and password for the Virtual Center  Whether to authenticate the SSL security certificate (yes or no)  Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmware vcspec Deletes the Virtual Center credentials on the switch. Command mode: Global configuration show virt vmware Displays the current VMware parameters. Command mode: All Miscellaneous VMReady Configuration You can pre‐configure MAC addresses as VM Organization Unique Identifiers (OUIs). These configuration commands are only available using the Lenovo N/OS CLI and the Miscellaneous VMReady Configuration Menu. The following table describes the VMReady configuration options. Table 358. VMReady Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] virt vmrmisc lmac Enables or disables the switch to treat locally administered MAC addresses as VMs. Command mode: Global configuration virt vmrmisc oui <3 byte VM MAC OUI> <Vendor Name> Adds a MAC OUI. Command mode: Global configuration no virt vmrmisc oui <3 byte VM MAC OUI> Removes a MAC OUI. Command mode: Global configuration show virt oui Displays all the configured MAC OUIs.
Page 601: Virtual Nic Configuration
Command Syntax and Usage [no] vnic enable Globally enables or disables vNIC. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vnic uplinkshare Enable or disable vNIC shared mode. When enabled, multiple vNIC groups can be assigned to an uplink port. Command mode: Global configuration [no] vnic egressbwmeter Enables or disables vNIC bandwidth metering. When enabled, any bandwidth which is not used by the vNIC to which it is allocated is shared with other vNICs. In all cases, the configured values for minimum bandwidth are honored. Only the excess bandwidth is shared. Command mode: Global configuration show vnic Displays the current vNIC parameters. Command mode: All vNIC Port Configuration The following table describes the Virtual NIC (vNIC) port configuration options. Table 360. vNIC Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage vnic port <port alias or number> index <1‐4> Enters vNIC Configuration mode. Note: This command is valid for internal server ports only. Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 602: Virtual Nic Group Configuration
Table 360. vNIC Port Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage bandwidth <1‐100> Configures the maximum bandwidth allocated to this vNIC, in increments of 100 Mbps. For example: 1 = 100 Mbps  10 = 1000 Mbps  Command mode: vNIC configuration [no] enable Enables or disables the vNIC. Command mode: vNIC configuration Virtual NIC Group Configuration The following table describes the Virtual NIC (vNIC) Group configuration options. Table 361. vNIC Group Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage vnic vnicgroup <1‐32> Enters vNIC Group Configuration mode. Command mode: Global Configuration [no] enable Enables or disables the vNIC Group. Command mode: vNIC Group configuration [no] failover Enables or disables uplink failover for the vNIC Group. Uplink Failover for the vNIC Group will disable only the affected vNIC links on the port. Other port functions continue to operate normally. The default setting is disabled.
Page 603 Table 361. vNIC Group Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage [no] trunk <1‐64> Adds or removes the selected Link Aggregation Group (LAG) to the vNIC Group. Command mode: vNIC Group configuration vlan <VLAN number> Assigns a VLAN to the vNIC Group. Command mode: vNIC Group configuration no vnic vnicgroup <1‐32> Deletes the selected vNIC Group. Command mode: Global configuration show vnicgroup Displays the current vNIC Group parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 604: Edge Virtual Bridge Configuration
Edge Virtual Bridge Configuration You can configure your switch to use Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB). The following table describes EVB configuration commands. Table 362. Edge Virtual Bridge Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virt evb vsidb <VSIDB number> Enter Virtual Station Interface Database configuration mode. For more details, see page 605. Command mode: Global configuration virt evb profile <profile number> Enter Virtual Station Interface Profile configuration mode. For more details, see page 607. Command mode: Global configuration show virt evb vsidb <VSIDB number> Displays the current Virtual Station Interface database information. Command mode: All show virt evb profile [<profile number>] Displays the current EVB profile parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 605: Edge Virtual Bridge Vsi Type Database Configuration
Enter Virtual Station Interface Database configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration filename <file name> Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database document name. Command mode: VSI Database no filename Deletes the Virtual Station Interface Type database document name. Command mode: VSI Database filepath <file path> Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database document path. Command mode: VSI Database no filepath Deletes the Virtual Station Interface Type database document path. Command mode: VSI Database host <IP address> [mgtport|dataport] Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database manager IP address and the port used for the connection. By default, the management port is used. Command mode: VSI Database port <1‐65534> Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database manager port. Command mode: VSI Database protocol {http|https} Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database transport protocol. The default setting is HTTP. Command mode: VSI Database updateinterval <5‐300> Sets the Virtual Station Interface Type database update interval in seconds. Command mode: VSI Database [no] updateinterval Disables the Virtual Station Interface Type database periodic update. Command mode: VSI Database © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 606 Table 363. Edge Virtual Bridge VSI Type Database Configuration Options (continued) Command Syntax and Usage no virt evb vsidb <VSIDB number> Resets the Virtual Station Interface Type database information to the default values. Command mode: Global configuration show virt evb vsitypes [mgrid <0‐255>|typeid <1‐16777215>| |version <0‐255>] Displays the current Virtual Station Interface Type database parameters. Command mode: All show virt evb vsidb <VSIDB number> Displays the current Virtual Station Interface database information. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 607: Edge Virtual Bridge Vsi Type Profile Configuration
Table 364. Edge Virtual Bridge VSI Type Profile Configuration Options Command Syntax and Usage virt evb profile <profile number> Enter Virtual Station Interface type profile configuration mode. Command mode: Global configuration [no] reflectiverelay Enables or disables VEPA mode (Reflective Relay capability). Command mode: EVB Profile [no] vsidiscovery Enables or disables VSI Discovery (ECP and VDP). Command mode: EVB Profile no virt evb profile <profile number> Deletes the specified EVB profile. Command mode: Global configuration evb profile <1‐16> Applies the specified EVB profile for the port. Automatically enables LLDP EVB TLV on the corresponding port. Command mode: Interface port no evb profile Resets EVB profile for the port. Automatically disables LLDP EVB TLV on the corresponding port. Command mode: Interface port show virt evb profile [<1‐16>] Displays the current EVB profile parameters. Command mode: All show virt evb profile ports Displays all EVB profile parameters including ports. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 608: Service Location Protocol Configuration
Service Location Protocol Configuration Service Location Protocol (SLP) enables networked devices to request/announce services over a local area network without prior configuration. In an SLP environment, devices may have the following roles:  User Agents (UA) are devices requesting services.  Service Agents (SA) are devices providing services.  Directory Agents (DA) are devices caching services provided by SAs. When present in an SLA setup, DAs mediate all communication between UAs and SAs. When SLP is enabled, the RackSwitch G8264CS behaves as a Service Agent providing systems management services. Table 365. Service Location Protocol Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] ip slp activedadiscovery enable Enables or disables active directory agent discovery. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration ip slp activedadiscoverystartwaittime <1‐10> Number of seconds to wait after enabling SLP before attempting active DA discovery, if active DA discovery is enabled. The default value is 3 seconds. Command mode: Global configuration [no] ip slp enable Enables or disables SLP. The default value is disabled. Command mode: Global configuration clear ip slp directoryagents Clears directory agents discovered. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show ip slp directoryagents Displays DA information.
Page 609: Configuration Dump
Configuration Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump program, at the prompt, enter: RS G8264CS# show runningconfig The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via SFTP/FTP/TFTP, as described on page 610. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 610: Saving The Active Switch Configuration
Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the copy runningconfig command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using show runningconfig) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the prompt, enter: RS G8264CS# copy runningconfig ftp or: RS G8264CS# copy runningconfig sftp or: RS G8264CS# copy runningconfig tftp The switch prompts you for the server address and filename. Note: The output file is formatted with line‐breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). Note: If the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified configuration file must exist prior to executing the copy runningconfig command and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 611: Restoring The Active Switch Configuration
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the copy runningconfig command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. To start the switch configuration download, at the prompt, enter: RS G8264CS# copy ftp runningconfig or: RS G8264CS# copy sftp runningconfig or: RS G8264CS# copy tftp runningconfig The switch prompts you for the server address and filename. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 4: Configuration Commands...
Page 612: Usb Copy
USB Copy If a USB drive is inserted into the USB port, you can copy files from the switch to the USB drive, or from the USB drive to the switch. You also can boot the switch using software or configuration files found on the USB drive (see “USB Boot Configuration” on page 629). Copy to USB Use the following command to copy a file from the switch to the USB drive: usbcopy tousb <filename> {active|boot|crashdump|image1|image2| |syslog} Command mode: Privileged EXEC In this example, the active configuration file is copied to a directory on the USB drive: RS G8264CS# usbcopy tousb a_folder/myconfig.cfg active Copy from USB Use the following command to copy a file from the USB drive to the switch: usbcopy fromusb <filename> {active|boot|image1|image2} Command mode: Privileged EXEC In this example, the active configuration file is copied from a directory on the USB drive: RS G8264CS# usbcopy fromusb a_folder/myconfig.cfg active The new file replaces the current file. Note: Do not use two consecutive dot characters ( .. ). Do not use a slash character ( / ) to begin a filename. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 613: Chapter 5. Operations Commands
Chapter 5. Operations Commands Operations commands generally affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use Operations commands to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with the understanding that when the switch is rebooted, the port returns to its normally configured operation. These commands enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. Table 366. General Operations Commands Command Syntax and Usage access tnetsshc Closes all open Telnet and SSH connections. Command Mode: Global configuration consolelog Enables or disables session console logging. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC ntp send Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC password <1‐128 characters> Allows the user to change the password. You must enter the current password in use for validation. The switch prompts for a new password between 1‐128 characters. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC clear logging Clears all Syslog messages. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 614: Operations‐Level Port Commands
Operations-Level Port Commands Operations‐level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port, and for re‐setting the port. Table 367. Port Operations Command Syntax and Usage [no] interface port <port alias or number> rmon Temporarily enables or disables remote monitoring of the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is rebooted. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC interface port <port alias or number> shutdown Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is rebooted. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC no interface port <port alias or number> shutdown Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is rebooted. Command Mode: Privileged EXEC show interface port <port alias or number> operation Displays the port interface operational state. Command Mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 615: Operations‐Level Vrrp Commands
Operations-Level VRRP Commands VRRP operation commands are listed in the following table. Table 368. Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Command Syntax and Usage router vrrp backup {<virtual router number (1‐128)>|group} Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. When this command is executed, the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). After the new election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router  and its IP interface are the same). This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.  There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.  Command Mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 5: Operations Commands...
Page 616: Vmware Operations
VMware Operations Use these commands to perform minor adjustments to the VMware operation. Use these commands to perform Virtual Switch operations directly from the switch. Note that these commands require the configuration of Virtual Center access information (virt vmware vcspec). Table 369. VMware Operations Command Syntax and Usage virt vmware export <VM profile name> <VMware host ID> <Virtual Switch name> Exports a VM Profile to a VMware host. Use one of the following identifiers to specify each host: UUID  IP address  Host name  You may enter a Virtual Switch name, or enter a new name to create a new Virtual Switch. Command Mode: All virt vmware pg <Port Group name> <host ID> <VSwitch name> <VLAN ID (0‐4094)> <shaping‐enabled> [<average‐Kbps> <burst‐KB> <peak‐Kbps>] Adds a Port Group to a VMware host. You are prompted for the following information: Port Group name  VMware host ID (Use host UUID, host IP address, or host name.)  Virtual Switch name  VLAN ID of the Port Group  Whether to enable the traffic‐shaping profile (1 or 0). If you choose 1 (yes), ...
Page 617 Updates a VMware host’s Port Group parameters. Use one of the following identifiers for the host ID: UUID  IP address  Host name  Enter the traffic shaping parameters as follows: Shaping enabled  Average traffic, in kilobits per second  Maximum burst size, in kilobytes  Peak traffic, in kilobits per second  Delete traffic shaping parameters. Command Mode: All virt vmware vmacpg <VM NIC MAC address> <Port Group name> Changes a VM NIC’s configured Port Group. Command Mode: All [no] virt vmware vsw <host ID> <Virtual Switch name> Adds or removes a Virtual Switch to a VMware host. Use one of the following identifiers to specify the host: UUID  IP address  Host name  Command Mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 5: Operations Commands...
Page 618: Vmware Distributed Virtual Switch Operations
VMware Distributed Virtual Switch Operations Use these commands to administer a VMware Distributed Virtual Switch (dvSwitch). Table 370. VMware dvSwitch Operations (/oper/virt/vmware/dvswitch) Command Syntax and Usage virt vmware dvswitch add <datacenter name> <dvSwitch name> [<dvSwitch version>] Adds the specified dvSwitch to the specified DataCenter. Command Mode: All virt vmware dvswitch addhost <dvSwitch name> {<host UUID| |host IP address|host name>} Adds the specified host to the specified dvSwitch. Use one of the following identifiers to specify the host: UUID  IP address  Host name  Command Mode: All virt vmware dvswitch adduplink <dvSwitch name> {<host UUID| |host IP address|host name>} <uplink name> Adds the specified physical NIC to the specified dvSwitch uplink ports. Command Mode: All virt vmware dvswitch del <datacenter name> <dvSwitch name> Removes the specified dvSwitch from the specified DataCenter. Command Mode: All virt vmware dvswitch remhost <dvSwitch name> {<host UUID| |host IP address|host name>} Removes the specified host from the specified dvSwitch. Use one of the following identifiers to specify the host: UUID ...
Page 619: Vmware Distributed Port Group Operations
• burst size in kilobits • peak bandwidth in kilobits per second Command Mode: All virt vmware dpg del <port group name> <dvSwitch name> Removes the specified port group from the specified dvSwitch. Command Mode: All virt vmware dpg update <port group name> <dvSwitch name> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> [ishaping <bandwidth> <burst size> <peak bandwidth>] [eshaping <bandwidth> <burst size> <peak bandwidth>] Updates the specified port group on the specified dvSwitch. You may enter the following parameters: ishaping: Enables ingress shaping. Supply the following information:  • average bandwidth in kilobits per second • burst size in kilobytes • peak bandwidth in kilobits per second eshaping: Enables egress shaping. Supply the following information:  • average bandwidth in kilobits per second • burst size in kilobytes • peak bandwidth in kilobits per second Command Mode: All virt vmware dpg vmac <VNIC MAC> <port group name> Adds the specified VM NIC to the specified port group. Command Mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 5: Operations Commands...
Page 620: Edge Virtual Bridge Operations
Edge Virtual Bridge Operations Edge Virtual Bridge operations commands are listed in the following table: Table 372. Edge Virtual Bridge Operations Commands Command Syntax and Usage virt evb update vsidb <VSIDB number> Update VSI types from the VSI database. Command mode: All clear virt evb vsi [macaddress|port <port alias or number>| |typeid <1‐16777215>|vlan <1‐4094>] Clears VSI database associations. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear virt evb vsidb [mgrid <0‐255>|typeid <1‐16777215>| |version <0‐255>] Clears local VSI types cache. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 621: Chapter 6. Boot Options
Chapter 6. Boot Options To use the Boot Options commands, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The Boot Options commands provide options for:  Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch on the next reboot  Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch on the next reboot  Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via SFTP/FTP/TFTP In addition to the Boot commands, you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image and configuration files. To use SNMP, refer to “Working with Switch Images and Configuration Files”. The boot options are discussed in the following sections. © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 622: Scheduled Reboot Of The Switch
Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off‐peak hours. You can set the reboot time, cancel a previously scheduled reboot, and check the time of the current reboot schedule. Table 373. Scheduled Reboot Options Command Syntax and Usage boot schedule <day> <time (hh:mm)> Configures the switch reboot time. The following options are valid for the day value: monday  tuesday  wednesday  thursday  friday  saturday  sunday  Command mode: Global configuration no boot schedule Cancels the switch reboot time. Command mode: Global configuration show boot Displays the current switch reboot schedule. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 623: Netboot Configuration
If DHCP is not enabled, or the DHCP server does not return the required information, the switch uses the manually‐configured TFTP server address and file path. Table 374. Netboot Options Command Syntax and Usage boot netboot cfgfile <1‐31 characters> Defines the file path for the configuration file on the TFTP server. For example: /directory/sub/config.cfg  Command mode: Global configuration no boot netboot cfgfile Removes the file path for the configuration file on the TFTP server. Command mode: Global configuration [no] boot netboot enable Enables or disables Netboot. When enabled, the switch boots into factory‐default configuration and attempts to download a new configuration file. Command mode: Global configuration [no] boot netboot tftp <IP address> Configures the IP address of the TFTP server used for manual configuration. This server is used if DHCP is not enabled or if the DHCP server does not return the required information. Command mode: Global configuration show boot Displays the current Netboot parameters. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 624: Security Policy Configuration
Security Policy Configuration The switch can be configured to use two different security modes:  Legacy policy mode  Secure policy mode Legacy Policy mode allows the switch to use all communication protocols with no regards to the security level of the protocol.The switch will be able to use both protocols that encrypt and do not encrypt their communication across the network. Secure Policy mode allows the switch to use only secure communication protocols. Protocols that are regarded as being insecure are disabled and cannot be run on the switch. The commands associated with such protocols are unavailable. The following protocols are disabled and are not available on the switch if Secure Policy mode is enabled:  HTTP LDAP Client   SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Telnet Client and Telnet Server   Telnet IPv6 Client and Telnet IPv6 Server FTP Client and FTP Server   Radius Client TACACS+ Client   Syslog Server The following protocols are enabled and available on the switch if Secure Policy mode is enabled:  DHCP Client  DHCPv6 Client ...
Page 625 LDAPS Client The following protocols are unaffected by Secure Policy Mode: SLP Discovery   IPSec   Ping and Ping IPv6 Traceroute and Traceroute IPv6   bootp TFTP IPv6   SNMPv3 IPv6 To configure the switch policy mode, use the following command: Table 375. Security Policy Configuration Command Syntax and Usage boot securitypolicy {legacymode|securemode} Configures the switch security policy. Note: A switch reload is needed for the changes to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration show boot securitypolicy Displays the current security policy configuration. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 626: Configuring The Number Of Spanning Tree Groups
Configuring the Number of Spanning Tree Groups The maximum number of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) available on the switch can be configured to be either 128 or 256. Table 376. Configuring the Maximum Number of STGs Command Options Command Syntax and Usage boot spanningtree maxinstances {128|256} Configures the maximum number of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) that can be used on the switch. The default value is 128. Note: The switch needs to be reloaded for the configuration to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration no boot spanningtree maxinstances Reset the maximum number of STGs available on the switch to the default value of 128. Note: The switch needs to be reloaded for the configuration to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration show boot spanningtree Displays the maximum number of currently available STGs on the switch and the maximum number of available STGs after the switch reloads. Command mode: All The following command displays the current maximum limit of STGs on the switch and the maximum limit configured after the switch reloads: show boot spanningtree Command mode: All Bootup Max PVRST Instances: 128 Saved Max PVRST Instances: 256 NOTE: A Reboot is required for the new settings to take effect. When switching from 256 to 128 STP instances, please remove any extra configuration for STP instance 128 and above, then save the configuration; otherwise, all STP instance configuration may be lost after reload.
Page 627: Machine Type Model Configuration
Machine Type Model Configuration This feature configures the switch Machine Type Model (MTM). Table 377. Machine Type Model Configuration Command Syntax and Usage boot mtm <MTM code> Configures the switch’s machine type model (MTM) value. MTMs are applied on reboot and persist over firmware upgrades: Command mode: Global configuration © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 628: Qsfp Port Configuration
QSFP Port Configuration The following table displays the QSFP Port configuration commands. Table 378. QSFP Port Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] boot qsfp40gports <port alias or number> Enables or disables 40GbE mode on the selected QSFP+ ports. When enabled, each QSFP+ port is set as a single 40GbE port. When disabled, each QSFP+ port is configured to breakout into four 10GbE ports. Note: You must reboot the switch for this change to take effect. Command mode: Global configuration show boot qsfpportmodes Displays the current QSFP parameters. Command mode: All G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 629: Usb Boot Configuration
RSG8264CS_Boot.img  The switch replaces the current boot image with the new image and boots with the new image. RSG8264CS_OS.img  The switch boots with the new software image. The existing images are not affected. RSG8264CS_replace1_OS.img  The switch replaces the current software image1 with the new image and boots with the new image. RSG8264CS_replace2_OS.img  The switch replaces the current software image2 with the new image and boots with the new image. RSG8264CS.cfg  The switch boots with the new configuration file. The existing configuration files (active and backup) are not affected. RSG8264CS_replace.cfg  The switch replaces the active configuration file with the new file and boots with the new file. This file takes precedence over any other configuration files that may be present on the USB drive. If more than one valid file is present, the switch loads all valid files and boots with them. For example, you may simultaneously load a new boot file, image file and configuration file from the USB drive. The switch ignores any files that do not match the valid file names or that have the wrong format. You also can copy files to and from the USB drive. See “USB Copy” on page 612. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 630 To safely remove the USB device without corrupting any files, use the following command: system usbeject Command mode: Global configuration Note: Not available in stacking. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 631: Updating The Switch Software Image
Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the RackSwitch G8264CS. A version of the image ships with the switch and comes pre‐installed on the device. As new versions of the image are released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. Use the following command to determine the current software version: show boot Command mode: All Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following:  Loading the new image onto a SFTP, FTP, or TFTP server on your network  Transferring the new image from the SFTP, FTP, or TFTP server to your switch  Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is rebooted © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 632: Loading New Software To Your Switch
Loading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1 and image2, as well as boot software, called boot. When you load new software, you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1, image2 or boot. For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1), if needed. To load a new software image to your switch, you need the following:  The image or boot software loaded on a SFTP/FTP/TFTP server on your network  The hostname or IP address of the SFTP/FTP/TFTP server  The name of the new software image or boot file Note: The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. 1. In Privileged EXEC mode, enter the following command: RS G8264CS# copy {ftp|tftp|sftp} {image1|image2|bootimage} 2. Select a port to use for downloading the image. Port type [DATA|MGT]: 3. Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP, FTP or TFTP server. < > Address or name of remote host: IP address or hostname 4. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. < > Source file name: ...
Page 633: Selecting A Software Image To Run
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a SFTP, FTP or TFTP server. 1. In Privileged EXEC mode, enter: RS G8264CS# copy {image1|image2|bootimage} {ftp|tftp|sftp} 2. Select a port type to use for uploading the image. Port type [DATA|MGT]: 3. Enter the name or the IP address of the SFTP, FTP or TFTP server: <IP address or hostname> Address or name of remote host: 4. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the SFTP, FTP or TFTP server: <filename> Destination file name: 5. Enter your username and password for the server, if applicable. User name: <username> <Enter> 6. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded, enter Y. image2 currently contains Software Version 6.6.0 that was downloaded at 0:23:39 Thu Jan 3, 2011. Upload will transfer image2 (2788535 bytes) to file "image1" on FTP/TFTP server 1.90.90.95. Confirm upload operation (y/n) ? y © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 634: Selecting A Configuration Block
Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the RackSwitch G8264CS, you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is rebooted. When you perform a save operation, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your RackSwitch G8264CS was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom‐configured RackSwitch G8264CS is moved to a network environment where it will be re‐configured for a different purpose. In Global Configuration mode, use the following command to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is rebooted: RS G8264CS(config)# boot configurationblock {active|backup|factory} G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 635: Setting An Entitlement Serial Number
Setting an Entitlement Serial Number To improve customer technical support, your customer support representative can assign your switch an Entitlement Serial Number (ESN) at the time you request support. The ESN can be conveniently stored on the switch using the following command: RS G8264CS(config)# boot esn <Entitlement Serial Number> The ESN helps to locate your switch’s identifying information when you call technical support for help in future. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 636: Rebooting The Switch
Rebooting the Switch You can reboot the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. Note: Rebooting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be lengthy, depending on the topology of your network. Enter the following command to reboot (reload) the switch: RS G8264CS# reload [nodump] You are prompted to confirm your request. Reset will use software "image2" and the active config block. >> Note that this will RESTART the Spanning Tree, >> which will likely cause an interruption in network service. Confirm reload (y/n) ? Note: Before rebooting, the switch writes (saves) technical support information (backup‐tech‐support) in a local file to flash memory. The nodump option skips this step, thereby decreasing the time needed for the switch to reboot. By default, the switch saves technical support information before rebooting. Technical support information (backup‐tech‐support) can be uploaded to an external server using the following command: copy backuptechsupport {ftp|sftp|tftp} Command mode: Privileged EXEC Note: Technical support information is stored in a compressed format. For details, see page 645. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 637: Using The Boot Management Menu
Using the Boot Management Menu The Boot Management menu allows you to switch the software image, reset the switch to factory defaults or to recover from a failed software download. You can interrupt the boot process and enter the Boot Management menu from the serial console port. When the system displays Memory Test, press <Shift + B>. The Boot Management menu appears. Boot Management Menu I Change booting image C Change configuration block R Boot in recovery mode (tftp and xmodem download of images to recover switch) Q Reboot E Exit Please choose your menu option: The Boot Management menu allows you to perform the following actions:  To change the booting image, press I and follow the screen prompts.  To change the configuration block, press C and follow the screen prompts.  To boot in recovery mode press R. For more details see “Boot Recovery Mode” on page 638.  To restart the boot process from the beginning, press Q.  To exit the Boot Management menu, press E. The booting process continues. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 638: Boot Recovery Mode
Boot Recovery Mode The Boot Recovery Mode allows you to recover from a failed software or boot image upgrade using TFTP or XModem download. To enter Boot Recovery Mode you must select “Boot in recovery mode” option from the Boot Management Menu by pressing R. Entering Rescue Mode. Please select one of the following options: T) Configure networking and tftp download an image X) Use xmodem 1K to serial download an image P) Physical presence (low security mode) R) Reboot E) Exit Option? : The Boot Recovery Mode menu allows you to perform the following actions: To recover from a failed software or boot image upgrade using TFTP, press T  and follow the screen prompts. For more details, see “Recover from a Failed Image Upgrade using TFTP” on page 639.  To recover from a failed software or boot image upgrade using XModem download, press X and follow the screen prompts. For more details, see “Recovering from a Failed Image Upgrade using XModem Download” on page 641.  To enable the loading of an unofficial image, press P and follow the screen prompts. For more details, see “Physical Presence” on page 643.  To restart the boot process from the beginning, press R.  To exit Boot Recovery Mode menu, press E. The boot process continues. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 639: Recover From A Failed Image Upgrade Using Tftp
HyperTerminal, SecureCRT or PuTTY) and input the proper host name (IP address) and port to connect to the console port of the switch. 3. Boot the switch and access the Boot Management menu by pressing <Shift + B> while the Memory Test is in progress and the dots are being displayed. 4. Enter Boot Recovery Mode by selecting R. The Recovery Mode menu will appear. 5. To start the recovery process using TFTP, select T. The following message will appear: Performing TFTP rescue. Please answer the following questions (enter 'q' to quit): 6. Enter the IP address of the management port: IP addr : 7. Enter the network mask of the management port: Netmask : 8. Enter the gateway of the management port: Gateway : 9. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server: Server addr: 10.Enter the filename of the image: Image Filename: 11. If the file is a software image, enter an image number: Install image as image 1 or 2 (hit return to just boot image): After the procedure is complete, the Recovery Mode menu will be re‐displayed. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 640 Below is an example of a successful recovery procedure using TFTP: Entering Rescue Mode. Please select one of the following options: T) Configure networking and tftp download an image X) Use xmodem 1K to serial download an image P) Physical presence (low security mode) R) Reboot E) Exit Option? : t Performing TFTP rescue. Please answer the following questions (enter 'q' to quit): IP addr :10.241.6.4 Netmask :255.255.255.128 Gateway :10.241.6.66 Server addr:10.72.97.135 Image Filename: G8264CS8.4.1.0_OS.img Netmask : 255.255.255.128 Gateway : 10.241.6.66 Configuring management port....... Installing image G8264CS8.4.1.0_OS.img from TFTP server 10.72.97.135 Extracting images ... Do *NOT* power cycle the switch. Installing Application: Image signature verified. Install image as image 1 or 2 (hit return to just boot image): 2 Installing image as image2: 100% Image2 updated succeeded Updating install log. File G8264CS8.4.1.0_OS.img installed from 10.72.97.135 at 15:29:30 on 1232015 Please select one of the following options: T) Configure networking and tftp download an image X) Use xmodem 1K to serial download an image P) Physical presence (low security mode) R) Reboot E) Exit Option? : G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 641: Recovering From A Failed Image Upgrade Using Xmodem Download
Stop Bits: 1  Parity: None  Flow Control: None  3.Boot the switch and access the Boot Management menu by pressing <Shift + B> while the Memory Test is in progress and the dots are being displayed. 4. Enter Boot Recovery Mode by selecting R. The Recovery Mode menu will appear. 5. Select X for Xmodem download. You will see the following display: Running xmodem rescue..6. When you see the following message, change the Serial Port speed to 115200 bps: Change the baud rate to 115200 bps and hit the <ENTER> key before initiating the download. 7. Press <Enter> to set the system into download accept mode. When the readiness meter displays (a series of “C” characters), start Xmodem on your terminal emulator. You will see a display similar to the following: ... Waiting for the <Enter> key to be hit before the download can start... 8. Select the image to download. Xmodem initiates the file transfer. When download is complete, you are asked to change the Serial Port speed back to 9600 bps: Change the baud rate back to 9600 bps, hit the <ENTER> key 9. Press <Enter> to start installing the image. If the file is a software image, enter the image number: Install image as image 1 or 2 (hit return to just boot image): © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 642 The image install will begin. After the procedure is complete, the Recovery Mode menu will be re‐displayed. Extracting images ... Do *NOT* power cycle the switch. Installing Root Filesystem: Image signature verified. 100% Installing Kernel: Image signature verified. 100% Installing Device Tree: Image signature verified. 100% Installing Boot Loader: 100% Updating install log. File image installed from xmodem at 18:06:02 on 1332015 Please select one of the following options: T) Configure networking and tftp download an image X) Use xmodem 1K to serial download an image P) Physical presence (low security mode) R) Reboot E) Exit Option? : Boot image recovery is complete. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 643: Physical Presence
5. To begin the Physical Presence procedure, select P. The following warning message will appear: WARNING: the following test is used to determine physical presence and if completed will put the switch in low security mode. 6. You will be prompted for confirmation: Do you wish to continue y/n? 7. A security test will be performed. The system location (blue) LED will blink a number of times between 1 and 12. Enter that number: Hit a key to start the test. The blue location LED will blink a number of times.... How many times did the LED blink? 8. After entering the correct number, the Recovery Mode menu will re‐appear. To install an unofficial image use one of the following procedures:  TFTP (for details, see page 639)  XModem Download (for details, see page 641) Note: You have three attempts to successfully complete the security test. After three incorrect attempts, the switch will reboot. Note: After the test is completed, the switch will be put in low security mode. This mode will allow you to install unofficial images on the switch. To revert to normal security mode, you must reboot the switch or press P again in the Recovery Mode menu. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 6: Boot Options...
Page 644 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 645: Chapter 7. Maintenance Commands
 The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. To use the maintenance commands, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. Table 379. General Maintenance Commands Command Syntax and Usage copy flashdump {tftp|ftp|sftp} {dataport|mgtport} Saves the system dump information via TFTP, SFTP or FTP. For details, see page 663. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy <switch filename> tftp address <TFTP server IP address> filename <TFTP server filepath> {dataport|mgtport} Uploads a file via TFTP. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy log {stfp|tftp} {dataport|mgtport} Uploads the system log file (SYSLOG) via SFTP or TFTP. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy techsupport {ftp|sftp} {dataport|mgtport} Uploads the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external FTP/SFTP server. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy techsupport tftp address <hostname or server IP address> filename <TFTP server filepath> {dataport|mgtport} Uploads the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external TFTP server. Command mode: Privileged EXEC copy backuptechsupport {ftp|sftp} {dataport|mgtport} Uploads the technical support information saved before a switch reboot (backup‐tech‐support) to an external FTP/SFTP server. Note: Technical support information is stored in a compressed format. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 646 Table 379. General Maintenance Commands (continued) Command Syntax and Usage copy backuptechsupport tftp address <hostname or server IP address> filename <TFTP server filepath> {dataport|mgtport} Uploads the technical support information saved before a switch reboot (backup‐tech‐support) to an external TFTP server. Note: Technical support information is stored in a compressed format. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear flashdump Clears dump information from flash memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear logging Clears the system log file (SYSLOG). Command mode: Privileged EXEC show techsupport [fcoe|l2|l3|link|port] Dumps all G8264CS information, statistics and configuration. You can log the output (tsdmp) into a file. To filter the information, use the following options: fcoe displays only FCoE‐related information  l2 displays only Layer 2‐related information  l3 displays only Layer 3‐related information  link displays only link status‐related information  port displays only port‐related information  Command mode: All except User EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 647: Forwarding Database Maintenance
Command Syntax and Usage show macaddresstable address <MAC address> Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. Enter the MAC address using one of the following formats: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56)  xxxxxxxxxxxx (such as 080020123456)  Command mode: All show macaddresstable interface port <port alias or number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. Command mode: All show macaddresstable multicast Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB. Command mode: All show macaddresstable privatevlan <VLAN ID (2‐4094)> Displays all FDB entries on a single private VLAN. Command mode: All show macaddresstable static Displays static entries in the FBD. Command mode: All show macaddresstable vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All no macaddresstable {multicast|static} {all|<MAC address> <VLAN ID (1‐4094)>} Removes static FDB entries. Command mode: Global configuration clear macaddresstable Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 648: Debugging Commands
Debugging Commands The Miscellaneous Debug Commands display trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug commands:  Events traced by the Management Processor (MP)  Events traced to a buffer area when a reboot occurs If the switch reboots for any reason, the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by Technical Support personnel. Table 381. Miscellaneous Debug Options Command Syntax and Usage debug debugflags This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes. Command mode: Privileged EXEC debug dumpbt Displays the backtrace log. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug lacp packet {receive|transmit|both} port <port alias or number> Enables or disables debugging for Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) packets on selected ports running LACP. The following parameters are available: receive filters only LACP packets received  transmit filters only LACP packets sent  both filters LACP packets either sent or received  port filters LACP packets sent/received on specific ports  By default, LACP debugging is disabled. Command mode: Privileged EXEC debug mpsnap Displays the Management Processor snap (or post‐mortem) trace buffer. This ...
Page 649 Table 381. Miscellaneous Debug Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] debug spanningtree bpdu [receive|transmit] Enables or disables debugging for Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) frames sent or received. The following parameters are available: receive filters only BPDU frames received  transmit filters only BPDU frames sent  By default, STP BPDU debugging is disabled. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug spanningtree tc Enables or disables the display of messages relating to STP topology changes. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug tacacsclient Enables or disables TACACS+ client debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC clear flashconfig Deletes all flash configuration blocks. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 650 SSH Debugging The following table describes the SSH debugging commands. Table 382. SSH Debugging Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] debug ssh client all Enables or disables all SSH Client debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh client state Enables or disables SSH Client state debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh server all Enables or disables all SSH Server debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh server disconnect Enables or disables SSH Server disconnect debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh server msg Enables or disables SSH Server type and protocol debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh server packet Enables or disables SSH Server type, protocol and packet debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug ssh server state Enables or disables SSH Server state debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 651 IPsec Debugging The following table describes the IPsec debugging commands. Table 383. IPsec Debugging Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] debug sec all Enables or disables all IP security debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug sec crypto Enables or disables all IP security cryptographic debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug sec ike Enables or disables all IP security IKEv2 debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug sec info Displays the current security debug flag. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug sec ipsec Enables or disables all IPsec debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 652 vLAG Debugging The following table describes vLAG debugging commands. Table 384. vLAG Debugging Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] debug vlag cfg Enable or disables vLAG configuration debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag fdbdatabase Enable or disables vLAG Forwarding Database debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag htlhchk Enable or disables vLAG Health Check debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag isl Enable or disables vLAG ISL debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag msg Enable or disables vLAG debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag portmgr Enable or disables vLAG Port Manager debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag sm Enable or disables vLAG State Machine debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag trunk Enable or disables vLAG aggregation debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug vlag vrrp Enable or disables vLAG VRRP debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 653 BGP Debugging The following table describes BGP debugging commands. Table 385. BGP Debugging Options Command Syntax and Usage [no] debug bgp Enables or disables all BGP debug messages for all existing peers. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug bgp <IP address> Enables or disables all BGP debug messages for the specified BGP neighbor. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug bgp <IP address> {in|out} Enables or disables all inbound or outbound BGP debug messages for the specified BGP neighbor. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug bgp {in|out} Enables or disables all inbound or outbound BGP debug messages. Command mode: Privileged EXEC [no] debug bgp persistent Enables or disables saving BGP debug settings to running configuration. Command mode: Privileged EXEC show debug bgp Displays the current BGP debug setting. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 654 BGP Maintenance The following table describes the BGP information commands. Table 386. Border Gateway Protocol Maintenance Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip bgp debugging [last] Displays all BGP debugging entries. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp debugging <IP address> [last] Displays all BGP debugging entries for the specified neighbor. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp debugging <IP address> ignored [last] Displays BGP information for routers that have been ignored by the specified neighbor. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp debugging <IP address> {in|out} [last] Displays inbound or outbound BGP debugging updates for the specified neighbor. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp debugging ignored [last] Shows all BGP information for routers that have been ignored. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp debugging {in|out} [last] Displays inbound or outbound BGP debugging updates. If the last option is specified, displays the results starting with the last entry first. Command mode: All show ip bgp information Displays the BGP routing table. Command mode: All show ip bgp information <IP address> <mask> Displays the BGP information related to the specified route.
Page 655 Table 387. DCBX Maintenance Commands Command Syntax and Usage show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> Displays DCBX feature information for the selected port. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> app_proto Displays DCBX application protocol state‐machine information. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> control Displays information about the Control state machine for the selected port. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> ets Displays DCBX ETS state‐machine information. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> feature Displays information about the Feature state machine for the selected port. Command mode: All show cee information dcbx port <port alias or number> pfc Displays DCBX PFC state‐machine information. Command mode: All show dcbx receive <port alias or number> Displays the Type‐Length‐Value (TLV) list received in the DCBX TLV for the selected port. Command mode: All show dcbx transmit <port alias or number> Displays the Type‐Length‐Value (TLV) list transmitted in the DCBX TLV for the selected port. Command mode: All © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 656 LLDP Cache Manipulation The following table describes the LLDP cache manipulation commands. Table 388. LLDP Cache Manipulation Options Command Syntax and Usage show lldp [information] Displays all LLDP information. Command mode: All show lldp port <port alias or number> Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information. Command mode: All show lldp port <port alias or number> tlv evb Displays Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) type‐length‐value (TLV) information for the specified port. Command mode: All show lldp receive Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine. Command mode: All show lldp transmit Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine. Command mode: All show lldp remotedevice [<1‐256>|detail|port <port alias or number>] Displays information received from LLDP ‐capable devices. For more information, see page Command mode: All clear lldp Clears the LLDP cache. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 657: Arp Cache Maintenance
ARP Cache Maintenance The following table describes the ARP cache maintenance commands. Table 389. Address Resolution Protocol Maintenance Options Command Syntax and Usage show [ip] arp Shows all ARP entries. Command mode: All show [ip] arp find <IP address> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. Command mode: All show [ip] arp interface port <port number or alias> Shows ARP entries on selected ports. Command mode: All show [ip] arp reply Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests. Command mode: All show [ip] arp vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All clear arp Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC Note: To display all or a portion of ARP entries currently held in the switch, you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 658: Ip Route Manipulation
IP Route Manipulation The following table describes the IP route manipulation commands. Table 390. IP Route Manipulation Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip route Shows all routes. Command mode: All show ip route address <IP address> Shows a single route by destination IP address. Command mode: All show ip route gateway <IP address> Shows routes to a default gateway. Command mode: All show ip route interface <1‐128> Shows routes on a single interface. Command mode: All show ip route tag {address|bgp|broadcast|fixed|martian| |multicast|ospf|rip|static} Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 40 on page Command mode: All show ip route type {broadcast|direct|indirect|local| |martian|multicast} Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 39 on page Command mode: All clear ip route Clears the route table from switch memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC Note: To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 659: Igmp Snooping Maintenance
IGMP Snooping Maintenance The following table describes the IGMP Snooping maintenance commands. Table 391. IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Options Command Syntax and Usage show ip igmp groups Displays information for all multicast groups. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups address <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups detail <IP address> Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups interface port <port alias or number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on selected ports. Command mode: All show ip igmp groups portchannel <1‐128> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Command mode: All show ip igmp groups vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. Command mode: All clear ip igmp groups Clears the IGMP group table. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 660: Igmp Multicast Routers Maintenance
IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance The following table describes the maintenance commands for IGMP multicast routers (Mrouters). Table 392. IGMP Multicast Router Maintenance Commands Command Syntax and Usage show ip igmp mrouter [dynamic|interface|portchannel|static] Displays information for all Mrouters, all dynamic/static Mrouter ports installed or Mrouter ports specific to a specified interface/portchannel. Command mode: All show ip igmp mrouter information Displays IGMP snooping information for all Mrouters. Command mode: All show ip igmp mrouter vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IGMP Mrouter information for a single VLAN. Command mode: All show ip igmp querier vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Displays IGMP querier information for a single VLAN. Command mode: All show ip igmp relay Displays IGMP relay information. Command mode: All show ip igmp snoop igmpv3 Displays IGMPv3 snooping information. Command mode: All clear ip igmp mrouter Clears the dynamic IGMP Mrouter port table. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 661 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Manipulation The following table describes the IPv6 Neighbor Cache manipulation commands. Table 393. IPv6 Neighbor Cache Manipulation Options Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 neighbors Shows all IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors find <IPv6 address> Shows a single IPv6 Neighbor Cache entry by IP address. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors interface port <port alias or number> Shows IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries on a single port. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors static Shows static IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries. Command mode: All show ipv6 neighbors vlan <VLAN ID (1‐4094)> Shows IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries on a single VLAN. Command mode: All clear ipv6 neighbors Clears all IPv6 Neighbor Cache entries from switch memory. Command mode: Privileged EXEC © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 662 IPv6 Route Maintenance The following table describes the IPv6 route maintenance commands. Table 394. IPv6 Route Maintenance Options Command Syntax and Usage show ipv6 route Shows all IPv6 routes. Command mode: All show ipv6 route address <IPv6 address> Show a single route by destination IP address. Command mode: All show ipv6 route gateway <IPv6 gateway address> Show routes to a single gateway. Command mode: All show ipv6 route interface <1‐128> Show routes on a single IP interface. Command mode: All show ipv6 route static Show static IPv6 routes. Command mode: All show ipv6 route summary Shows a summary of IPv6 route information. Command mode: All show ipv6 route type {connected|static|ospf} Show routes of a single type. Command mode: All clear ipv6 route Clears all IPv6 routes. Command mode: Privileged EXEC G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 663 TFTP, SFTP, or FTP System Dump Copy Use these commands to copy (save) the system dump to a TFTP, SFTP or FTP server. Note: If the TFTP/FTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified file must exist prior to executing the copy flashdump tftp command (or copy flashdump sftp) and must be writable (set with proper permission and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP, enter: RS G8264CS# copy flashdump tftp <server filename> You are prompted for the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and the filename of the target dump file. To save dump information via SFTP, enter: RS G8264CS# copy flashdump sftp <server filename> You are prompted for the SFTP server IP address or hostname, and the filename of the target dump file. To save dump information via FTP, enter: RS G8264CS# copy flashdump ftp <server filename> You are prompted for the FTP server IPv4 address or hostname, your username and password, and the filename of the target dump file. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 664: Clearing Dump Information
Clearing Dump Information To clear dump information from flash memory, enter: RS G8264CS# clear flashdump The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message: FLASH dump region cleared. If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message: FLASH dump region is already clear. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 665: Unscheduled System Dumps
Unscheduled System Dumps If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch: Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 13:43:22 Wednesday January 30, 2011. Use show flashdump uuencode to extract the dump for analysis and clear flashdump to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Chapter 7: Maintenance Commands...
Page 666 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 667: Appendix A. Lenovo N/Os System Log Messages
Appendix A. Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages The RackSwitch G8264CS uses the following syntax when outputting system log (syslog) messages: <Time stamp> <IP/Hostname> <Log Label> <Thread ID>:<Message> The following parameters are used:  <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in the following format: <month (3 characters)> <day> <hour (1‐24)>:<minute>:<second> For example: Aug 19 14:20:30  <IP/Hostname> The hostname is displayed when configured. For example: 1.1.1.1  <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_CRIT, LOG_WARNING, LOG_ALERT, LOG_ERR, LOG_NOTICE and LOG_INFO.  <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. For example: stg, ip, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, bgp  <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only the <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server or ssh. © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 668 LOG_ALERT Thread LOG_ALERT Message Possible buffer overrun attack detected! session with <IP address> failed (bad event:<event>) session with <IP address> failed <reason> Reasons: Connect Retry Expire Receive UPDATE    Holdtime Expire  Start Invalid Stop    Keepalive Expire  Transport Conn Closed  Receive KEEPALIVE  Transport Conn Failed  Receive NOTIFICATION  Transport Conn Open  Receive OPEN  Transport Fatal Error HOTLINKS LACP trunk <trunk ID> and <trunk ID> formed with admin key <key>...
Page 669 VRRP Received <x> virtual routers instead of <y> VRRP received errored advertisement from <IP address> VRRP received incorrect addresses from <IP address> VRRP received incorrect advertisement interval <interval> from <IP address> VRRP received incorrect VRRP authentication type from <IP address> VRRP received incorrect VRRP password from <IP address> VRRP VRRP: received incorrect IP addresses list from <IP address> VLAN <VLAN Number>: Device <PWWN> has logged out Reached max logins limit(<MAX_LOGIN_LIMIT> Vlan <VLAN Number>: FDISC from pwwn <PWWN> rejected because of max FDISC limit; Decrease area‐size configuration to allow more FDISCs per Enode. Wwn member count limit exceeded Maximum default zone login limit(<MAX_LOGIN_LIMIT>) exceeded © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 670 LOG_CRIT Thread LOG_CRIT Message canʹt allocate memory in load_MP_INT() currently not enough resource for loading RSA {private|public key} SYSTEM System memory is at <n> percent G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 671 Critical Error. Failed to add Interface <interface> MGMT Diff is issued by another user. Try later MGMT Dump is issued by another user. Try later MGMT Error: Apply not done MGMT Error: Save not done. MGMT Firmware download failed (insufficient memory) MGMT Revert Apply is issued by another user. Try later MGMT Revert is issued by another user. Try later. MGMT Save is issued by another user. Try later unable to listen to NTP port PFC can be enabled on 2 priorities only ‐ priority 3 and one other priority. Cannot set ʺ{Hello Time|Max Age|Forward Delay|Aging}ʺ (Switch is in MSTP mode) SYSTEM Error: BOOTP Offer was found incompatible with the other IP interfaces SYSTEM I2C device <ID> <description> set to access state <state> [from CLI] SYSTEM Not enough memory! © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 672 LOG_INFO Thread LOG_INFO Message System log cleared by user <username>. System log cleared via SNMP. HOTLINKS ʺErrorʺ is set to ʺ{Active|Standby}ʺ HOTLINKS ʺLearningʺ is set to ʺ{Active|Standby}ʺ HOTLINKS ʺNoneʺ is set to ʺ{Active|Standby}ʺ HOTLINKS ʺSide Maxʺ is set to ʺ{Active|Standby}ʺ HOTLINKS has no ʺ{Side Max|None|Learning|Error}ʺ interface MGMT /* Config changes at <time> by <username> */ <config diff> /* Done */ MGMT <username> ejected from BBI MGMT <username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout|connection closed} from {Console|Telnet/SSH} MGMT <username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>} MGMT boot kernel download completed. Now writing to flash. MGMT boot kernel downloaded {from host <hostname>|via browser}, filename too long to be displayed, software version <version> MGMT boot kernel downloaded from host <hostname>, file ʹ<filename>ʹ, software version <version> MGMT Canʹt downgrade to image with only single flash support MGMT Could not revert unsaved changes MGMT Download already currently in progress. Try again later via {Browser|BBI} MGMT Error in setting the new config...
Page 673 MGMT scp<username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout| connection closed} from {Console|Telnet/SSH} MGMT scp<username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>} MGMT SP boot kernel download completed. Now writing to flash. MGMT SP boot kernel downloaded {from host <hostname>|via browser}, filename too long to be displayed, software version <version> MGMT SP boot kernel downloaded from host <hostname>, file ʹ<filename>ʹ, software version <version> MGMT Starting Firmware download for {invalid image|image1|image2| boot kernel|undefined|SP boot kernel}. MGMT Static FDB entry on disabled VLAN MGMT Tech support dump failed MGMT Tech support dump successfully tftpʹd to <hostname>:<filename> MGMT Two Phase Apply Failed in Creating Backup Config Block. MGMT undefined download completed. Now writing to flash. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 674 Thread LOG_INFO Message (continued) MGMT undefined downloaded {from host <hostname>|via browser}, filename too long to be displayed, software version <version> MGMT undefined downloaded from host <hostname>, file ʹ<filename>ʹ, software version <version> MGMT unsaved changes reverted [from BBI|from SNMP] MGMT Unsupported GBIC {accepted|refused} MGMT user {SNMP user|<username>} ejected from BBI MGMT Watchdog has been {enabled|disabled} MGMT Watchdog timeout interval is now <seconds> seconds) MGMT Wrong config file type <username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout|connection closed} from {Console|Telnet/SSH} <username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>} Error in setting the new config New config set scp<username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout| connection closed} from {Console|Telnet/SSH} scp<username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>} server key autogen {starts|completes} Wrong config file type SYSTEM booted version <version> from Flash image <image>, {active| backup|factory} config block G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 675 MGMT <username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout|connection closed} from {BBI|Console|Telnet/SSH} MGMT <username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>| from BBI} MGMT Authentication failed for backdoor. MGMT Authentication failed for backdoor. Password incorrect! MGMT Authentication failed for backdoor. Telnet disabled! MGMT boot config block changed MGMT boot image changed MGMT boot mode changed MGMT enable password changed MGMT Error in setting the new config MGMT Failed login attempt via {BBI|TELNET} from host <IP address>. MGMT Failed login attempt via the CONSOLE © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 676 Thread LOG_NOTICE Message (continued) MGMT FLASH Dump cleared from BBI MGMT New config set MGMT packet‐buffer statistics cleared MGMT PANIC command from CLI MGMT Password for {oper|operator} changed by {SNMP user| <username>}, notifying admin to save. MGMT QSFP: Port <port> changed to {10G|40G}, from {BBI|SNMP|CLI}. MGMT RADIUS server timeouts MGMT RADIUS: authentication timeout. Retrying... MGMT RADIUS: failed to contact {primary|secondary} server MGMT RADIUS: No configured RADIUS server MGMT RADIUS: trying alternate server... MGMT scp<username>(<user type>) {logout|ejected|idle timeout| connection closed} from {Console|Telnet/SSH} MGMT scp<username>(<user type>) login {on Console|from host <IP address>} MGMT second syslog host changed to {this host|<IP address>} MGMT selectable [boot] mode changed MGMT STP BPDU statistics cleared MGMT switch reset from CLI...
Page 677  SMS‐64 found an under‐voltage  hard reset from Telnet  software ASSERT  low memory  software PANIC  MM Cycled Power Domain  software VERIFY  power cycle  Telnet PANIC command  Reset Button was pushed  unknown reason  reset by SNMP  watchdog timer  reset by WEB‐UI © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 678 Thread LOG_NOTICE Message (continued) SYSTEM Received BOOTP Offer: IP: <IP address>, Mask: <netmask>, Broadcast <IP address>, GW: <IP address> SYSTEM Watchdog threshold changed from <old value> to <new value> seconds SYSTEM Watchdog timer has been enabled TEAMING error, action is undefined TEAMING is down, but teardown is blocked TEAMING is down, control ports are auto disabled TEAMING is up, control ports are auto controlled VLAN Default VLAN can not be deleted VRRP virtual router <IP address> is now {BACKUP|MASTER} <username> ejected from BBI RSA host key is being saved to Flash ROM, please donʹt reboot the box immediately. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 679 Authentication should be disabled to run RIPv2 in RIPv1 compatibility mode on interface <interface>. Multicast should be disabled to run RIPv2 in RIPv1 compatibility mode on interface <interface>. ETS prohibits a PG comprising of PFC and non‐PFC traffic. Mixing in the same PG different PFC settings may affect the switch functionality. HOTLINKS ʺErrorʺ is set to ʺStandby|Activeʺ HOTLINKS ʺLearningʺ is set to ʺStandby|Activeʺ HOTLINKS ʺNoneʺ is set to ʺStandby|Activeʺ HOTLINKS ʺSide Maxʺ is set to ʺStandby|Activeʺ HOTLINKS has no ʺ{Side Max|None|Learning|Error}ʺ interface cannot contact [primary|secondary] NTP server <IP address> SYSTEM I2C device <ID> <description> set to access state <state> [from CLI] TEAMING error, action is undefined TEAMING is down, but teardown is blocked TEAMING is down, control ports are auto disabled TEAMING is up, control ports are auto controlled © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix A: Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages...
Page 680 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 681: Appendix B. Getting Help And Technical Assistance
Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.  Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional devices are turned on.  Check for updated software, firmware, and operating‐system device drivers for your Lenovo product. The Lenovo Warranty terms and conditions state that you, the owner of the Lenovo product, are responsible for maintaining and updating all software and firmware for the product (unless it is covered by an additional maintenance contract). Your service technician will request that you upgrade your software and firmware if the problem has a documented solution within a software upgrade.  If you have installed new hardware or software in your environment, check the Lenovo ServerProven website to make sure that the hardware and software is supported by your product.  Go to the Lenovo Support portal to check for information to help you solve the problem.  Gather the following information to provide to the service technician. This data will help the service technician quickly provide a solution to your problem and ensure that you receive the level of service for which you might have contracted. Hardware and Software Maintenance agreement contract numbers, if  applicable Machine type number (Lenovo 4‐digit machine identifier)  Model number  Serial number  Current system UEFI and firmware levels  Other pertinent information such as error messages and logs  © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 682  Start the process of determining a solution to your problem by making the pertinent information available to the service technicians. The IBM service technicians can start working on your solution as soon as you have completed and submitted an Electronic Service Request. You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the troubleshooting procedures that Lenovo provides in the online help or in the Lenovo product documentation. The Lenovo product documentation also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform. The documentation for most systems, operating systems, and programs contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating system or program. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 683: Appendix C. Notices
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place ‐ Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON‐INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non‐Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. © Copyright Lenovo 2017...
Page 684 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development‐level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 685 Trademarks Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, Flex System, System x, NeXtScale System, and X‐Architecture are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Internet Explorer, Microsoft, and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix C: Notices...
Page 686: Important Notes
Important Notes Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other factors also affect application performance. CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often less than the possible maximum. When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume, KB stands for 1 024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for 1 073 741 824 bytes. When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user‐accessible capacity can vary depending on operating environments. Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any standard hard disk drives and population of all hard‐disk‐drive bays with the largest currently supported drives that are available from Lenovo. Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an optional memory module. Each solid‐state memory cell has an intrinsic, finite number of write cycles that the cell can incur. Therefore, a solid‐state device has a maximum number of write cycles that it can be subjected to, expressed as total bytes written (TBW). A device that has exceeded this limit might fail to respond to system‐generated commands or might be incapable of being written to. Lenovo is not responsible for replacement of a device that has exceeded its maximum guaranteed number of program/erase cycles, as documented in the Official Published Specifications for the device. Lenovo makes no representations or warranties with respect to non‐Lenovo products. Support (if any) for the non‐Lenovo products is provided by the third party, not Lenovo. Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include user manuals or all program functionality. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 687: Recycling Information
Recycling Information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information on recycling Lenovo products, go to: http://www.lenovo.com/recycling © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix C: Notices...
Page 688: Particulate Contamination
Particulate Contamination Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the device that is described in this document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the device to malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices that maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of human health and safety. If Lenovo determines that the levels of particulates or gases in your environment have caused damage to the device, Lenovo may condition provision of repair or replacement of devices or parts on implementation of appropriate remedial measures to mitigate such environmental contamination. Implementation of such remedial measures is a customer responsibility.. Contaminant Limits Particulate • The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.2 • Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or greater, using high‐efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet MIL‐STD‐282. • The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination must be more than 60% • The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc whis‐ kers. Gaseous • Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04‐1985 • Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days 1 ...
Page 689: Telecommunication Regulatory Statement
Telecommunication Regulatory Statement This product may not be certified in your country for connection by any means whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further certification may be required by law prior to making any such connection. Contact a Lenovo representative or reseller for any questions. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix C: Notices...
Page 690: Electronic Emission Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used to meet FCC emission limits. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that might cause undesired operation. Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES‐003. Avis de Conformité à la Réglementation d'Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB‐003 du ...
Page 691: Germany Class A Statement
Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Germany Class A Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU‐Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU‐Richtlinie 2014/30/EU (früher 2004/108/EC) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU‐Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der Klasse A der Norm gemäß Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln“ EMVG (früher „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten“). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU‐Richtlinie 2014/30/EU (früher 2004/108/EC) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix C: Notices...
Page 692: Japan Vcci Class A Statement
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten), bzw. der EMV EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU (früher 2004/108/EC ), für Geräte der Klasse A. Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG‐Konformitätszeichen ‐ CE ‐ zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D‐70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4: Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse Nach der EN 55022: „Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.“ Nach dem EMVG: „Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind.“ (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4). Dieses Genehmigungsverfahrenist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig. Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben. Japan VCCI Class A Statement This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case the user may be required to take corrective actions. G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 693: Taiwan Class A Compliance Statement
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Confirmed Harmonics Guidelines (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase) Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Confirmed Harmonics Guidelines with Modifications (products greater than 20 A per phase). Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement This is electromagnetic wave compatibility equipment for business (Type A). Sellers and users need to pay attention to it. This is for any areas other than home. Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission statement Taiwan Class A compliance statement © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Appendix C: Notices...
Page 694 G8264CS Command Reference for ENOS 8.4...
Page 695 LACP 446 broadcast (IP route type) 88 VLAN 559 active switch configuration gtcfg 611 ptcfg 610 Canada Class A electronic emission statement 690 restoring 611 CEE configuration 575 saving and loading 611 China Class A electronic emission statement 693 addr (IP route tag) 88 Cisco Ether Channel 436 administrator account 30 CIST information 78 assistance, getting 681 Class A electronic emission notice 690 Australia Class A statement 690 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Index...
Page 696 clear DCB Capability Exchange Protocol 579 CPU use statistics 193 DCBX dump information 664 configuration 579 FDB statistics 218 information 172 hot links statistics 218 debugging 645 IPv4 statistics 230 default gateway IPv6 statistics 231 information 84 LACP statistics 218 default gateway, interval (for health checks) 467 MP‐related statistics 193 default password 30 port statistics 193 delete statistics for all ports 195 CPU use statistics 193 trunk group statistics 216 FDB entry 647 vLAG statistics 226...
Page 697 33 interface change statistics 257 gaseous contamination 688 IP address gateway ARP information 90 clearing routes that use 469 invalid 208 default gateway configuration (IPv4) 467 invalid (IPv4) 233 IPv6 568 invalid (IPv6) 236 Germany Class A statement 691 IP forwarding getting help 681 directed broadcasts 474 gtcfg (TFTP load command) 611 information 84 IP information 84 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Index...
Page 698 IP interface 88 active 559 Korea Class A electronic emission statement 693 address of default gateway 467 configuration mode 22 configuring address 462 configuring VLANs 463 LACP information 84 clear statistics 218 IP route tag 88 configuration 445 network filter configuration 475 control plane protection 375 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP 561 information 59 IP routing interface portchannel mode 359 information 87 logged packet statistics 277 information (IPv6) 111 statistics 217 manipulation 658 vLAG information 69...
Page 699 570 Not‐So‐Stubby Area 498 New Zealand Class A statement 690 stub area 498 notes, important 686 transit area 498 notice 304 type 498 notices 683 virtual neighbor, router ID 507 NTP synchronization 330 parameters OAM Discovery tag 88 information 68 type 88 statistics 225 particulate contamination 688 online help 26 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Index...
Page 700 passwords 30 protocol‐based VLAN configuration 456 administrator account 30 ptcfg (TFTP save command) 610 default 30 PVID (port VLAN ID) 33 user access control 349 user account 30 Path MTU 570 path‐cost (STP port option) 426 RADIUS People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission 802.1x server timeout 411 statement 693 server configuration 316 PFC configuration 577 statistics 278 vs TACACS+ 318 component configuration 563 read community string (SNMP option) 334 component configuration mode 24 receive flow control 365 component information 136 reference ports 58...
Page 701 52 TTL security hops 516 bridge parameters 425 type of area bridge priority 76 OSPF 487 configuration 415 OSPFv3 498 information 52 type parameters 88 link type 73 typographic conventions, manual 18 path‐cost option 426 root bridge 76 root information 53 RSTP/PVRST 422 UCB statistics 281 switch reset effect 636 © Copyright Lenovo 2017 Index...
Page 702 UDLD configuration 367 bandwidth management 591 information 66 Distributed Virtual Switch 618 Edge Virtual Bridge configuration 605 statistics 248 group configuration 593 UniDirectional Link Detection 367 information 159 United States FCC Class A notice 690 policy configuration 591 unknown (UNK) port state 58 profile configuration 597 Unscheduled System Dump 665 VMready configuration 600 upgrade VMware switch software 631 configuration 599 USB Boot 629 dvSwitch operations 618 USB Copy 612 information 161 USB drive 612...